Skip to main content

Full text of "Rail bonds and appliances. Catalogue [no. 3] and manual"

See other formats


i-NRLF.. 


GIFT  OF 


Catalogue  No.  3 


Rail  Bonds 

and 

Bonding  Appliances 


THIS  company  maintains  a  fully 
equipped  bonding  department,  super- 
vised by  able  and  experienced  engineers 
and  manned  by  competent  workmen,  which 
has  for  many  years  and  with  marked  success 
attended  to  all  matters  pertaining  to  bond 
installations.  Through  this  department  we 
are  at  all  times  prepared  to  install  bonds, 
to  make  estimates  or  to  advise  customers 
regarding  specifications,  costs  of  installations 
and  so  on,  or  to  furnish  competent  super- 
visors for  installations  made  by  the  customer 
himself.  Correspondence  solicited. 


Sales  Offices 

CHICAGO 72  West  Adams  Street 

NEW  YORK 30  Church  Street 

WORCESTER 94  Grove  Street 

DENVER First  National  Bank  Building 

SAN    FRANCISCO Rialto  Building 

BOSTON 120  Franklin  Street 

CINCINNATI Union  Trust  Building 

CLEVELAND Western  Reserve  Building 

DETROIT Ford  Building 

LOS    ANGELES        Jackson  and  Central  Avenues 

MONTREAL Bank  of  Ottawa  Building 

PITTSBURG Frick  Building 

PORTLAND,   ORE Sixth  and  Alder  Streets 

SALT    LAKE    CITY,   UTAH Dooley  Building 

SEATTLE,   WASH.  .  Fourth  Ave.  South  and  Connecticut  St. 
ST.  PAUL-MINNEAPOLIS   .   Pioneer  Press  Building,  St.  Paul 

ST.  LOUIS Third  National  Bank  Building 

LONDON,  ENG 36  New  Broad  Street,  E.  C. 

EXPORT    REPRESENTATIVES 

UNITED    STATES    STEEL    PRODUCTS    COMPANY 
30  Church  Street,  New  York,  N.  Y. 


Rail  Bonds 

and  Appliances 


Catalogue  and  Manual 


American  Steel  &  Wire  Co< 


Copyright  1911  by 
American  Steel  &  Wire  Company 


\ 


Preface 

SINCE  the  edition  of  our  1907  cata- 
logue, many  changes  and  improve- 
ments have  been  made  in  rail  bonds  and 
bonding  tools,  and  much  valuable  informa- 
tion has  been  obtained,  so  that  we  are  now 
enabled  to  present  a  more  complete  and 
useful  treatise  on  this  subject. 

The  purpose  of  this  book  is  two-fold. 
First,  a  systematic  and  thorough  cataloging 
of  all  our  rail  bond  products,  which  have 
been  arranged  with  a  view  of  rendering  the 
customer  all  possible  assistance  in  selecting 
and  specifying  the  material  best  suited  to 
his  requirements.  And  secondly,  to  pre- 
sent in  serviceable  form  for  all  classes  of 
readers,  complete  and  reliable  information 
pertaining  to  rail  bond  matters  in  general. 


270319 


IS 

-     0 


Contents 

PART    I 

Page 

GENERAL  CONSIDERATIONS     .          .          .          .12 
Construction  of  rail  bonds. 
Their  selection  and  installation. 
Testing  rail  bonds. 

PART    II 

RAIL  BONDS 49 

Bonds  for  head  of  rails. 
Bonds  for  web  of  rails. 
Bonds  for  flange  of  rails. 

PART    III 

BONDING  TOOLS  AND  APPLIANCES  .          .       93 

Drilling  machines. 
Compressors. 
Soldering  and  hand  tools. 
Bond  testers. 

PART    IV 

XOTKS  ON   ELECTRICITY  .          .         .          .145 

Electric  railway  material. 
Engineering  data. 
Index. 


T 


Regarding  Orders 

O  avoid  errors,  delays  and  misunderstandings, 
purchasers  should  note  the  following: 


1.  Orders  and  correspondence  regarding  orders 
should  always  be  sent  to  the  nearest  sales  office. 

2.  In  ordering  bonds,  state  capacity,  diameter 
of  terminals,  distance  between  centers  of  bond  holes 
and  type,  and  form  number.     To  enable  us  to  check 
up  orders,  we  should  also  know  the  maker's  name 
and  section  number  of  rail  and  joint  plates,  also  the 
location  of  all  bolt  holes  and  diameter  of  bolts. 

3.  When   referring    to  orders  always  give    the 
number  and  date  of  the  order. 

4.  State  distinctly  how  goods  are  to  be  shipped, 
whether  by  freight,  express  or  mail.      If  any  special 
route  is    preferred   it  should    be  mentioned    in  the 
order.     We  reserve  the  right  to  route  all  shipments 
upon  which  we  pay  or  allow  freight. 

5.  Before    returning    tools   or   material,    please 
secure  from  us  shipping  directions. 

' .  G.  No  claims  for  allowances  will  be  entertained 
unless  made  within  ten  days,  after  arrival  of  the 
goods,  and  no  allowance  will  be  made  beyond  the 
original  invoice  price  of  material. 

7.      All  agreements  are  contingent  upon  strikes, 
accidents  or  other  causes  beyond  our  control. 


Part  I 


General   Considerations 

Page 
Function  and  types  of  rail  bonds     .          .  12,  13 

Copper,  material  used  .....        13 

Rail  bond  terminals      ......  14 

Area  of  contact  surfaces          .....  20 

Electrical  contact  of  stud  terminals          ...  22 

Installation  of  stud  terminals  ....  24 

Temperature  effects  on  stud  terminals  ...  26 

Rail  bond  conductors    ......  26 

Vibration  tests  .......  27 

The    welded    union    between     terminal    and 

conductor         .......       29 

Selection  of  rail  bonds          .....       30 

Location  and  length  of  bonds          ...  30,  31 

Carrying  capacity  of  bonds     ....  32,  3? 

Cost  of  installing  rail  bonds       ....        37 

Rail  bond  testing 39 

British  Board  of  Trade  regulations          .          .       43 
Specifications  for  rail  bonds       ....        48 


12 


Aittetfca'ki'  "Steel    and  Wire    Company 


General  Considerations 


HE  steel  rails  of  an  electric  railroad  not  only  serve  as  track  to 
guide  and  support  the  car  wheels,  but  they  are  also  used  in 
general  for  the  return  or  grounded  portion  of  the  electric  power 
circuit.  To  serve  these  two  functions,  the  rails  have  to  be  joined 
end  to  end  both  mechanically  and  electrically.  In  paved  streets 
these  two  connections  are  sometimes  effected  in  one  operation 
by  welding  the  rails  together,  but  they  are  more  generally  united  by  the  separate 
use  of  steel  splice  bars  and  copper  rail  bonds.  The  splice  bars  are  securely 
bolted  to  the  abutting  ends  of  contiguous  rails  to  hold  them  together  rigidly  and 
to  maintain  them  in  perfect  alignment.  The  splice  bars  cannot  be  depended 
upon,  however,  to  serve  as  good  conductors  to  conduct  the  return  current  from 
rail  to  rail,  owing  to  the  coating  of  rust  and  scale  always  present  on  exposed  rail- 
way steel,  which  at  times  effectually  insulate  the  parts.  Therefore  the  rails 
have  to  be  bonded  together  electrically  with  copper  rail  bonds  in  a  manner  which 
will  secure  a  continuous  or  uninterrupted  metallic  circuit  having  a  very  low 
electrical  resistance.  The  continuity  of  the  return  circuit  is  fully  as  essential  to 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances  13 

the  economical  operation  of  an  electric  railway  as  that  of  the  feeder  circuit. 
Rail  bonds  therefore  serve  as  electrical  conductors  for  bridging  rail  joints,  and 
they  have  no  other  function.  (See  "  Notes  on  Electricity,  page  140.) 

The  many  styles,  shapes  and  sizes  of  rail  bonds  shown  in  Part  II  of  this 
book  are  made  necessary  by  the  great  variety  of  types  and  dimensions  of  rails 
and  splice  bars,  and  by  various  kinds  of  track  construction.  All  rail  bonds  in 
common  use  are  alike  in  having  some  kind  of  a  solid  copper  terminal  connected 
to  each  end  of  a  flexible  copper  conductor.  The  terminals  which  serve  to 
make  electrical  contact  with  the  rail  vary  greatly  in  shape  and  size,  depending 
upon  the  manner  in  which  they  are  connected  to  the  rail  and  upon  the  carry- 
ing capacity  of  the  bond.  The  style,  shape  and  size  of  the  conductor  portion 
of  a  rail  bond  are  determined  by  the  particular  kind  of  rail  joint  to  be  bonded, 
by  the  carrying  capacity  of  the  bond,  and  by  the  method  of  applying  the 
terminals  to  the  rails.  The  useful  life  of  any  bond  will  depend  equally  upon 
the  integrity  of  the  terminal  contact  and  the  power  of  the  conductor  wires  to 
withstand  the  motions  of  the  rail  joint. 


Copper 

Pure  copper  such  as  used  in  the  construction  of  all  our  bond  terminals  and 
conductors,  possesses  many  physical  properties  which  make  it  indispensable  for 
rail  bond  purposes.  It  has  to  a  very  high  degree  the  qualities  of  conductivity, 
malleability  and  ductility.  Its  strength  and  hardness  are  greater  than  that  of 
any  other  metal  except  iron  and  steel,  and  when  drawn  into  smaller  wire  it  is 
extremely  flexible.  Copper  has  the  power  of  resisting  oxidation,  is  easily 
worked  and  can  be  forged  with  less  difficulty  than  iron.  Any  foreign  substance, 
whether  metallic  or  oxide,  alloyed  with  copper  will  have  a  bad  effect  upon 
these  useful  properties.  Copper  takes  a  fine  polish,  and  all  the  rail  bonds  we 
make  are  given,  by  special  processes,  a  beautiful  bright  finish  which  will  be 
retained  indefinitely. 


Types   of   Rail   Bonds 

The  American  Steel  &  Wire  Company  manufactures  five  distinct  types 
of  rail  bonds,  there  being  many  forms  and  sizes  of  each,  classified  as  follows  : 

Crown  Rail  Bonds      Having  stud  terminals  either  solid  for  compression  or 
tubular  for  pin  expansion,  the  conductors  joining  the 
terminals    being    either    single    solid 
copper    wires,    or    strands    composed 
of    a   number  of    small   round  wires. 
See  pages  60  to  75. 


14  American   Steel    and  Wire    Company 

United  States  Having  single  stud 
Rail  Bonds  terminals  either 
solid  for  compres- 
sion or  tubular  for  pin  expansion, 
the  conductor  being  composed  of  flat 
copper  strips  or  ribbons  laid  par- 
allel. See  page  76. 


Twin  Terminal      Having  two  small 

Rail     Bonds      paraHel    studs    on 

each  terminal,  the 

conductor  between  the  terminals 
being  composed  of  a  strand  of  small 
round  wire.  See  page  52. 


Soldered  Stud  Bonds       Having  flat 
terminals 

for  soldering  to  the  rail,  provided 
with  two  small  integral  studs  which 
are  expanded  into  corresponding 
holes  in  the  rail.  This  bond  has  a 
combination  stud  and  soldered  ter- 
%  •..;,£  minal.  The  conductor  is  composed 
either  of  round  wire  strand  or  of  flat 
copper  ribbons.  See  page  5(5. 

Soldered  Rail  Ronds      Having  flat 
terminals. 

The  electrical  connection  with  the 
rails  is  made  with  common  solder 
and  the  conductor  between  the  ter- 
minals is  composed  either  of  round 
wire  strand  or  of  flat  copper  rib- 
bons. See  page  58. 

Rail   Bond  Terminals 

The  cuts  show  five  different  kinds  of  rail  bond  terminals,  differing 
in  form  and  in  method  of  application  to  the  rail.  Of  these,  three  have  short 
cylindrical  studs  which  are  expanded  into  holes  drilled  in  or  through  some 
portion  of  the  rail  and  which  make  intimate  contact  with  the  steel.  These 
terminals  are  drop-forged  from  pure  rolled  copper  of  highest  conductivity.  A 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


15 


fourth  style  is  soldered  to  the  rail  surface,  while  the  fifth  is  a  combination  soldered 
and  stud  terminal.  Each  style  of  terminal  has  certain  distinguishing  features 
which  make  it  best  suited  for  certain  conditions,  as  will  now  be  pointed  out. 

Solid  Stud  Terminals     This  style  of  terminal  requires  for  its  application  to 
the  web  or  flange  of  a  rail,  the  use  of  some  form  of 

powerful  screw  or  hydraulic  compressor,  such  as  described  on  pages  120 
to  126.  Under  a  sufficiently 
and  correctly  applied  com- 
pression stress  from  one  of 
these  compressors,  a  solid  ter- 
minal stud  of  pure  annealed 
copper,  such  as  made  for 
the  Crown  and  United  States 
bonds,  will  expand  radially 
until  it  presses  against  the 
annular  walls  of  the  hole  in 
the  rail  with  great  force,  mak- 
ing an  intimate  molecular 
contact  that  is  lasting  and 
high  in  electrical  conductivity. 
These  bonds  have  at  each  end 
a  single  large  solid  terminal 
stud,  or  two  small  terminal 
studs  separated  1*^  inches 
between  centers. 

In  comparison  with  the 
other  two  styles  of  stud 
terminals  to  be  described,  the 
solid  stud  offers  the  single 

mechanical  advantage  of  having  a  rivet  or  button  head  formed  against  each  side 
of  the  rail  section,  which  helps  to  seal  the  contact  and  to  hold  it  more  securely. 

Tubular  Terminals     These  terminals  are  expanded  radially  against  the  walls 
of  holes  drilled  through  the  web  of  rails,  by  means  of 

tapered  expansion  punches  driven  through  them.  After  the  terminal  is 
inserted  in  the  hole,  a  long  taper  punch  (A,  next  page)  lubricated  with 
grease  or  heavy  oil  is  first  driven  entirely  through  the  terminal,  then  a  short 
drift  pin  B  is  driven  home,  as  shown  in  cuts  D  and  F.  The  diameter  of  the 
latter  is  about  B12  inch  greater  than  that  of  the  former.  Thus  the  small  drift 
pin  supplements  the  expansion  of  the  taper  punch,  while  the  compressed 
copper  lying  between  the  cylindrical  surface  of  drift  pin  and  the  larger  cylin- 
drical surface  of  the  hole  in  the  rail,  maintains  sufficient  friction  on  the  pin  to 


Section  Through  a  Solid  Terminal 


16 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Tubular   Terminals 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


17 


hold  it  in  place.  The  diameter  of  the  hole  through  the  terminal  is  thus 
enlarged  about  ^  of  an  inch,  causing  a  material  displacement  of  copper.  As 
the  metal  flows  against  the  wall  of  the  hole  in  the  rail  it  makes  an  extremely 
great  pressure  and  an  intimate  molecular  bearing  which  ensures  a  highly  efficient 
and  lasting  contact.  All  further  expansion  hardens  the  copper  and  causes 
a  portion  in  contact  with  the  expanding  punch  to  flow  along  with  it  out  of 
the  hole,  where  it  expands  and  forms  a  burr  or  rivet  head,  as  shown  in  cuts 
I)  and  F. 

Rail  bonds  provided  with  this  style  of  terminal  have  several  inherent 
advantages.  They  can  be  installed  more  quickly  and  economically  than  the 
compressed  type,  as  shown  on  page  38.  No  special  tools  are  required  for  their 
installation,  only  a  taper  punch,  a  drift  pin  and  a  heavy  hammer.  The  simplic- 
ity of  the  operation  ensures  uniformly  good  results.  In  the  application  of  this 
terminal  the  human  element  is  almost  entirely  eliminated.  All  the  work  can 
be  done  from  one  side  of  the  rail,  which  is  often  of  advantage  in  rebonding  rails 
in  paved  streets  and  in  bonding  frogs  or  other  special  track  construction.  If 
necessity  requires,  these  bonds  if  carefully  removed  may  be  used  a  second  or 
even  a  third  time.  A  taper  punch  and  drift  pin  somewhat  larger  than  used  in  the 
first  installation  will  produce  the  required  extra  expansion  and  a  perfect  contact. 

With  every  tubular  terminal  bond  we  ship  two  steel  drift  pins  without 
extra  charge,  and  in  large  orders  we  supply  an  extra  number  amounting  to 
rive  per  cent.  We  provide  hardened  steel  taper  punches,  in  sizes  correct  for 
the  terminals  in  which  they  are  to  be  used,  at  moderate  prices,  which  will  be 
quoted  upon  application. 

One  taper  punch  should  install  from  one  hundred  to  two  hundred  rail 
bonds.  The  following  table  shows  the  dimensions  of  taper  punches  and  pins 
regularly  made  for  different  sizes  of  tubular  terminals.  The  sizes  of  pins 
designated  as  "  standard  "  are  those  which  will  be  supplied  with  bonds,  unless 
otherwise  specified.  Standard  sizes  are  adequate  when  the  bond  holes  are 
drilled  reasonably  accurate  to  size.  Larger  pins  will  be  substituted  for  those 
of  standard  diameters,  without  additional  expense,  when  specified. 

Dimensions  of  Drift  Pins  and  Taper  Punches 
Table  I 


Terminals 

Drift  Pins 

Taper  Punches 

Diameter  in  Inches 

*    For 
Size  of  Bond 
B.  and  S. 
Gauge 

Diameter  of  Pins  in  Inches 

Greatest 
Diameter  in 
Inches  of 
Standard  Taper 
Punches 

Length  of 
Taper 
Punches  in 
Inches 

Outside 
Stud 

Hole 
Through 
Terminal 

Standard 

Special 

1  and  over 

H 

If 

4/6 

f 

-if  to  if 

If  to  ^ 

X 

15 
F£ 

5 

4 

X 
ft 

l/2 

1 

3/0 

2/0 
1/0 

ft 

% 

H 

1 

4 
8* 

3^ 

18 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Twin     Terminal   Bond 


Twin  Terminals      This  style  of  terminal,   as  more  fully  explained  on  page 
52,   is  provided  with  two  solid  parallel  copper  studs,  each 

one-half  inch  in   diameter  by  -^  (or  J±)  inch  long.      It   also  has  two   bosses 
located  axially  on  the  outer  side  over  the  studs.     The  two  terminal  studs  are 

spaced  .1.  ^  inches  between  centers 
and  are  placed  into  close-fitting 
bottomed  or  cup-shaped  holes  drilled 
in  the  outer  face  of  the  rail  head. 
The  four  holes  required  for  a  bond 
are  drilled  by  one  of  the  four- 
spindle  drills  described  on  pages  95 
to  105.  A  shallow  annular  groove 
or  thread  is  cut  into  the  wall  of 
each  hole  near  the  orifice,  as  shown. 
The  depth  of  the  holes  is  equal  to 
the  length  of  the  terminal  studs, 
less  -^g-  of  an  inch.  The  end  of 

each  stud  rests  upon  the  bottom  of  the  hole,  \yhich  serves  as  an  anvil. 
The  soft  copper  of  the  studs  is  expanded  laterally  by  means  of  hammer  blows 
applied  to  the  bosses  on  the  outer  face  of  the  terminal,  filling  the  annular 
groove  and  every  minute  depression  in  the  wall  of  the  hole.  The  extra  length 

of  the  studs  and  the  surplus  copper  in  the 
bosses  supply  enough  extra  metal  to  more 
than  fill  the  holes.  The  impact  of  the  ham- 
mer on  these  short  studs  fills  the  holes  full 
of  copper  and  causes  an  extremely  great 
contact  pressure  between  the  copper  and 
steel. 

This  style  of  terminal  has  several  ad- 
vantages peculiar  to  itself.  There  is  but 
one  possible  entrance  for  moisture  to  each 
hole  and  this  is  sealed  by  the  ring  or  thread 
of  copper  that  forms  about  each  stud  as  the 
copper  is  hammered  into  the  hole.  Each 
stud  is  securely  anchored  in  the  hole.  The 
area  of  contact  is  comparatively  large. 
Being  sealed  against  corroding  agencies  and 
under  great  pressure,  the  contact  will 
remain  bright  and  highly  conductive  for  an 

indefinite  period.     The  cost  of  installing  this  terminal  is  extremely  low.      No 

special  skill  is  required  for  its  installaton. 


Section  Through  Terminal  Hole 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances  19 

Soldered  Terminals       This  style  of   terminal  has  a  plane  surface  which  is 
soldered   direct  to  the   rail.      The   soldering   surfaces 

are  knurled  and  tinned  for  purposes  of  making  a  better  and  stronger  soldered 
union  to  the  steel.  The  durability  and  electrical  conductivity  of  a  soldered 
contact  between  copper  and  railway  steel  depend  to  a  great  extent  upon  the 
physical  condition  of  the  surfaces  as  to  whether  they  make  uniformly  close 
contact,  and  whether  they  are  clean  and  well  tinned  and  free  from  oxide  at 
the  time  of  soldering.  When  well  made  the  contact  resistance  per  square  inch 
of  surface  will  be  extremely  small.  The  working  temperature  of  the  metals, 
the  composition  of  the  solder  and  of  the  flux  may  vary  between  fairly  wide 
limits  without  affecting  the  strength  of  the  joint.  A  well  made  soldered  contact 
should  last  indefinitely  unless  it  is  broken  by  severe  jarring  of  the  running 
rail  caused  by  the  hammering  of  car  wheels  at  the  rail  joints.  (See  type 
B.  S.  B.,  next  page.) 

In  making  a  soldered  joint,  the  rail  surface  to  be  soldered  is  first  bright- 
ened  with  an  emery  wheel,  such  as  shown  on  page   132.     The  rail  is  then 
heated     with     a    double     burner 
brazier   (see  page  135)   until  the 
steel  takes  on  a  bright  blue  oxide. 
The  surface  is  then  quickly  tinned 
by   alternately   applying    a    good 
grade  of  soldering  flux  and  stick 

solder.      The  bond  terminals  are  Type  s>  B   Soldered  Bond 

then  fitted  closely  to  the  rail  so 

as  to  make  close  contact  throughout,  then  clamped  in  this  position.  The 
parts  are  reheated  and  treated  freely  with  flux,  then  wire  solder  is  fed  into 
the  space  between  the  surfaces  as  long  as  it  will  take  solder.  There  is  no 
positive  assurance  of  having  made  a  perfect  soldered  union  except  by  testing 
it  for  strength  or  for  electrical  resistance.  The  latter  test,  which  would  in  no 
way  injure  a  good  joint,  is  preferable  and  can  easily  be  made  with  the  Crown 
Bond  Tester  shown  on  page  42. 

The  Brazed  or  IVelded  Terminal  is  very  similar  in  form  and  size  to  the 
soldered  terminal.  The  brazing  spelter  which  secures  the  terminal  to  the  rail 
differs  from  solder  only  in  being  stronger  and  in  requiring  a  much  higher 
temperature  for  melting.  It  offers  no  advantage  electrically.  In  making  a 
welded  union,  the  copper  is  melted  and  the  steel  must  be  brought  to  an 
equally  high  temperature  before  the  two  metals  will  unite.  As  the  melting 
temperature  of  copper  or  brazing  spelter  is  but  little  below  that  of  steel,  a 
complex  and  expensive  apparatus  of  some  kind  is  required  for  heating  the  parts. 
Great  skill  and  care  of  the  workmen  are  required  to  control  this  high  tempera- 
ture so  as  not  to  injure  the  steel  or  burn  the  copper  while  applying  the  terminals. 


20  American    Steel    and   Wire    Company 

Soldered  Stud  Terminals     This  style  of  terminal  combines  all  the  good  fea- 
tures of  both  the  soldered  terminal  and  of  the  solid 

stud  terminal.    As  shown  in  the  illustration,  two  small  studs,  y^-  inch  in  diameter 

by  a  half  inch  long,  project  from  the 
inner  face  of  each  terminal  and  are 
expanded  in  corresponding  holes 
drilled  into  the  outer  side  of  the  head  or 
through  the  web  of  a  rail.  These 
studs  in  addition  to  making  good  and 
independent  electrical  contact  with 
the  steel,  relieve  the  solder  of  all  jar- 
ring strains  which  alone  tend  to  shorten 
the  life  of  a  soldered  bond  contact. 
Extremely  good  soldered  contacts  are 

Type  B.  s.  B.,  Form  A  Bond  easily  secured  with  this   style   of  ter- 

minal, for  in  compressing  the  studs  into 

the  holes  the  two  plane  soldering  surfaces  are  brought  without  the  use  of  clamps 
into  an  intimate  contact  which  is  ideal  for  soldering.  This  double  form  of 
contact  which  the  terminal  makes  with  the  steel  is  large  in  area,  extremely 
efficient  and  as  durable  as  the  rail.  It  has  the  strength  of  a  well  made  welded 
contact,  with  the  added  advantage  of  not  requiring  for  its  installation  any 
elaborate  heating  equipment  or  any  dangerously  high  working  temperatures. 

In  the  installation  of  this  terminal,  the  rail  is  first  drilled  with  one  of  our 
two  or  four-spindle  drills.  The  rail  surface  is  then  brightened  and  tinned  the 
same  as  for  soldered  bonds.  The  terminal  studs  are  then  hammered  home  if 
in  the  head  of  the  rail,  or  compressed  if  in  the  web.  The  rail  is  then  reheated 
and  the  bond  is  soldered  as  described  on  preceding  page  for  soldered  bonds. 
The  work  if  carefully  done  will  need  no  testing.  The  cost  of  installation  will 
be  but  little  in  excess  of  that  for  the  regular  soldered  bond,  as  shown  on  page 
38.  This  form  of  double  application  to  the  rail  has  been  used  extensively  and 
we  have  yet  to  hear  of  the  failure  of  a  single  terminal.  It  can  be  recom- 
mended very  highly  for  all  general  bonding  purposes. 

Area  of  Contact  Surfaces 

For  minimum  12R  losses  in  a  rail  joint,  the  contact  area  between  each 
terminal  and  steel  should  theoretically  bear  the  same  ratio  to  the  sectional 
area  of  the  bond  conductor  that  the  specific  resistance  of  the  steel  does  to  that 
of  copper.  This  ratio  varies  with  different  grades  of  steel  commonly  used  in 
track  rails  from  9  to  13,  12  being  considered  a  good  average  working  figure 
for  modern  railway  steel.  (See  page  33.) 

In  practice  it  has  been  found  unnecessary  to  use  so  large  a  contact  area  as 
this  would  require,  for  the  following  reasons.  A  good  contact  will  take  care  of 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


a  fairly  high  current  density  without  over-heating,  because  of  the  very  excellent 
heat  radiating  and  conducting  properties  of  the  steel  to  which  the  terminals  are 
attached.  The  smaller  the  diameter  of  a  solid  stud  the  greater  the  contact 
pressure  obtained  under  a  given  compression,  and  incidentally  the  smaller  the 
contact  resistance.  On  account  of  these  conditions  it  is  customary  to  provide 
a  contact  area  which  is  about  eight  times  greater  than  the  sectional  area  of  the 
bond  conductor. 


Actual  Contact  Areas  of  Stud  Terminals  in  Holes  through  Rail  Webs 
of   Different  Thicknesses 

Table  II 


Diameter 


Area  of  Annular  Contact,  Square  Inches 


of  Stud  Terminal 
Inches 

50-pound  T-rail 
with  /6-inch  Web 

65-pound  T-rail 
with  J$-inch  Web 

84-pound  to  100-pound 
T-rail  with  T9,,-inch  Web 

X 

.69 

.79 

.88 

H 

.86 

.98 

1.10 

% 

1.03 

1.18 

1.33 

Y* 

1.20 

1.37 

1.55 

1 

1.38 

1.57 

1.77 

1# 

1.55 

1.77 

1.99 

Required  Contact  Areas  of  Terminal  Studs  having  Ratios  of   1   to  8 

Table  III 


Capacity  of 
Bond  Conductor 

Sectional  Area  in  Square  Inches 
of  Bond  Conductor 

Contact  Area  of  Terminal  Equal 
to  Sectional  Area  Bond,  Times  8 

1/0  B.  &  S.  gauge 

.0830 

.66 

2/0  B.  &  S.  gauge 

.1045 

.84 

3/0  B.  &  S.  gauge 

.1318 

1.05 

4/0  B.  &  S.  gauge 

.1662 

1.33 

300,000  cir.  mils 

.2356 

1.89 

500,000  cir.  mils 

.3927 

3.14 

From  the  above,  it  will  be  observed  that  for  general  rail  bond  purposes,  a 

1/0  bond  should  have  stud  terminals  ^  inch  in  diameter. 

2/0  bond  should  have  stud  terminals  ^  inch  in  diameter. 

3/0  bond  should  have  stud  terminals  ^  inch  in  diameter. 

4/0  bond  should  have  stud  terminals  ^  inch  in  diameter. 
Larger  bonds  should  have  stud  terminals  from  1  inch  to  1^   inches  in 
diameter. 


22 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


With  a  current  density  in  the  bond  conductor  of  one  ampere  per  500 
circular  mils,  these  sizes  of  terminal  studs  will  give  a  current  density  of  about 
320  amperes  per  square  inch  of  contact  surface  for  bond  capacities  of  4/0  and 
under.  Though  this  current  density  may  seem  high,  it  has  been  found  in 
practice  that  the  suggested  diameters  are  ample  for  reasons  already  given,  and 
because  of  the  general  fluctuating  character  of  the  load  current.  This  subject 
is  continued  on  page  37. 


Electrical    Contacts   of    Stud   Terminals 

The  effectiveness  of  the  electrical  contacts  between  stud  terminals  and 
steel  rails  will  depend  in  every  case  upon  the  physical  condition  of  the  surfaces 
in  contact  and  the  pressure  forcing  the  parts  together.  This  form  of  electrical 
contact  is  by  far  the  simplest  of  all  to  make,  and  when  properly  made  it  is 
permanent  and  most  effective. 


CONTACT  RESISTANCE 

PER  SQUARE  INCH 
EXPRESSED  IN  MICROHMS 

BETWEEN 

SOFT  STEEL  AND  PURE  COPPER 
PLAIN  SURFACES 


5000 


10000 


15000  20000 

POUNDS  PRESSURE 


25000 


;3o  ooo 


A  long  and  carefully  conducted  series  of  tests  have  been  made  in  our 
rail  bond  laboratory  to  determine  at  different  contact  pressures  the  actual 
contact  resistance  per  unit  area  of  plane  and  carefully  prepared  surfaces  of 
copper  in  contact  with  common  railway  steel.  The  results  of  these  tests  are 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances  23 

given  in  the  curves  opposite.  It  will  be  observed  that  the  contact  resistance 
drops  rapidly  at  first  with  increasing  pressure  until  at  30,000  pounds  the 
resistance  has  reached  a  minimum  and  nearly  constant  value  of  .000,000,76  ohm 
per  square  inch.  If  the  applied  pressure  of  30,000  pounds  be  slowly  reduced 
the  contact  resistance  will  remain  constant  until  at  10,000  pounds,  when  it 
begins  to  increase,  as  shown  in  the  broken  line  curve.  In  other  words,  onlv 
one-third  of  the  maximum  contact  pressure  is  required  to  maintain  the  minimum 
contact  resistance. 

The  actual  contact  resistance  of  a  cylindrical  stud  terminal  which  has 
been  expanded  in  a  hole  through  steel  cannot  be  measured  directly  with  any 
instrument,  owing  to  the  irregular  form  of  the  contact  surface.  Corrections 
have  to  be  made  for  more  or  less  metallic  resistance  included.  For  example, 
suppose  two  galvanometer  contact 
points  be  taken  one-quarter  inch 

apart  in  the  direct  path  of  the  test-  GALVANOMETER 

ing  current,  one  point  being  near  the 
edge  of  the  crown  or  head  of  the 
expanded  terminal  and  the  other 
point  in  the  steel  itself.  The  testing 
current  flowing  from  the  bond  ter- 
minal through  the  contact  into  the 
steel  will  cause  a  difference  of  poten- 
tial between  the  two  galvanometer 
contact  points  and  a  deflection  will 

be  produced  which  will  be  proportional  to  the  total  resistance  between  the  two 
points.  This  resistance  will  consist  of  two  parts,  a  portion  only  of  the  total 
contact  resistance  lying  between  the  contact  points  and  a  certain  amount 
of  metallic  resistance  which  must  be  calculated.  Careful  tests  made  in  this 
manner  with  a  sensitive  galvanometer  on  cylindrical  stud  terminals,  varying  in 
diameter  from  one-half  inch  to  one  inch,  show  resistances  varying  all  the 
way  from  .000,001,5  to  .000,002,22  ohm  per  terminal,  and  they  prove  conclu- 
sively that  the  measured  resistances  are  not  proportional  to  the  total  contact 
area.  Varying  resistance  measurements  may  be  obtained  in  this  manner 
between  other  sets  of  contact  points  about  the  same  terminal  showing  that  the 
actual  contact  resistance  of  the  whole  terminal  cannot  be  measured  by  this 
method.  But  between  plane  surfaces  it  can  be  measured  as  already  explained. 
Inasmuch  as  the  true  resistance  of  the  copper  to  steel  contact  will  depend 
solely  on  the  area  of  contact,  the  pressure  between  and  the  physical  condition 
of  the  two  surfaces,  the  true  contact  resistance  of  any  stud  terminal  can  be 
obtained  directly  from  the  above  curves  for  any  particular  pressure,  other 
conditions  remaining  the  same. 


24 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


If,  therefore,  a  cylindrical  copper  stud  be  placed  in  a  hole  through  the 
web  of  a  steel  rail  T9B  inch  thick  and  having  a  specific  resistance  twelve  times 
that  of  copper,  and  if  the  terminal  be  installed  under  favorable  conditions,  the 
real  contact  resistances  would  be  approximately  as  follows : 


Actual  Contact  Resistances  of  Stud  Terminals  under  a  Contact  Pressure 
of   15  Tons  per  Square  Inch 

Table  IV 


Diameter  of  Terminal  Stud,  Inch 

Area  of  Contact,  Square  Inches                 Contact  Resistance,  Ohm 

1 

1.77 

0.00000040 

H 

1.55 

.00000045 

% 

1.33 

.00000053 

X 

1.10 

.00000064 

1A 

0.88 

.00000080 

2  Twin  Terminal  Studs 

2.00 

.00000035 

In  order  to  secure  a  contact  pressure  of  15  tons  per  square  inch,  a 
compressor  should  apply  to  the  opposite  faces  of  a  solid  terminal  a  direct 
pressure  of  at  least  25  tons  per  square  inch  of  terminal  stud  section. 

The  above  resistance  values  are  so  extremely  small  that  their  effects  may 
be  neglected  in  practice.  They  cannot  be  reduced  by  the  introduction  of  any 
known  substance  between  the  surfaces.  No  electrolytic  action  can  ever  take 
place  between  the  metals  in  contact  so  long  as  moisture  and  air  are  excluded. 
At  intermediate  or  lower  contact  pressures,  the  resistance  will  be  lowered  by 
previously  amalgamating  both  surfaces,  the  amalgam  under  these  less  favorable 
conditions  serving  to  increase  the  actual  contact  area,  and  to  prolong  the  life  of 
the  union  by  excluding  corroding  agencies. 

The  presence  in  the  joint  of  a  thin  film  of  clean  lard  oil.  which  is  very 
useful  in  drilling  steel,  will  increase  the  initial  contact  resistance  of  a  well  made 
joint  less  than  three  per  cent,  practically  all  of  the  oil  being  squeezed  out  of 
the  joint.  Since  oil  will  remain  unchanged  so  long  as  it  is  kept  from  heat  and 
air,  its  presence  about  a  poorly  expanded  terminal  might  even  serve  the  use- 
ful purpose  of  excluding  corroding  agencies,  thus  prolonging  the  life  of  the 
joint. 

Installation  To  obtain  in  practice  these  extremely  efficient  results  with  stud 
terminal  bonds,  it  is  only  necessary  to  observe  the  following  few 
precautions  while  the  bonds  are  being  installed.  Both  contact  surfaces  should  be 
smooth  and  they  must  be  very  clean,  dry  and  bright  at  the  time  they  are  brought 
together.  This  being  done,  the  required  amount  of  expansion  should  be  imme- 
diately applied  to  the  terminals.  All  terminal  studs  are  annealed  and  have  highly 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


25 


polished  surfaces  that  are  exact  to  size  within  0.005  inch  when  they  leave  our 
factory.  Our  drilling  machines  as  described  on  later  pages  will  cut  holes  smooth 
in  bore  and  true  to  size,  and  our  compressors  have  been  built  to  work  most 
effectively  when  correctly  operated.  But  one  thing  more  is  needed  for  perfect 
results,  and  this  is  a  very  essential  detail,  careful  and  trustworthy  men  to  do 
the  actual  work  of  bonding. 

In  one  of  the  largest  and*  most  important  electric  railway  systems  of  this 
country,  equipped  eight  years  ago  with  our  stucl  terminal  bonds,  the  total  aver- 
age depreciation  of  joint  conductance  has  been  under  1  per  cent  and  not  a 
single  bond  has  failed  without  good  cause.  These  bonds  have  been  tested 
frequently  and  carefully  and  all  records  are  preserved.  There  are  thousands 
of  other  installations  where  this  type  of  bond  has  served  for  ten  or  twelve  years 
or  more  with  little  or  no  depreciation.  Since  all  the  bonds  are  essentially  alike 
but  one  inference  can  be  drawn.  The  secret  lies  in  giving  rigorous  attention 
to  the  little  details  of  installation.  This  is  equally  true  of  any  type  of  bond. 
See  page  61. 

No  management  would  expect  that  an  irresponsible  unskilled  clay  laborer 
would  make  a  permanent  and  efficient  joint  in  an  overhead  feeder  cable,  and 
yet  this  joint  is  no  more  difficult  to  make  nor  is  it  of  any  greater  impor- 
tance than  the  bonded  joint  in  the  return  track  circuit  which  this  same  man 
is  often  required  to  make.  A  high  resistance  joint  in  either  will  cause  the 
same  load  current  loss  and  one  in  the  track  would  probably  cause  additional 
trouble  from  electrolysis.  There  would  be  this  difference,  however,  a  poor 
feeder  joint  would  very  likely  become  apparent,  while  the  defective  joint  in  the 
track  would  remain  unnoticed  until  located  by  means  of  some  test. 

Copper 

The  accompanying  photomi- 
crograph of  the  physical  contact 
made  between  steel  and  a  com- 
pressed copper  terminal  stud  shows 
plainly  the  perfect  union  of  the  two 
metals.  Not  a  single  open  space 
or  separation  can  be  detected  in 
such  a  union  at  a  magnification  of 
1600  diameters,  just  a  fine  line 
contact.  Under  the  tremendous 
contact  pressures  obtained,  there 
results  an  adhesion  of  the  surfaces, 
an  actual  meshing  together  of 
adjacent  particles,  which  ensures 
a  perfect  electrical  contact,  and 
one  which  will  endure  permanently. 


steel 


rnion 


Copper 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Temperature  Effects  It  is  sometimes  asserted  that  temperature  changes 
due  to  varying  weather  conditions  will  cause  a  copper 

stud  terminal  to  loosen  and  make  poor  contact,  owing  to  copper  having  a  higher 
temperature  coefficient  of  expansion  than  steel.  While  this  statement  might  be 
true  of  soft  copper,  it  is  not  true  of  the  extremely  hard  copper  constituting  a 
terminal  which  has  been  expanded. 

While  a  terminal  is  being  expanded,  there  •svill  be  a  flow  of  the  copper  and 
a  distortion  of  form.  The  copper  hardens  and  becomes  elastic  to  a  degree 
depending  on  the  amount  of  distortion,  and  it  loses  its  malleable  properties. 

The  intense  lateral  pressure  of  the  expanding  copper  stud  against  the 
confining  wall  of  steel  will  distort  both  metals,  compressing  the  one  and 
expanding  the  other,  but  both  within  their  elastic  limits.  There  will  reside 
potentially  and  permanently  in  each  of  these  metals  under  this  stress  a  certain 
restitution  pressure  which  is  more  than  sufficient  to  maintain  a  nearly  constant 
contact  pressure  even  with  the  slightly  unequal  expansions  or  contractions 
brought  into  action  by  normal  temperature  changes.  In  other  words,  the 
elastic  properties  of  these  two  metals  will  allow  a  certain  give-and-take  action 
between  them  which  within  normal  temperature  ranges  considerably  more  than 
counteracts  the  effects  due  to  differing  temperature  coefficients.  This  action 
maintains  a  nearly  constant  contact  pressure  and  there  is  no  flow  or  displace- 
ment of  copper  from  the  hole.  Only  at  the  higher  temperatures  of  230  to  40<> 
degrees  Fahrenheit  and  above  will  the  greater  expansion  of  the  copper  cause 
a  flow  of  this  metal  out  of  the  hole,  the  amount  being  proportional  to  the  tem- 
perature elevation.  But  these  are  abnormal  temperatures  so  far  as  rail  bonds 
are  concerned,  and  need  not  be  further  considered  here. 

Rail   Bond   Conductors 

The  return  current  is  transmitted  from  one  bond  terminal  to  the  other 
through  some  form  of  a  copper  conductor.  This  may  vary  in  length,  form  and 
cross  section,  but  it  must  always  be  more  or  less  flexible,  for  all  rail  joints  are 
subjected  to  vibrations  due  to  the  hammer  blows  of  car  wheels  passing  over 
the  joints,  and  to  occasional  endwise  movements  of  the  rails  caused  by 
temperature  changes.  These  conditions  require  that  some  form  of  loop  or 
crimp  be  placed  in  all  bond  conductors,  that  solid  conductors  be  quite  long  to 
absorb  the  vibrations,  and  that  all  short  conductors  be  built  up  of  very  flexible 
small  round  stranded  wires,  or  thin  copper  ribbons. 

If  a  rail  bond  be  placed  underneath  the  splice  bars,  the  conductor  is 
usually  divided  into  two  branches,  one  passing  above  the  track  bolts,  the  other 
underneath.  If  the  available  space  underneath  the  bolt  is  greater  than  that 
above,  the  lower  conductor  branch  is  often  made  larger  than  the  upper 
branch,  in  which  case  the  bond  is  said  to  be  "  unbalanced,'1  to  distinguish  it  from 
the  so-called  "balanced"  bonds  which  have  branches  of  equal  sectional  area. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances  27 

If  the  space  between  the  rail  web  and  the  splice  bar  is  narrow  it  is 
usual  to  build  up  the  conductor  of  narrow  fiat  ribbons  laid  parallel  one  above 
the  other  to  economize  in  space. 
If  this  space  is  large  enough  to 
accommodate  strands  made  up 
of  very  small  wires,  these  are 
generally  used  in  preference  to 
fiat  ribbons  because  of  advan- 
tages to  be  mentioned  later.  In 
classifying  these  bonds,  those 
having  unbalanced  branches  are 
given  the  odd  form  numbers  1, 
3  or  5,  while  those  with  equal 

branches  are  designated  with  the  even  form  numbers  2,  4  or  6.      If  the  two 
loops  in  the  branches  are  near  the  center  of  the  bond,  the  bond  is  numbered 

I  if   unbalanced,   or   2  if  balanced;     if   the   loops    are    near    one    end    it    is 
numbered  3  or  4,  and  if  at  opposite  ends,  5  or  6,  as  fully  explained  in  Part 

II  of  this  book. 

A  short  exposed  bond  attached  to  the  head  or  to  the  fiange  of  a  rail 
usually  has  a  single  deep  loop  in  the  flexible  conductor.  Long  exposed  bonds 
have  either  a  coarse  wire  strand  or  a  solid  wire  conductor ;  the  latter  is  used 
almost  exclusively  for  cross  bonds  and  for  long  bonds  around  special  work. 
Whenever  possible  the  loop  in  any  bond  is  placed  near  the  center  of  the 
conductor,  and  is  made  quite  long  and  deep  to  absorb  the  motions  of  the  joint. 
Sometimes  it  has  to  be  placed  near  one  end  to  avoid  the  track  bolts  or  other 
objects. 

Vibration  Tests  The  continual  bending  of  a  copper  wire  of  any  section 
will  in  time  harden  and  crystallize  the  copper  locally  and 
cause  it  to  break,  due  to  inherent  properties  of  the  metal.  In  order  to  with- 
stand the  track  vibrations  and  jarring  indefinitely,  the  wire  in  a  bond  conductor 
should  be  small  in  section,  quite  long  and  it  should  be  annealed  very  soft.  All 
wires  must  be  entirely  free  from  nicks  or  surface  imperfections  and  they  should 
contain  but  one  loop.  These  statements  though  self  evident  can  readily  be 
verified  by  experiment. 

The  cut  on  next  page  represents  a  machine  specially  designed  for  making 
vibration  tests  of  rail  bonds.  The  upright  clamps  which  rigidly  grip  the  bond 
terminals  are  caused  by  cams  to  move  rapidly  in  alternate  and  opposite  vertical 
directions,  through  any  desired  distance.  Coincident  with  every  125  vertical 
oscillations  the  bond  is  lengthened  and  shortened  once  through  any  required 
distance  by  the  horizontal  movement  of  the  outer  upright  spindle,  thus  making 
it  possible  to  approximate  all  the  motions  of  a  very  loose  rail  joint. 


28 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Vibration    Testing    Machine 

A  large  number  of  tests  which  have  been  made  in  this  machine  have 
developed  the  following  facts :     Wires   having  a  diameter  of  from   .040-inch 

to  .045-inch  twisted  into  a  strand, 
give  best  general  service  for  short 
bonds.  A  short  straight  copper 
wire  of  this  size  will  withstand 
approximately  twice  as  many  vibra- 
tions as  a  wire  of  same  length  and 
twice  the  diameter.  A  single  loop 
in  the  small  wire  will  double  its 
useful  life,  while  in  the  larger  wire 
the  effect  of  the  loop  is  less  marked. 
For  durability,  the  conductors  of  a 
two-branch  concealed  bond  should 
enter  straight  into  the  shoulder  of 
the  terminal  without  any  appreci- 
able bend,  as  in  the  Type  CP-02 
bond  shown  on  page  64.  Each 
separate  conductor  wire  whether 
round  or  fiat  should  be  in  perfect 
condition  at  this  its  weakest  point, 

Drop    Hammer  and  is  SO  made  in  a11  OU1" 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


29 


The  life  of  a  bond  placed  on  a  loose  joint  is  determined  largely  by  its 
length,  as  will  be  observed  from  a  study  of  the  following  breaking  tests  obtained 
from  breaking  many  Type  CP-02  4/0  bonds  of  varying  lengths  in  the  machine 
above  described.  All  of  the  bonds  were  subjected  to  similar  tests.  This  test 
represents  extremely  poor  joint  conditions,  and  gives  no  indications  whatever 
of  the  life  of  a  bond  on  a  good  joint.  The  wires  in  the  7-inch  bonds  began 
breaking  at  the  end  of  41,000  vibrations,  while  the 

8-inch  bonds  began  breaking  at      215,000  vibrations, 
10-inch  bonds  began  breaking  at  1,279,000  vibrations  and  the 
14-inch  bonds  began  breaking  at  7,887,000  vibrations. 

Thus  the  14-inch  bond  withstood  this  particular  breaking  test  192  times  as 
long  as  the  7-inch  bond.  This  type  of  bond  will  remain  intact  under  severe 
service  conditions  longer  than  a  ribbon  bond  of  similar  style  and  dimensions. 
There  is  also  another  difference  in  favor  of  the  strand  of  small  wires  w?hen  used 
on  poor  rail  joints ;  the  individual  wires  will  seldom  if  ever  be  caught  between 
the  splice  bar  and  rail,  while  ribbons  of  wire,  not  being  bound  together  through- 
out their  length,  as  in  a  strand,  will  often  be  caught  in  this  manner  and  broken. 


The   Welded   Union    Between   Terminal    and    Conductor 

In  the  making  of  a  stud  terminal  bond,  the  blank  terminals  of  pure 
annealed  copper  are  drilled  or  milled  for  the  reception  of  the  conductor  portion, 
previously  cut  to  proper  length,  and  the  parts  are  then  assembled.  The  bond 
terminals  are  then  placed  in  a  specially  constructed  furnace  having  a  closely 
regulated  reducing  flame  and  quickly  brought  to  a  welding  temperature  without 
causing  the  bond  wires  to  be  oxidized  or  injured  in  the  least.  The  heated 
parts  are  transferred  to  a  die  and 
welded  together  by  blows  of  a 
powerful  drop  hammer,  resulting 
in  an  actual  amalgamation  of  the 
parts.  The  union  has  the  same  high 
conductivity  and  the  same  physical 
strength  as  the  solid  pure  metal. 
These  statements  may  be  verified 
by  any  chemical,  electrical  or  physi- 
cal test  or  by  a  microscropic  exam- 
ination of  the  union,  such  as  sho\vn 
herewith. 

The  accompanying  photomicro- 
graph represents  a  typical  weld, 
magnified  two  hundred  diameters. 
That  an  actual  coalescence  rather 
than  an  approximation  of  the 


80  American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 

surfaces  has  taken  place  is  made  evident  by  noting  several  grains  of  the  crystal- 
loid structure  which  have  grown  completely  across  the  junction  line,  A.  B. 

The  successful  working  out  of  the  many  small  details  arising  during  the 
process  of  manufacturing  a  bond  is  learned  only  by  years  of  practice,  by  close 
observation  and  by  constant  research  work.  These  have  determined  to  a  very 
large  extent  the  very  complete  and  excellent  line  of  bonds  shown  in  Part  II  of 
this  book. 

Selection   of   Rail   Bonds 

Many  considerations  should  be  taken  into  account  when  selecting  a  type 
of  bond  for  any  given  track  service,  otherwise  the  bond  may  fail  to  give 
service  through  no  fault  in  its  design  or  construction.  This  article,  together 
with  the  arranging  and  cataloging  of  all  the  bonds  shown  in  Part  II, 
have  been  prepared  with  a  view  of  assisting  our  patrons  in  making  the 
best  possible  selection  of  bonds  for  any  given  set  of  conditions.  The  first 
thing  to  be  decided  in  making  such  a  selection  is  whether  they  shall  be 

Concealed  or  Exposed  In  laying  new  track,  bonds  can  be  placed  under 

splice  bars  at  little  or  no  additional  cost,  provided 

there  is  enough  space  for  them.  In  this  position  they  are  protected  from 
theft  and  from  breakage  due  to  external  causes,  but  they  are  not  open  to 
visual  inspection  nor  can  their  condition  at  later  periods  be  determined  except 
by  making  electrical  tests  of  the  joints.  In  our  various  types  of  Crown  and 
United  States  bonds,  pages  GO  to  85,  we  offer  an  excellent  choice  that  will 
meet  any  condition  requiring  concealed  bonds. 

If  splice  bars  be  removed  from  old  rails,  the  bolts  usually  have  to  be  cut. 
and  it  is  seldom  possible  to  draw  the  plates  back  into  their  original  seat  where 
they  will  make  as  good  a  joint  as  they  did  before  opening.  In  rebonding  old 
track  it  is  therefore  often  advisable  to  use  exposed  bonds.  And  in  new  track 
work  also,  there  are  many  conditions  where  this  would  be  advisable,  such  as  in 
paved  streets,  on  private  rights  of  way,  and  on  joints  where  no  other  type  could 
be  used  to  advantage.  If  it  be  advisable  to  use  an  exposed  bond,  the  ques- 
tion arises  whether  it  shall  be  attached  to  the  head  of  the  rail,  to  the  web 
bridging  the  splice  bars,  or  to  the  flange. 

Regarding  the  latter  type  (page  91)  experience  has  demonstrated  that 
it  gives  best  service  on  feeder  rails.  Its  application  requires  the  removal 
of  splice  bars.  Long  bonds  bridging  splice  bars  in  general  are  flexible  and 
durable,  and  they  can  be  applied  easily  and  at  small  cost,  but  they  are  open  to 
the  following  objections :  High  first  cost  on  account  of  the  amount  of  copper 
involved,  liability  of  theft  in  many  localities  for  a  like  reason,  and  low 
conductance  on  account  of  length.  In  general,  the  rails  on  account  of  their 
comparatively  large  section  are  more  conductive  than  the  bonds  used.  The 
use  of  long  bonds  therefore  will  indirectly  cause  an  added  increase  in  the  total 
track  resistance  by  cutting  out  of  circuit  a  larger  portion  of  rail. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances  81 

The  use  of  bonds  applied  to 
the  head  of  rails  during;  the  past 
decade  has  proven  very  satisfactory, 
and  in  general  this  type  of  bond 
should  be  chosen  whenever  con- 
ditions will  permit  of  its  use, 
especially  for  open  track  work. 
This  type  of  bond  has  several 
valuable  features.  It  can  be  applied 

at  low  cost  and  without  disturbing  the  joint ;  it  is  always  open  to  visual 
inspection  and  is  very  high  in  conductance  owing  to  the  short  length  of 
conductor  and  large  terminal  contact  areas.  Our  Twin  Terminal  bond  (page 
52)  and  our  type  B.  S.  B.  bond  (page  5(5),  and  the  apparatus  for  applying  them, 
have  all  been  developed  to  the  highest  state  of  perfection  for  this  class  of 
service.  Regarding  the  latter  type  especially,  we  challenge  the  world  to  show 
its  equal  from  any  consideration.  These  bonds  are  not  open  to  the  objections 
of  theft  because  of  the  great  difficulty  of  removing  the  terminals  and  on  account 
of  the  small  amount  of  copper  exposed. 

Pure  copper,  being  malleable,  is  easily  abraided  and  worn  away  by  contact 
with  harder  substances,  and  copper  wire,  if  small  in  diameter,  is  easily 
broken.  If  exposed  copper  bonds  of  any  type  be  allowed  to  come  in  contact 
with  pavements  or  wagon  wheels,  or  other  such  objects,  one  should  expect  that 
sooner  or  later  such  bonds  would  be  injured  or  entirely  broken.  The  careful 
railway  manager  who  looks  after  the  little  details  will  see  to  it  that  such 
bonds  are  protected  from  such  destructive  agencies  at  the  time  of  installation, 
and  the  efficiency  of  his  track  return  system  will  be  improved  and  prolonged 
to  that  extent. 

Having  decided  on  the  type  of  bond  to  be  used  in  any  given  installation 
we  must  settle  next  upon  the 

Length  of  Bonds     If  the  type  to  be  used  is  a  head  bond  or  a  foot  bond  the 
matter  is  in  most  cases  already  settled,  for  these  bonds  are 

regularly  made  in  standard  lengths.  It  should  be  borne  in  mind,  however,  that  if 
they  are  to  be  used  on  (50-foot  rails,  or  on  very  small  rails  subjected  to 
heavy  traffic  conditions,  or  if  they  are  to  be  used  on  loose  joints,  the  bonds 
should  be  made  with  extra  long  loops  of  fine  wire  strand,  otherwise  the 
conductor  might  soon  be  broken  by  the  excessive  jarring  or  vibration  of 
the  joint.  Long  bonds  for  spanning  splice  bars  on  small  rails  should  be  made 
about  five  (5)  inches  longer  (formed)  than  the  splice  bars,  and  about  six  ((}) 
inches  longer  than  the  splice  bars  on  large  rails. 


32  American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 

The  length  of  a  concealed  bond  is  determined  within  certain  limits  by  the 
bolt  hole  drilling.  Unless  the  rail  joint  be  rigidly  buried  in  concrete  paving, 
no  short  concealed  bonds  of  any  kind  should  be  used.  For  general  conditions 
the  leading  engineers  are  now  specifying  bonds  for  single  bonding  which  are 
10  inches  long  or  more,  the  terminals  being  placed  between  the  first  and 
second  bolt  holes.  In  double  bonding  it  is  customary  to  place  one  terminal  of 
each  bond  between  the  first  and  second  bolt  hole  of  each  rail,  and  the  other 
terminals  beyond  the  second  bolt  holes.  On  electrified  steam  roads  it  is 
customary  in  this  country  to  use  concealed  bonds  from  16  to  24  inches  long. 
The  shocks  and  jarrings  of  the  joint  are  gradually  absorbed  throughout  the 
length  of  such  long  bonds,  and  the  period  required  to  crystallize  and  break 
the  copper  wires  would  be  prolonged  in  proportion  to  the  increased  length.  In 
cases  where  the  conductors  were  rigidly  clamped  under  the  plates  this  condition 
would  not  of  course  hold  true.  In  locating  holes  for  concealed  bonds,  at  least 
one  inch  of  solid  metal  should  be  left  in  the  rail  web  between  the  bolt  and 
the  terminal  holes.  After  having  fixed  upon  the  type  and  the  length  of  bond 
to  be  used,  the  final  and  most  difficult  feature  to  be  settled  is  its 

Carrying  Capacity     The    electric    generators    at    any    railway    power   house 
produce  a  nearly  constant  potential  difference  of,  say,  600 

volts,  practically  all  of  which  is  required  to  force  the  load  current  first  through 
the  copper  feeder  system,  then  through  the  car  motors  where  it  overcomes 
counter  e.  m.  f.  and  does  useful  work,  and  finally  through  the  track  return 
circuit.  The  number  of  volts  available  for  doing  useful  work  in  the  motors 
will  equal  the  600  generated  minus  the  number  required  to  overcome  the  com- 
bined resistance  of  the  feeder  circuit  and  the  return  circuit,  which  are  lost  so 
far  as  useful  work  is  concerned.  The  only  method  of  reducing  this  loss  is  by 
decreasing  the  resistance  of  the  circuit.  That  of  the  feeder  circuit  will  depend 
upon  the  length  and  the  combined  sectional  area  of  all  feeder  and  trolley  wires 
in  parallel  and  may  be  considered  constant  in  this  connection.  The  number 
of  volts  lost  in  forcing  the  load  current  through  any  portion  of  the  track  circuit 
will  equal  the  product  of  the  current  times  the  resistance  of  that  portion  of  the 
circuit  (E  =  I  R,  see  "Notes  on  Electricity,"  Part  IV).  One  of  the  factors, 
I,  the  current,  is  fixed  by  the  motor  load,  the  other  factor,  R,  alone  can  be 
varied  as  will  be  pointed  out  later.  In  interurban  railway  systems  using 
medium  sized  rails,  it  is  considered  good  practice  to  allow  a  loss  in  a  single 
track  of  two  rails  from  two  to  five  volts  per  mile  per  100  amperes  of  load 
current,  depending  on  size  of  rail  and  other  conditions.  The  total  feeder 
circuit  resistance  is  made  from  one  to  ten  times  that  of  the  return  track 
resistance,  this  also  depending  on  local  conditions. 

The  electrical  resistance  per  mile  of  track  will  depend  upon  the  resistance 
of  the  steel  rails  themselves,  and  of  the  rail  joints.  Let  us  first  consider  the 
resistance  of  the  steel  rails. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


Steel  Rails  The  resistance  of  common  railway  steel  varies  widely  in  different 
samples,  depending  largely  upon  the  chemical  composition  of  the 
metal.  In  general  it  is  much  higher  in  modern  rails  than  in  the  earlier  makes 
of  rails.  According  to  best  authorities,  special  soft  steels  used  for  third  rail 
purposes  have  resistances  from  7.9  to  9  times  that  of  copper  for  equal  sections, 
while  the  steel  in  running  rails  varies  from  11  to  13  times  that  of  copper,  or 
even  more.  The  resistance  ratio  of  manganese  steel  to  copper  sometimes 
exceeds  30.  The  copper  equivalent  of  steel  in  conductance  is  given  in  the 
following  table  for  various  ratios  : 


Area    of    Copper    in    Circular    Mils    Equivalent    to    Railway    Steel    in 

Conductivity 

Table  V 


Weight  of 
Rail 
Pounds 
Per  Yard 

Actual  Area  in 

Ratio  of  Resistance  of  Steel  to  that  of  Copper 

Square 
Inches 

Circular                   o 

Mils 

10 

11 

12 

13 

50 
60 
70 
80 
90 
100 
110 
120 

4.90 

5.88 
6.86 
7.84 
8.82 
9.80 
10.78 
11.76 

6,238,800 
7,486,600 
8,734,400 
9,982,100 
11,229,900 
12,477,700 
13,725,400 
14,973,200 

779,850 
935,825 
1,091,800 
1,247,763 
1,403,737 
1,559,712 
1,715,675 
1,871,650 

623,880 
748,660 
873,440 
998,210 
1,122,990 
1,247,770 
1,372,540 
1,497,320 

567,164 
680,600 
794,036 
907,463 
1,020,900 
1,134,336 
1.247,763 
1,361,200 

519,900 
623,883 
727,866 
831,841 
935,825 
1,039,812 
1,143,783 
1,247,766 

479,908 
575,890 
671,876 
767,853 
863,838 
959,823 
1,055,800 
1,151,784 

At  a  ratio  of  1:12  the  copper  equivalent  of  steel  in  circular  mils  approximately  equals 
its  weight  per  yard  in  pounds,  multiplied  by  10,000. 


Resistance    in    International    Ohms    of    a    Continuous    Steel     Rail    at 
2O°  C.    or    68°  F.,   no    Joints 

Table  VI 


W  eight 


Ratio  of  Resistance  of  Steel  to  that  of  Copper 


ot  Kan 
Pounds 
Per 
Yard 

8   ,           10 

11             12             13 

1000  Ft. 

Mile    1000  Ft. 

Mile 

1000  Ft. 

Mile    1000  Ft. 

Mile    1000  Ft. 

Mile 

50 

.013243 

.069923  .016605 

.087674 

.018266 

.096444  .019925 

.105204  .021587 

.113979 

60 

.011071 

.058455  .013838 

.073065 

.0152211.080367  .016606 

.0876801.017989 

.094982 

70 

.009489 

.050097  .011861 

.062621 

.013047 

.068888  .014233 

.075152  .015419 

.081412 

80 

.008303  .043834  .010378 

.054796 

.011416 

.060276  .012454 

.065757  .013480 

.071174 

90 

.007380 

.038966  .009225 

.048708 

.010147 

.053576  .011070 

.058449'.  011992 

.063318 

100 

.006642 

.035070  .008302 

.043835 

.009133 

.048222  .009963  .052604  .010794 

.056992 

110 

.006039 

.031886  .007548 

.039853 

.008302 

.043834  .009057 

.047821  .009812 

.051807 

120 

.005535 

.029224  .006919 

.036532 

.007611 

.040186  .008303 

.043839  .008994 

.047488 

Rail   Joint   Resistances     The  resistance  of  a  bonded  rail  joint  measured  at 

different    times    varies    in    accordance    with    the 
contact  made  by  the  splice  bars  and  by  the  abutting  ends  of  the  rails.      But 


34 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


since  these  forms  of  electrical  contacts  are  transient  and  unreliable  at  best, 
and  since  their  only  effect  would  be  to  improve  the  joint  conductance,  their 
effects  will,  for  simplicity,  not  be  considered  in  the  following. 

The  true  resistance  of  a  bonded  joint  is  measured  between  points  in  the 
rail  adjacent  to  the  outer  extremities  of  the  terminals,  and  in  line  with  the 
natural  path  of  load  current.  Such  measurements  include  the  resistance 
of  the  whole  bond  plus  both  terminal  contacts  and  a  small  amount  of  steel,  and 
they  are  nearly  independent  of  the  size  of  the  rail.  As  thus  measured,  the 
resistances  of  bonded  joints  at  20°  C.  or  08°  F.  are  for  10-inch  stud  terminal 
bonds  of  various  capacities,  approximately  as  follows : 

Resistance  of  Bonded  Joints,  in  Ohms 

(See  pages  24  and  25 ) 

Table  VII 


Size  of  Bond 

Diameter  of  Stud 
Terminals  in 
Inches 

Resistance  of  a 
Joint  Bonded 
with  a  10-inch 
Formed  Stud 
Terminal  Bond 

Total  Resistance 
of  1TO  Rail  Joints 
Bonded  with 
10-inch  Bonds 

Ohm  Resistance 
per  Inch  of 
Duplex  Parallel 
Bond  Conductor 

Total  Resistance 
of  170  Inches  of 
Bond  Conductors 

1/0 

2/0 
3/0 
4/0 
300,000  C.  M. 
500,000  C.  M. 

# 

X 

H 

H 
i 
i 

.00008271 
.00006957 
.00005343 
.00004553 
.00003443 
.00002200 

.0140607 
.0118269 
.0090831 
.0077401 
.0058531 
.0037400 

.00000792 
.000006435 
.00000518 
.00000410 
.00000292 
.000001782 

.001346 
.001094 
.000881 
.000697 
.000496 
.000309 

With  the  above  information  at  our  command  we  are  now  in  position  to 
readily  determine  the  approximate  track  resistance  under  nearly  all  conditions, 
and  to  estimate  the  proper  carrying  capacity  of  bonds  for  a  given  track  loss. 
For  example  :  What  bond  or  bonds  should  be  placed  on  a  70-pound  rail  that 
would  give  a  track  loss  of  four  volts  per  mile  per  100-ampere  load  current  ? 
Thirty-foot  rails,  conductivity  of  steel  to  copper,  1  : 12. 

The  resistance  of  such  a  track  according  to  Ohm's  law  would  be  .04  ohm 
per  mile,  or  .08  ohm  for  each  rail.  From  table  VI  we  note  that  the  resistance 
of  the  steel  itself  is  .07515  ohm.  The  difference  between  these  two  quantities 
or  .00485  ohm  represents  the  allowable  resistance  of  the  170  joints  in  series. 
Looking  through  table  VII,  fourth  column,  we  see  that  a  single  large  bond  or 
two  small  bonds  in  parallel  could  be  used  to  meet  the  requirements.  If  the 
joints  were  double  bonded  with  two  small  bonds,  we  see  from  page  75  that  the 
bonds  should  be  at  least  14  inches  (10  +  4)  long.  Referring  again  to  table 
VII,  the  resistance  of  two  14-inch  4/0  bonds  in  parallel  per  170  joints  is 
YV  [  4  (.000097)  +  .0077401]  =  .005204  ohm. 

The  resistance  of  one  mile  of  bonded  rail  would  therefore  be 

.005204  +  .075150  =  .08041  ohm 
and  the  resistance  of  the  track  would  be 

#  (.080414)  =  .040207  ohm, 
or  approximately  the  amount  required. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


35 


If  it  were  desired  to  use  a  single  bond  on  this  joint,  it  will  be  seen  from 
table  VII  that  a  10-inch  500,000  circular  mil  bond  would  be  too  large  in  capa- 
city, but  that  a  10-inch  300,000  circular  mil  bond  shortened  might  do.  This 
bond  shortened  two  inches  will  give  a  total  joint  resistance  per  mile  of  single 
rail  equal  to  (.0058531)-2(.000496)  =  .004861  ohm,  and  a  track  resistance  per 
mile  of  .0400055  ohm.  Such  a  large  bond  could  not  be  placed  under  the 
splice  bar  of  a  70-pound  T-rail,  and  even  if  it  could  it  would  be  too  short  for  a 
concealed  bond.  Made  in  this  capacity  in  the  form  of  a  twin  terminal  bond, 
or  a  type  B.  S.  B.,  soldered  stud  bond  and  8  inches  long,  the  joints  would  be 
exceedingly  well  bonded.  By  decreasing  the  length  to  7^2  inches,  provided 
the  joints  were  in  excellent  shape,  the  loss  would  be  further  reduced. 

What  would  be  the  result  of  using  4/0  36-inch  formed  bonds  on  these 
joints  to  bridge  the  splice  bars  ?  A  single  4/0  bond  of  this  length  per  joint 
would  result  in  a  total  track  loss  of  5.1  volts  per  mile  per  100  amperes  current. 
Double  bonding  with  two  of  these  bonds  would  reduce  the  loss  to  4.43  volts. 

Energy  Loss  The  following  table  shows  the  voltage  drop  and  energy  loss 
(I2R)  per  mile  of  track  per  100  amperes  load  current  when 
each  joint  is  bonded  with  a  single  7^>-inch  300,000  twin  terminal  or  soldered 
stud  bond,  or  with  two  4/0  concealed  bonds,  each  14  inches  long.  70-pound 
rails,  conductivity  of  steel  TV  that  of  copper,  170  joints  per  mile  in  each  rail, 
temperature  '20°  C.  or  68°  F. 

Table  VIII 


One  300,000  C.  M.— ?J$-inch  Bond 


Two  4/0— 14-inch  Concealed  Bonds 


Size  of  Rail 
Pounds 

Voltage  Drop  in 
Track  (2  rails) 
per  100  Amperes 

Energy  Loss  in 
Track  (PR) 
Watts  per 
100  Amperes 

Voltage  Drop 
in  Track 
per  100  Amperes 

Energy  Loss  in 
Track  (PR) 
Watts  per 
100  Amperes 

Per  Cent  of  Total 
Loss  Expended  in 
Rail  Joints 

60 

4.61 

461 

4.65 

465V 

6.0 

70 

3.99 

399 

4.02 

402 

6.9 

80 

3.52 

352 

3.55 

355 

7.8 

90 

3.15 

315 

3.19 

319 

8.8 

100 

2.86 

286                    2.89 

289 

9.6 

110 

2.62 

262                    2.65 

265 

10.5 

120 

2.42 

242 

2.46 

246 

11.3 

The  four  volts  per  mile  of  track  which  we  have  allowed  in  the  above 
problems  are  utilized  in  forcing  the  100  amperes  of  current  through  the  .04 
ohm  of  track  resistance.  The  energy  lost  in  doing  this  work  equals  the  square 
of  the  current  times  the  resistance  (I2R)  and  is  expressed  in  watts.  This 
energy  is  converted  into  and  dissipated  as  heat.  For  example,  suppose  that  an 
average  of  400  amperes  flows  continuously  for  eighteen  hours  per  day,  through 


36  American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 

ten  miles  of  the  track,  already  considered  in  the  above  examples,  what  will  be 
the  loss,  expressed  in  dollars,  of  electrical  energy  per  year  in  the  track  ? 

(a)  Drop  of  volts  per  100-ampere  mile  =  4 
Track  resistance  per  mile     .     0.04  ohm  and 
For  10  miles 0.4  ohm 

Loss  in  watts  (I2R)  =  (400)2  X  0.4  =  04,000  watts,  or  64  K.W. 

Number  of  hours  per  year  =  18  X  365  =  0570 

Number  of  K.W.  hours  per  year  of  service  =  0570X04=420,480 

If  the  electrical  energy  cost  1  cent  per  K.  W.  hour  delivered,  the  loss 
in  the  track  per  year  as  heat  would  equal  $4,204.80,  of  which  7  per  cent  or 
$294.34  would  represent  the  amount  lost  in  the  rail  joints  alone. 

(b)  If  the  track  loss  were  5.1  volts  per  100-ampere  mile,  the  energy  loss, 
figured   as  above,  would  amount  to   $5,361.12  in  the  track. 

(c)  For  4.43  volts  loss  per  100-ampere  mile,  the  energy  loss  would  be 
$4,656.82  in  the  track. 

These  examples  show  clearly  the  advantage  of  using  short  bonds  whenever 
conditions  will  permit,  also  the  necessity  of  giving  very  careful  thought  to  the 
determination  of  proper  lengths  and  capacities  of  rail  bonds,  if  it  is  desired  to 
reduce  the  energy  loss  in  the  track  to  a  minimum  or  stated  amount.  In  the 
first  example,  the  total  resistance  of  170  joints  in  series  amounts  to  only  .005264 
ohm,  or  7  per  cent  that  of  the  steel  resistance,  a  small  amount.  It  can  easily  be 
imagined  how  a  few  poor  or  high  resistance  joints  would  affect  our  problem. 
A  single  poor  joint  may  easily  cause  a  loss  greatly  exceeding  that  in  the 
rest  of  the  mile  of  track,  and  this  without  being  visable ;  hence  the 
importance  of  frequent,  systematic  and  thorough  testing  of  bonds  to  discover 
any  poor  joints.  (See  page  39.) 

According  to  best  authorities,  no  dependence  should  ever  be  placed 
on  earth  or  fresh  water  for  conducting  any  great  amount  of  return  current. 
The  resistance  of  these  substances,  according  to  best  authorities,  varies 
between  wide  limits,  under  different  conditions,  from  50,000,000  to 
6,750,000,000  times  that  of  copper.  In  general,  if  the  bonding  for  any  railway 
system  has  been  properly  figured  and  installed,  if  all  special  work  is  well 
bonded  or  shunted  with  good  bonds,  and  if  the  bonds  are  maintained  in  first- 
class  condition,  there  will  be  little  or  no  leakage  of  current  into  earth,  and  no 
stray  currents  to  cause  serious  electrolytic  troubles. 

Graduated  Bonding      While   it  is  not  customary  in  this  country  to  graduate 
the  bonding  of  railway  systems,  that  is,  to  use  varying 

sized  bonds  the  larger  ones  being  placed  near  the  power  house,  there  are 
quite  as  many  reasons  for  doing  so  as  for  tapering  the  overhead  feeder  system. 
This  is  especially  so  on  systems  having  heavy  and  uniformly  distributed  car 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances  37 

service.  A  simple  rule  followed  by  some  in  determining  the  size  of  bonds  to 
use  on  a  given  section  of  road,  is  to  make  the  aggregate  sectional  area  of  all 
the  bonds  in  parallel  across  the  one  or  more  tracks  approximately  equal  to  the 
sectional  area  of  the  copper  feeder  system  above  the  tracks  in  question. 

The  track  losses  already  considered  vary  directly  as  the  resistance  and 
as  the  square  of  the  current.  They  represent  too  the  losses  at  the  one 
temperature  of  20  degrees  C  or  68  degrees  F.  At  higher  temperatures  the 
losses  would  be  greater  and  at  lower  temperatures  less,  for  the  track  resistance 
changes  with  temperature.  They  also  represent  conditions  for  direct  current 
only.  With  alternating  current,  the  impedance  of  the  circuit  is  several  times 
greater  than  the  ohmic  resistance,  due  to  the  "skin  effect"  of  the  steel  rails, 
but  the  current  in  general  would  be  smaller.  (See  page  150.) 

In  general,  rail  bonds  which  are  large  enough  to  keep  the  allowable  track 
losses  within  bounds,  will  be  more  than  ample  to  carry  the  load  current  with- 
out heating.  Bare  exposed  conductors  will  carry  one  ampere  per  500  circular 
mils  without  undue  heating.  At  this  current  density,  a 

1/0  B.  £.  8  gauge  bond  would  carry  210  amperes. 
2/0  B.  &  S.  gauge  bond  would  carry  265  amperes. 
3/0  B.  &  S.  gauge  bond  would  carry  335  amperes. 
4/0  B.  &  S.  gauge  bond  would  carry  425  amperes. 
300,000  C.  M.  bond  would  carry  600  amperes. 
500,000  C.  M.  bond  would  carry  1000  amperes. 

If  the  bond  be  short,  say  12  inches  or  less,  and  if  the  terminals  be 
connected  to  rails  of  relatively  much  greater  conductance,  the  current  density 
could  safely  and  without  undue  loss  be  carried  50  per  cent  higher  than  the 
above,  because  any  heat  developed  in  the  bond  by  the  load  current  would 
rapidly  radiate  and  conduct  into  the  large  masses  of  steel  where  it  would  be 
dissipated.  It  is  found  in  practice  that  such  bonds  will  carry  for  short  periods 
of  time  current  densities  live  times  as  great  (or  1  ampere  per  100  circular 
mils)  without  injurious  heating,  so  comparatively  small  bonds  can  be  depended 
upon  to  carry  very  heavy  momentary  load  currents.  Extra  large  terminals, 
however,  should  be  used  on  bonds  frequently  subjected  to  such  heavy  overloads. 

Cost  of  Installing  Kail  Bonds 

So  many  variable  factors  enter  into  the  total  cost  of  any  rail  bond 
installation  that  it  would  manifestly  be  impossible  to  give  estimates  that  would 
apply  accurately  to  individual  cases.  The  cost  would  depend  upon  the 
organization  of  the  working  force,  the  skill  and  energy  of  the  workmen,  the 
ability  of  the  foreman  to  lay  out  his  work  to  best  advantage,  upon  weather 
conditions,  track  conditions,  traffic  conditions  and  many  other  things.  The 
first  item  is  often  a  very  important  one  in  determining  the  cost  of  installing 
bonds,  and  for  that  reason  we  give  below  in  tabular  form  information 
concerning  the  organization  of  gangs  of  men  which  would  work  under  one 


American    Steel    and  \Vire    Company 


foreman  to  best  advantage  for  the  installation  of  our  various  types  of  bonds. 
The  number  of  bonds  installed  is  based  upon  a  full  working  day  of  eight  hours, 
all  working  conditions  being  favorable,  and  no  account  is  taken  of  labor  which 
might  be  required  to  remove  or  replace  paving  or  splice  bars. 


Type  of  Bond 
Installed 
(See  Part  II) 

Bonding  Tools 
Required 

Number  of  Men  Required  in 
Addition  to  One  Foreman  and 
Their  Disposition 

Number  of 
Bonds  Installed 
per  8-hour  Day 

Compressed 
Terminal 
Crown  and 
United  States 
Bonds 

Two  No.  21  hand  drills 
Two    compressors,    either 
No.  40  or  No.  61 

4  men  on  2  drills 
4  men  on  2  compressors 
8  men 

100 

One  No.  21  M  motor  drill 
Two    compressors,   either 
No.  40  or  No.  61 

2  men  on  1  drill 
4  men  on  2  compressors 
6  men 

85 

Tubular 
Terminal 
Crown  and 
United  States 
Bonds 

Two  No.  21  hand  drills 
Supply  of  bonding   ham- 
mers and  taper  punches 

4  men  on  2  drills 
1  bonder  and 
1  helper 
6  men 

100 

One  No.  21  M  motor  drill 
Supply   of  bonding   ham- 
mers and  taper  punches 

2  men  on  1  drill 
1  bonder  and 
1  helper 
4  men 

85 

Type  U.  B. 
United  States 
Bonds 

One    hydraulic    punch 
No.  66 
Two    hydraulic    compres- 
sors No.  68 

2  men  on  punch 
3  men  on  compressors 
5  men 

100 

Twin 
Terminal 
Bonds 

Two  No.  22  hand  drills 
Supply   of  bonding   ham- 
mers and  hand  tools 

4  men  on  2  drills 
1  bonder  and 
1  groove  cutter 
6  men 

130 

Two    No.  22  M  or  24  M 
motor  drills 
Supply   of   bonding  ham- 
mers and  hand  tools 

4  men  on  2  drills 
1  groove  cutter  and 
2  bonders 
7  men 

275 

Soldered 
Terminal 
Bonds 

Four  No.  83  torches 
One  No.  81  electric  grinder 
Bonding  clamps,  gasoline 
and  solder 

2  men  for  soldering 
2  men  for  grinding 
2  men  for  helpers 
1  man  for  tinning 
7  men 

200 

Type  B.  S.  B. 
Soldered 
Stud  Bonds 

One  No.  22  M  motor  drill, 
in    addition    to    list    re- 
quired for  soldering  on 
bonds,  given  above 

Same    number    of    men 
as  for  soldered  bonds, 
2   men  for  motor  drill, 
7  men 

140 

This  company  maintains  a  fully  equipped  bonding  department  supervised 
by  able  and  experienced  engineers  and  manned  by  competent  workmen,  which 
has  for  many  years  and  with  marked  success  attended  to  all  matters  pertaining 
to  bond  installations.  Through  this  department  we  are  at  all  times  prepared  to 
install  bonds,  to  make  estimates  or  to  advise  customers  regarding  specifications, 
costs  of  installations  and  so  on,  or  to  furnish  competent  supervisors  for  instal- 
lations made  by  the  customer  himself.  Correspondence  solicited. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances  39 

Testing   and   Inspecting   Rail   Bonds 

We  have  already  called  attention  on  a  previous  page  to  the  importance  of 
frequent  and  careful  testing  and  inspection  of  rail  bond  installations.  A  capable 
man  should  be  placed  permanently  in  charge  of  this  work  and  he  should  be 
required  to  make,  at  least  twice  a  year,  careful  tests  of  all  rail  joints.  He  should 
keep  permanent  records  of  all  tests,  should  have  charge  of  all  bonding  gangs, 
and  should  be  required  to  maintain  the  track  circuit  at  a  minimum  resistance  at 
all  times.  He  should  also  work  in  conjunction  with  the  track  department  and 
notify  this  department  of  all  loose  joints  or  other  poor  track  construction  which 
might  lead  to  broken  bonds. 

We  often  hear  the  question  asked,  at  what  stage  should  a  poorly  bonded 
joint  be  rebonded  ?  This  will  depend  in  every  case  upon  how  much  electrical 
energy  the  company  is  willing  to  sacrifice  at  the  joint  in  question  when  all  the 
factors  of  cost  and  voltage  fluctuation  at  the  car  have  been  given  consideration. 
The  resistance  of  any  well  bonded  joint  can  be  determined  from  table  VII.  If 
this  be  divided  by  the  resistance  per  foot  of  the  bonded  rail  given  in  table  VI, 
the  quotient  will  represent  the  joint  resistance  expressed  in  feet  of  rail.  For 
example  :  If  an  80-pound  rail  were  bonded  with  a  12-inch  4/0  bond,  what 
should  be  its  resistance  expressed  in  feet  of  rail,  resistivity  of  steel  12  times 
that  of  copper? 

Resistance  of  joint,  .00004553  +  2(.0000041)  =.00005373  ohm. 

Resistance  per  foot  of  80-pound  rail,  .000012454  ohm. 

Feet  of  rail  equal  to  resistance  of  joint,  .00005373  -^.000012454  =  4. 3. 
From  this  and  other  examples  already  given  it  will  be  evident  that  the 
empirical  rule  advocated  by  some  to  arbitrarily  classify  all  joints  measuring 
3  feet  of  rail  as  very  good,  and  those  measuring  over  6  feet  as  bad,  is  absurd. 
The  bonding  may  be  in  first  class  condition  and  still  have  a  resistance  exceeding 
6  feet  of  rail,  for  the  joint  resistance  expressed  in  feet  of  rail  will  depend  in 
every  case  upon  the  length  and  the  size  of  bond  conductance  of  the  rail, 
as  well  as  on  other  conditions.  To  determine  whether  a  joint  should  be 
rebonded  or  not,  first  decide  the  maximum  voltage  drop  or  energy  loss  which 
can  be  allowed  in  the  joint,  then  knowing  the  resistance  of  the  joint  when  well 
bonded,  the  maximum  allowable  joint  resistance  can  readily  be  determined. 

Rail  Joint  Testing     The  simplest  way  of  determining  the  track  resistance 
is  to  measure  it  direct  by  the  drop  of  potential  method, 

when  conditions  are  favorable  for  so  doing.  Knowing  the  current  flowing 
through  a  given  section  of  track  and  the  drop  of  potential  across  the  opposite 
ends  of  the  track  section,  the  resistance  will  equal  the  quotient  of  the  latter 
divided  into  the  former.  The  current  can  be  measured  by  an  ammeter,  while 
the  drop  of  potential  can  be  determined  by  placing  a  low  reading  voltmeter  in 
any  line,  such  as  a  pressure  wire  or  an  insulated  and  disconnected  telephone 


40 


American    Steel    and    Wire    Company 


The    Differential    Millivoltmeter 


Showing    an    A.    S.    &    W.    Bond    Tester   and   Instrument 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances  41 

wire  that  may  conveniently  be  connected  to  the  opposite  ends  of  the  track. 
The  total  resistance  thus  measured  less  the  steel  resistance  will  equal  the 
aggregate  joint  resistance.  If  this  latter  be  higher  than  permissible,  it  is 
customary  to  test  each  joint  independently  by  means  of  some  form  of  rail  bond 
tester,  such  as  those  described  below. 

The  A.  S.  6°  IV.  Rail  Bond  Tester,  shown  on  opposite  page,  is  adapted 
for  very  accurate  measurements.  While  it  can  readily  be  operated  by  one 
man,  the  work  can  be  carried  on  more  rapidly  by  one  man  and  a  helper.  It  is 
a  compact  device  for  measuring  the  resistance  of  a  bond  in  terms  of  the 
adjacent  rail  length.  The  measurements  are  direct  reading  and  absolutely 
reliable,  they  are  easily  and  rapidly  obtained  and  accurate  to  within  ^  inch 
of  rail  length.  The  only  reading  is  taken  direct  from  a  self-winding  tape  line 
stretched  along  on  top  of  the  uncut  rail  when  the  differentially  wound  milli- 
voltmeter  needle  has  been  balanced,  or  brought  to  zero  in  the  center  of  the 
scale.  This  is  probably  the  most  accurate  and  reliable  bond  tester  ever  made 
and  should  be  used  whenever  such  results  are  desired.  See  page  136  for 
further  description  of  the  instrument  and  for  operating  directions. 

Our  Crown  Bond  Tester  shown  on  next  page  differs  from  the  one  described 
above  in  being  self-contained  and  more  easily  handled.  This  instrument, 
however,  is  not  intended  for  extremely  accurate  or  close  measurements,  but 
for  indicating  rapidly  and  positively  the  general  condition  of  bonded  joints. 
The  instrument  box  contains  a  primary  battery  which  supplies  all  current 
required  for  the  test,  and  which  renders  the  testing  set  independent  of  any 
load  current  through  the  track.  It  has  given  quite  satisfactory  results  on 
A.  C.  systems.  The  condition  of  the  joint  is  determined  by  the  relative 
intensities  of  two  tones  produced  in  a  telephone  receiver  attached  to  the 
operator's  ear.  When  the  four-point  contact  bar  is  first  placed  on  a  joint,  a 
certain  definite  tone  will  be  produced  which  is  nearly  the  same  for  all  conditions, 
except  on  open  joints,  when  no  tone  will  be  produced.  By  pressing  the  spring 
contact  point  on  the  rail,  a  different  tone  will  in  general  be  produced.  When 
the  intensity  of  this  second,  or  switch  tone,  is  low  in  comparison  with  the  first, 
the  bonding  of  a  joint  will  be  good.  When  the  two  tones  are  of  equal  intensity, 
the  joint  resistance  will  be  equal  to  approximately  6  feet  of  70-pound  rail,  or 
any  other  predetermined  amount  for  which  the  instrument  may  be  calibrated 
by  request.  The  greater  the  comparative  intensity  of  the  switch  tone,  the 
poorer  will  be  the  bonding.  With  this  instrument  a  single  operator  can  test 
from  12  to  15  miles  of  track  per  day,  and  he  will  be  able  to  discover  all  poorly 
bonded  joints  that  may  be  in  the  track.  The  instrument  weighs  but  eight 
pounds,  is  inexpensive,  and  contains  no  sensitive  parts.  Detailed  information 
w7ill  be  found  on  page  138.  (Patents  pending.) 


42 


American    Steel    and    Wire    Company 


Operating  a  Crown   Bond  Tester 

(See  preceding  page) 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances  43 

Board  of  Trade   Regulations  for  Great  Britain 

Regulations  prescribed  by  the  Board  of  Trade  under  the  provisions  of 

Section  of  the  _  Tramways  Act,   189 ,  for  regulating 

the  employment  of  insulated  returns,  or  of  uninsulated  metallic  returns  of  low 
resistance  ;  for  preventing  fusion  or  injurious  electrolytic  action  of  or  on  gas 
or  water  pipes  or  other  metallic  pipes,  structures  or  substances ;  and  for 
minimizing,  as  far  as  is  reasonably  practicable,  injurious  interference  with 
the  electric  wires,  lines  and  apparatus  of  parties  other  than  the  company  and 
the  currents  therein,  whether  such  lines  do  or  do  not  use  the  earth  as  a  return. 


Definitions      In  the  following  regulations  :  The  expression  "  energy  "  means   electrical 
energy. 

The    expression    "generator"    means    the    dynamo    or   dynamos,   or    other    electrical 
apparatus  used  for  the  generation  of  energy. 

The  expression  "  motor  "  means  any  electric  motor  carried  on  a  car  and  used  for  the 
conversion  of  energy. 

The  expression  "  pipe  "  means  any  gas  or  water  pipe  or  other  metallic  pipe,  structure 
or  substance. 

The  expression  "  wire  "  means   any  wire   apparatus    used   for   telegraphic,  telephonic 
electrical  signaling  or  other  similar  purposes. 

The  expression  "  current  "  means  an  electric  current  exceeding  one-thousandth  part  of 
one  ampere. 

The   expression   "  of  the   company "   has   the  same   meaning   or   meanings   as    in    the 
Tramways  Act,  189 


Regulations     1.     Any  dynamo  used  as  a   generator  shall  be  of  such  pattern  and  con- 
struction   as    to    be   capable    of   producing  a  continuous  current  without 
appreciable  pulsation. 

2.  One  of  the  two  conductors  used  for  transmitting  energy  from  the  generator  to  the 
motors  shall  be  in  every  case  insulated  from  earth,  and  is  hereinafter  referred  to  as  the 
"  line,"  the  other  may  be  insulated  throughout  or  may  be  insulated  in  such  parts  and  to 
such  extent  as  is  provided  in  the  {following  regulations,  and  is  hereinafter  referred  to  as  the 
"  returns." 

3.  Where  any  rails  on  which  cars  run,  or  any  conductors  laid  between  or  within  three 
feet    of    such    rails  form  any  part  of  a  return,  such  part  may  be  uninsulated.     All  other 
returns  or  parts  of  a  return  shall  be  insulated,  unless  of  such  sectional  area  as  will  reduce 
the  difference  of  potential  between  the  ends  of  the  uninsulated  portion  of  the  return  below 
the  limit  laid  down  in  Regulation  7. 


44  American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 

Board  of  Trade  Regulations  — Continued 

4.  When   any  uninsulated  conductor  laid  between    or  within    three  feet   of  the  rails 
forms  any  part  of  a  return,  it  shall  be  electrically  connected  to  the  rails  at  distances  apart 
not  exceeding  100  feet,  by  means    of    copper  strips   having   a   sectional   area   of   at   least 
one-sixteenth  of  a  square  inch  or  by  other  means  of  equal  conductivity. 

5.  When  any  part  of  a  return  is  uninsulated  it  shall  be  connected  with  the  negative 
terminal  of  the  generator,   and   in  such  case  the  negative  terminal  of  the  generator  shall 
also  l>e  directly  connected,  through    the    current  indicator   hereinafter   mentioned,  to    two 
separate  earth  connections,  which  shall  be  placed  not  less  than  twenty  yards  apart. 

Provided,  that  in  place  of  such  two  earth  connections,  the  company  may  make  one 
connection  to  a  main  for  water  supply  of  not  less  than  three  inches  internal  diameter,  with 
the  consent  of  the  owner  thereof  and  of  the  person  supplying  the  water  ;  and  provided  that 
where,  from  the  nature  of  the  soil  or  for  other  reasons,  the  company  can  show  to  the 
satisfaction  of  an  inspecting  officer  of  the  Board  of  Trade  that  the  earth  connections  herein 
specified  cannot  be  constructed  and  maintained  without  undue  expense,  the  provisions 
of  this  regulation  shall  not  apply. 

The  earth  connections  referred  to  in  this  regulation  shall  be  constructed,  laid  and 
maintained  so  as  to  secure  electrical  contact  with  the  general  mass  of  earth,  and  so  that 
an  electromotive  force  not  exceeding  four  volts  shall  suffice  to  produce  a  current  of  at  least 
two  amperes  from  one  earth  connection  to  the  other  through  the  earth,  and  a  test  shall  be 
made  at  least  once  in  every  month  to  ascertain  whether  this  requirement  is  complied  with. 

No  portion  of  either  earth  connection  shall  be  placed  within  six  feet  of  any  pipe  except 
a  main  for  water  supply  of  not  less  than  three  inches  internal  diameter,  which  is  metallically 
connected  to  the  earth  connections  with  the  consents  hereinbefore  specified. 

6.  When  the  return  is  partly  or  entirely  uninsulated,  the  company  shall,  in  the  con- 
struction and  maintenance  of  the  tramway,  (a)  so  separate  the  uninsulated  return  from  the 
general  mass  of  earth  and  from  any  pipe  in  the  vicinity  ;   (b)  so  connect  together  the  several 
lengths  of  the  rails;    (c)   adopt  such  means  for  reducing   the  difference  produced  by  the 
current  between  the  potential  of  the  uninsulated  return  at  any  one  point  and  the  potential 
of  the  uninsulated  return  at  any  other  point ;  and  (d)  so  maintain  the  efficiency  of  the  earth 
connections  specified  in  the  preceding  regulations  as  to  fulfill  the  following  conditions,  viz. : 

(1)  That  the  current  passing  from  the  earth  connections  through  the  indicator  to  the 
generator  shall  not  at  any  time  exceed  either  two  amperes  per  mile  of  single  tramway  line, 
or  five  per  cent  of  the  total  current  output  of  the  station. 

(2)  That  if  at  any  time  and  at  any  place  a  test  be  made  by  connecting  a  galvanometer 
or  other  current  indicator  to  the  uninsulated  return  and  to  any  pipe  in  the  vicinity,  it  shall 
always  be  possible  to  reverse  the  direction  of  any  current  indicated  by  interposing  a  battery 
of  three  Leclanche   cells   connected   in  series  if  the  direction    of  the  current  is  from  the 
return  to  the  pipe,  or  by  interposing  one   Leclanche  cell  if  the  direction  of  the  current  is 
from  the  pipe  to  the  return. 

In  order  to  provide  a  continuous  indication  that  the  condition  (I)  is  complied  with,  the 
company  shall  place  in  a  conspicuous  position  a  suitable,  properly  connected  and  correctly 
marked  current  indicator,  and  shall  keep  it  connected  during  the  whole  time  that  the 
line  is  charged. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances  45 

Board  of  Trade  Regulations — Continued 

The  owner  of  any  such  pipe  may  require  the  company  to  permit  him  at  reasonable 
times  and  intervals  to  ascertain  by  test  that  the  conditions  specified  in  (2)  are  complied 
with  as  regards  his  pipe. 

7.  When  the  return  is  partly  or  entirely  uninsulated,  a  continuous  record  shall  be  kept 
by  the  company  of  the  difference  of  potential  during  the  working  of  the  tramway  between 
the  points  of  the  uninsulated  return  furthest  from  and  nearest  to  the  generating  station. 
If  at  any  time  such  difference  of  potential  exceeds  the  limit  of  seven  volts,  the  company 
shall  take  immediate  steps  to  reduce  it  below  that  limit. 

8.  Every  electrical  connection  with  any  pipe  shall  be  so  arranged  as  to  admit  of  easy 
examination,  and  shall  be  tested  by  the  company  at  least  once  in  every  three  months. 

9.  Every  line  and  every  insulated  return  or  part  of  a  return,  except  any  feeder,  shall 
be  constructed  in  sections  not  exceeding  one-half  of  a  mile  in  length,  and  means  shall  be 
provided  for  insulating  each  such  section  for  purposes  of  testing. 

10.  The  insulation  of  the  line  and  of  the  return  when  insulated,  and  of  all  feeders  and 
other  conductors,  shall  be  so  maintained  that  the  leakage  current  shall  not  exceed  one- 
hundredths  of  an  ampere  per  mile  of  tramway.     The  leakage  current  shall  be  ascertained 
daily,  before  or  after  the  hours  of  running,  when  the  line  is  fully  charged.     If  at  any  time 
it  should  be  found  that  the  leakage  current  exceeds  one-half  of   an  ampere  per  mile  of 
tramway,  the  leak  shall  be  localized  and  removed  as  soon  as  practicable,  and  the  running  of 
the  cars  shall  be  stopped   unless  the  leak    is   localized  and    removed    within    twenty-four 
hours.     Provided  that  where  both  line  and  return  are  placed  within  a  conduit,  this  regula- 
tion shall  not  apply. 

11.  The  insulation  resistance  of  all  continuously  insulated  cables  used  for  lines,  for 
insulated   returns,   for   feeders   or  for   other  purposes,  and  laid   below   the  surface  of  the 
ground,  shall  not  be  permitted  to  fall  below  the  equivalent  of  ten  megohms  for  a  length 
of  one  mile.     A  test  of  the  insulation   resistance  of  all  such  cables  shall  be  made  at  least 
once  in  each  month. 

12.  Where  in  any  case,  in  any  part  of  the  tramway,  the  line  is  erected  overhead  and 
the  return  is  laid  on  or  under  the  ground,  and  where  any  wires  have  been  erected  or  laid 
before  the  construction  of  the  tramways  in  the  same  or  nearly  the  same  direction  as  such 
part  of  the  tramway,  the  company  shall,  if  required  to  do  so  by  the  owners  of  such  wires  or 
any  of  them,  permit  such  owners  to  insert  and  maintain  in  the  company's  line  one  or  more 
induction  coils  or  other  apparatus  approved  by  the  company  for  the  purpose  of  preventing 
disturbance  by  electric  induction.     In  any  case  in  which  the  company  withhold  their  approval 
of  any  such  apparatus  the  owners  may  appeal  to  the  Board  of  Trade,  who  may,  if  they  think 
fit,  dispense  with  such  approval. 

13.  Any  insulated  return  shall  be  placed  parallel  to  and  at  a  distance  not  exceeding 
three  feet  from  the  line,  when  the  line  and  return  are  both  erected  overhead,  or  18  inches 
when  they  are  both  laid  underground. 

14.  In  the  disposition,  connections  and  working  of  feeders,  the  company  shall  take 
all  reasonable  precautions  to  avoid  injurious  interference  with  any  existing  wires. 


46  American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 

Board  of  Trade  Regulations — Continued 

15.  The  company  shall  so  construct  and  maintain  their   systems  as  to  secure  good 
contact  between  the  motors  and  the  line  and  return  respectively. 

16.  The  company  shall  adopt  the  best  means  available  to  prevent  the  occurrence  of 
undue  sparking  at  the  rubbing  or  rolling  contacts  in  any  place,  and  in  the  construction  and 
use  of  their  generator  and  motors. 

17.  In  working  the  cars  the  current  shall  be  varied  as  required  by  means  of  a  rheostat 
containing  at  least  twenty  sections,  or  by  some  other  equally  efficient  method  of  gradually 
varying  resistance. 

18.  Where  the  line  or  return  or  both  are  laid  in  a  conduit,  the  following  conditions 
shall  be  complied  with  in  the  construction  and  maintenance  of  such  conduit : 

(a)  The  conduit  shall  be  so  constructed  as  to  admit  of  easy  examination  of  and  access 
to  the  conductors  contained  therein,  and  their  insulators  and  supports. 

(b)  It  shall  be  so  constructed  as  to  be  readily  cleared  of  accumulation  of  dust  or  other 
debris,  and  no  such  accumulation  shall  be  permitted  to  remain. 

(c)  It  shall  be  laid  to  such  falls  and  so  connected  to  sumps  or  other  means  of  drainage 
as  to  automatically  clear  itself  of  water  without  danger  of  the  water  reaching  the  level  of  the 
conductors. 

(d)  If  the  conduit  is  formed  of  metal,  all  separate  lengths  shall  be  so  jointed  as  to 
secure  efficient  metallic  continuity  for  the  passage  of  electric  currents.      Where  the  rails  are 
used  to  form  any  part  of  the  return  they  shall  be  electrically  connected  to  the  conduit  by 
means  of  copper  strips  having  a  sectional  area  of  at  least  one-sixteenth  of  a  square  inch,  or 
other  means  of  equal  conductivity,  at  distances  apart  not  exceeding  100  feet.      W7here  the 
return  is  wholly  insulated  and  contained  within  the  conduit,  the  latter  shall  be  connected  to 
earth  at  the  generating  station  through  a  high    resistance  galvanometer,  suitable  for  the 
indication  of  any  or  partial  contact  of  either  the  line  or  the  return  with  the  conduit. 

(e)  If  the  conduit  is  formed  of  any  non-metallic  material  not  being  of  high  insulating 
quality  and  impervious  to  moisture  throughout,  and  is  placed  within  six  feet  of  any  pipe,  a 
non-conducting  screen  shall  be  interposed  between  the  conduit  and  the  pipe  of  such  material 
and  dimensions  as  shall  provide  that  no  current  can  pass  between  them  without  traversing 
at  least  six  feet  of  earth,  or  the  conduit  itself  shall  in  such  case  be  lined  with  bitumen  or 
other  non-conducting  damp-resisting  material  in  all  cases  where  it  is  placed  within  six  feet 
of  any  pipe. 

(f )  The  leakage  current  shall  be  ascertained  daily  before  or  after  the  hours  of  running, 
when  the  line  is  fully  charged,  and  if  at  any  time  it  shall  be  found  to  exceed  half  an  ampere 
per  mile  of  tramway,  the  leak  shall  be  localized  and  removed  as  soon  as  practicable,  and  the 
running  of  the  cars  shall  be  stopped  unless  the  leak  is  localized  and  removed  within  twenty- 
four  hours. 


19.  The  company  shall,  so  far  as  may  be  applicable  to  their  system  of  working,  keep 
records,  as  specified  below.  These  records  •  shall,  if  and  when  required,  be  forwarded  for 
the  information  of  the  Board  of  Trade. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances  47 

Board  of  Trade  Regulations — Continued 

Daily    Records     Number    of    cars    running ;     maximum    working    current ;    maximum 

working  pressure. 

Maximum  current  from  earth  connections  (vide  Regulation  6(1). 
Leakage  current  (vide  Regulation  10  and  18  f). 
Fall  of  potential  in  return  (vide  Regulation  7). 

Monthly  Records     Condition  of  earth  connections  (vide  Regulation  5). 

Insulation  resistance  of  insulated  cables  (vide  Regulation  11). 

Quarterly  Records     Conductance  of  joints  to  pipes  (vide  Regulation  8). 

Occasional  Records     Any  tests  made  under  provisions  of  Regulation  6  (2). 

Localization  and  removal  of  leakage,  stating  time  occupied. 
Particulars  of  any  abnormal  occurrence  affecting  the  electric  working  of  the  tramway. 


Signed  by  order  of  the  Board  of  Trade  this day  of  19— 


Assistant  Secretarv,  Board  of  Trade. 


48  American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Typical   Specifications    for   Rail   Bonds 

General     The  intentions  of  these  specifications  are  to  state  the  type,  form,  capacity  and 
dimensions  of  rail  bonds  required,  and  the  manner  in  which  they  are  to  be  made, 
tested,  packed  and  delivered.      The  completed  bonds  and  the  copper  of  which  they  are 
made  shall  conform  to  the  requirements  of  the  following  specifications : 

Description     The  number  of  bonds  required  is  —          — . 

The  kind  of  bond  required  is  Type ,  as  shown  on  page  000  of  the 

(19 — )  Rail  Bond  catalogue  published  by  —  —  Co. 

All  parts  of  these  bonds  shall  be  made  of  commercially  pure  and  uniformly  soft 
annealed  copper  having  a  conductivity  of  not  less  than  98  per  cent.  Matthiesen's  Standard. 

No  individual  wire  shall  be  reduced  in  section  or  materially  weakened  at  any  point. 

All  terminals  and  all  wires,  whether  round  or  flat,  shall  be  of  uniform  size  and  quality, 
free  from  cracks,  burrs,  fins,  slivers  and  hard  spots. 

The  cylindrical  surfaces  of  all  terminal  studs  shall  be  machined  smooth  and  true  to 
size,  and  the  bonds  shall  afterwards  be  carefully  annealed. 

All  flexible  stranded  or  laminated  conductors  shall  be  united  to  the  terminals  in 
such  manner  as  to  make  a  perfect  electrical  and  physical  union. 

Dimensions  All  bonds  furnished  under  these  specifications  shall  have  an  aggregate 
cross  sectional  area,  measured  at  right  angles  to  the  axes  of  the  individual 
wires,  of  —  —  circular  mils,  or  —  —  B.  &  S.  gauge. 

The  bonds  shall  conform  in  design  and  dimension  to  the  accompanying  drawings 
which  are  made  a  part  of  these  specifications. 

The  flexible  conductor  shall  have  000  round  (or  flat)  wires  arranged  and  dimensioned 
as  specified  in  the  attached  drawing. 

No  diameter  of  the  terminal  studs  shall  exceed  that  specified  on  the  drawings.  A 
variation  of  .005  inch  will  be  allowed  under  the  maximum  required  diameter. 

Tests     (  a )     In  bonds  with  copper  terminal  heads  united  to  conductors  of  either  stranded 

cable  or  ribbon,  the  character  of  the  union  between  conductor  and  terminal  head 

shall  be  determined  preferably  by  an  electrical  test,  or  in  the  following  manner. 

The  stud  of  the  bond  shall  be  sawed  lengthwise  into  four  (4)  equal  segments, 
allowing  the  saw  to  cut  to,  but  not  into,  the  conductor.  These  segments  shall  then  be  bent 
back,  tending  to  separate  the  welded  parts.  If  a  clean,  bright  fracture  is  exhibited  with  a 
surface  entirely  free  from  oxide,  the  weld  shall  be  considered  satisfactory. 

( b )  The  test  for  flexibility  hereinafter  described  is  not  made  a  condition  of 
acceptance,  but  may  be  at  the  option  of  the  company  and  accorded  due  weight  in  the 
determination  of  the  relative  excellence  of  the  bond  submitted.  This  test  shall  be  made  by 
holding  rigidly  one  terminal  of  a  bond  while  the  other  end  is  given  a  longitudinal  movement 
of  three-sixteenths  (T3^)  of  an  inch,  or  a  transverse  movement  of  three-sixteenths  (13^)  of  an 
inch,  and  continuing  the  movement  until  the  first  ribbon  or  wire  breaks. 

Packing     The  bonds  shall  be  so  packed  for  shipment  that  they  will  be  suitably  protected 

from    deformation    or    injury,  each    package    being    plainly    marked    with    the 

number,  type  and  length  of  bonds,  and  the  number  of    the  order   upon  which   shipment 
was  made. 

Delivery     The  proposition  must  state  the  shortest   time  after  the  receipt  of  the  order 
in  which  shipment  can  be  made. 


Part    II 


Rail   Bonds 

Page 

Rail    bonds    for    rail    heads          ....         51 
Rail   bonds    for    rail    webs  ....        60 

Rail    bonds    for    rail    flanges      ....        91 


Our  company  makes  bonds  which  are  most 
carefully  constructed,  well  finished  and  very  high  in 
conductivity. 

The  entire  energies  and  resources  of  a  corps  of 
experts  are  devoted  to  the  production  of  our  rail 
bonds  and  bonding  appliances,  resulting  in  a  varied 
product  which  represents  the  highest  attainable  types 
of  excellence. 

Our  manufacturing  facilities,  which  have  in  the 
past  often  been  taxed  to  their  utmost,  have  been 
largely  increased  by  the  addition  of  new  buildings, 
fully  equipped  with  the  most  modern  machinery. 
These  increased  facilities  will  enable  us  to  handle 
large  orders  with  dispatch  and  to  maintain  the  lowest 
possible  prices  consistent  with  the  high  standard  of 
materials  now  required.  Special  attention  .is  given 
to  the  manufacture  of  rail  bonds  to  the  customer's 
own  specifications. 

Inquires  are  solicited,  and  prices  will  be  quoted 
upon  application. 


50 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances  51 

Rail   Bonds    ior   Rail    Heads 

Twin.  Terminal  bonds. 
Soldered  Stud  bonds. 
Soldered  bonds. 

For  the  convenience  of  our  customers  in  selecting  bonds  best  suited  to  their 
needs,  the  various  styles  and  forms  of  bonds  shown  will  be  arranged  in  three 
groups,  according  as  they  are  designed  for  the  head,  the  web  or  the  flange  of 
rails.  This,  we  believe,  will  be  more  convenient  to  the  customer  than  any 
classification  we  might  give  based  on  construction  details  of  the  bonds,  such  as 
already  made  on  page  13. 

In  the  first  group  will  be  shown  those  bonds  designed  especially  for  appli- 
cation to  the  outer  sides  of  heads  of  rails.  We  make  three  styles  suitable  for  this 
purpose,  given  above.  These  differ  only  in  style  of  terminals  used.  In  general 
these  bonds  have  short  conductors  made  of  fine  wire  strand  bent  into  single 
deep  loops  which  render  them  very  flexible.  They  can  be  attached  to  any 
style  of  rail  having  a  head  thick  enough  for  the  application  of  the  terminal. 

These  bonds  in  comparison  with  other  types  have  the  following  distinct 
advantages :  They  can  be  installed  without  disturbing  the  rail  joint,  a  feature 
of  marked  advantage  in  rebonding  old  tracks.  Their  cost  of  installation  is  in 
general  less  than  that  of  other  types.  They  are  always  open  to  visual  in- 
spection. The  large  terminal  contact  area  and  the  short  length  of  conductor 
combine  to  make  a  bond  extremely  high  in  conductivity.  The  twin  terminal 
and  the  soldered  stud  bonds,  owing  to  the  extreme  difficulty  of  removing  the 
terminals  from  the  rails,  effectively  resist  theft. 

All  rail  joints  on  which  these  bonds  are  used  should  be  kept  in  first  class 
condition,  for  no  short  bond  can  be  made  to  last  long  on  joints  having  loose 
plates.  When  these  bonds  are  used  in  paved  streets,  the  conductor  wires  should 
be  mechanically  protected  against  abrasion  from  the  paving. 


Twin  Terminal  Rail  Bonds 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Rail   Bonds   for   Rail   Heads 

Twin  Terminal  Rail  Bonds 

These  bonds  are  designed  for  attachment  to  the  head  of  rails.  They  are 
extensively  used  in  all  parts  of  the  United  States,  and  they  make  an  ideal 
bond  for  interurban  railroads  especially.  The  conductor  loop  extends  down 
over  the  splice  bar  between  the  inner  track  bolts,  and  the  four  terminal  studs 
are  expanded  into  holes  drilled  in  the  lower  edge  of  the  outer  vertical  surface 
of  rail  heads  as  already  explained  on  page  18.  This  bond  can  be  applied  to 
any  form  of  rail  having  a  head  provided  with  an  outer  vertical  plane  sur- 
face equal  to  or  exceeding  J-|  inch  in  thickness.  It  is  made  in  capacities  up 
to  and  including  500,000  circular  mils.  By  double  bonding  as  shown  on 
preceding  page,  any  rail  can  easily  be  bonded  to  its  full  capacity. 

Each  terminal  of  this  bond  is  provided  with  two  parallel  cylindrical  studs, 
each  of  which  is  y?  inch  in  diameter  by  T9g-  inch  long  for  sizes  of  bonds  up 
to  and  including  250,000  circular  mils  capacity  or  -^1  inch  long  for  larger  sizes. 
The  studs  are  milled  smooth  and  have  blunt  conical  ends  which  fit  into  the 
bottom  of  correspondingly  drilled  cup-shaped  holes.  The  two  studs  of  each 
terminal  are  spaced  1^  inches  between  centers.  The  outer  face  of  the 
terminal  is  provided  with  copper  bosses  in  alignment  with  the  studs  as  illus- 
trated. Each  complete  terminal  is  forged  into  shape  from  a  single  piece  of 
soft  rolled  copper.  As  with  our  other  bonds  the  same  improved  process  of 
copper  forging  insures  a  perfect  union  between  conductor  and  terminals. 


Showing  Terminal  Stud  about  to  be  installed  in  Bottomed  Hole 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances  53 

Rail   Bonds   for   Rail   Heads 

Application  Our  four-spindle  drills,  described  on  pages  95  to  105,  operated 
by  hand  or  motor  power,  provide  accurate  and  ready  means  for 
drilling  in  one  operation  the  four  ^2 -inch  holes  required  for  this  type  of  bond. 
The  outer  sharp  edges  of  the  holes  are  rounded  over  slightly  with  a  blunt  ex- 
panding tool  (No.  11,  page  143)  to  avoid  scarfing  the  close  fitting  terminal  studs. 
A  few  threads  or  a  single  small  annular  groove  is  cut  in  the  wall  of  each  hole 
near  its  orifice  with  one  of  the  two  forms  of  special  hand  groove  cutting 
tools  shown  on  page  142.  After  this  the  terminal  studs  are  inserted  in  the 
holes  and  then  expanded  with  hammer  blows  applied  squarely  to  the  face  of 
the  terminal.  At  first  the  hammer  blows  should  be  moderate,  and  increased 
in  force  as  the  copper  begins  to  fiow  over  the  surface  of  the  rail.  They 
are  continued  until  the  outer  boss  has  disappeared  and  the  rivet  head  formed 
is  quite  thin.  When  used  in  paved  streets  the  upper  edge  of  the  terminals 
can  easily  be  drawn  to  a  thin  edge  that  will  turn  off  wagon  wheels. 

Before  inserting  the  terminal  studs  into  the  holes,  both  copper  and  steel 
contact  surfaces  are  made  bright  and  smooth  and  dry  and  clean.  The  length 
of  the  copper  stud  is  greater  than  the  depth  of  the  hole  by  ^  of  an  inch  or 
more.  Hence,  with  the  bottom  of  the  hole  serving  as  an  anvil,  the  hammer 
blows  applied  to  the  studs  force  more  and  more  copper  into  the  holes,  driving 
the  soft  material  into  every  pore  of  the  steel  under  an  intense  pressure  which 
entirely  fills  the  hole  to  the  permanent  exclusion  of  all  corroding  agencies. 
The  copper  also  fills  the  annular  grooves  or  threads  about  each  hole,  thoroughly 
sealing  the  hole  and  anchoring  the  studs  in  the  hole.  This  annular  ring 
formed  about  each  stud  must  be  entirely  sheared  off  before  the  studs  can  even 
be  loosened  in  the  hole,  making  it  difficult  to  remove  the  terminals. 

Advantages  Twin  terminal  rail  bonds  possess  many  distinct  advantages  of 
their  own.  The  very  great  contact  pressure  obtained  especially 
in  the  groove  and  the  adjacent  zone  seals  the  hole  permanently  and  makes 
an  electrical  contact  of  very  high  efficiency.  Each  single  terminal  stud  has 
a  contact  area  of  one  square  inch  or  more,  depending  on  its  length.  This 
large  contact  area,  not  easily  obtained  with  any  other  type  of  terminal  stud 
bond,  permits  the  construction  of  very  efficient  and  compact  bonds  of  large 
capacity.  No  torsional  stresses  can  ever  loosen  these  terminals.  As  each  stud 
connection  to  the  rail  is  quite  independent  of  the  other,  this  double  and 
independent  method  of  attachment  of  terminal  offers  all  the  advantages  of 
double  bonding.  The  rail  joint  does  not  have  to  be  disturbed  for  applying 
this  bond,  and  its  cost  of  installation  is  very  low  compared  with  that  of  any 
other  type.  The  conductor  is  not  injured  by  the  vertical  movements  of  the 
joint,  for  it  enters  the  lower  edge  of  the  terminals  in  a  direction  parallel  to  the 
direction  of  motion. 


54 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Rail   Bonds   for   Kail   Heads 

Twin  Terminal  Rail  Bonds — Continued 

Four  forms  of  twin  terminal  bonds  are  shown  herein,  differing  principally 
in  form  of  loop  and  conductor. 

Form  A  bond,  having  the  broad  loop,  is  used  on  all  joints  where  the  two 
inner  track  bolts  are  far  enough  apart  not  to  interfere  with  the  bond  loop.  If 
the  two  inner  bolts  are  very  close  together,  and  if  neither  of  them  can  be  turned 
so  as  to  bring  the  nuts  on  the  inside  of  the  rail,  then  form  B  bond  is  recom- 
mended. Form  A,  B  and  C  bonds  are  furnished  with  very  small  wires  stranded 
together,  making  an  extremely  flexible  and  durable  bond. 

The  extended  length  of  standard  bonds,  measured  from  center  to  center 
of  terminals  between  studs,  is  seven  inches.  A  large  quantity  of  these  bonds 
always  kept  in  stock.  Other  lengths  to  order. 


Form  A     Twin  Terminal  Bond 


Form  B     Twin  Terminal  Bond 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


Kail   Bonds    for   Kail   Heads 

Form  C  Twin  Terminal  bond,  as  shown  below,  is  made  specially  for 
application  to  the  \Veber  joint.  In  applying  this  bond  the  inner  terminal  is 
installed  first  with  the  aid  of  a  special  punch  (No.  17,  page  144)  resting  against 
the  terminal  studs.  The  other  terminal  is  then  bent  back  into  position  forming 
the  horizontal  loop  which  lies  on  top  of  the  angle  bar.  The  four  holes  are 
drilled  by  either  of  our  standard  four-spindle  drills  described  on  pages  95  to 
105.  The  extended  length  of  these  bonds  measured  between  centers  of 
terminals  is  \)IA  inches. 


Form    C    Twin   Terminal    Bond 

A  fourth  style  of  twin  terminal  bond 
is  made  for  cross  bonding  purposes. 
The  conductor,  made  in  any  required  length, 
extends  across  the  track  between  two  ties  and 
underneath  both  rails  to  the  terminals  which 
are  connected  to  the  outer  sides  of  the  rail  heads. 


Form    C    Twin   Terminal    Bond    Applied    to    a    Weber   Joint 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Hail    Bonds    for   Hail    Heads 

Soldered    Stud    Rail    Bonds 

This  style  of  bond,  as  already  explained,  has  a  combination  twin  stud 
and  soldered  terminal.  The  terminal,  as  will  be  seen  from  the  illustrations, 
differs  from  the  standard  twin  terminal  in  being  extended  a  half  inch  or  so 
beyond  each  stud,  so  as  to  offer  a  large  fiat  surface  for  soldering  to  the  rail.  It 
differs  from  the  regular  soldered  terminal  in  having  two  small  T7g-mch  studs 
integral  with  the  terminal  and  projecting  from  its  inner  surface.  These  studs 
are  expanded  into  corresponding  shallow  holes  drilled  into  the  head  of  the  rail, 
thus  relieving  the  solder  of  all  vibratory  strains  and  greatly  increasing  the 
contact  area  and  life  of  the  joint. 

This  type  of  bond  is  made  in  two  forms  for  the  head  of  rails,  similar  to 
the  twin  terminal  bond,  and  in  sizes  up  to  and  including  500,000  circular 
mils.  Form  A  has  the  broad,  deep  loop  and  is  used  on  rail  joints  having 
plenty  of  space  for  the  loop  between  the  inner  track  bolts.  Form  B  has  the 
narrow  loop  for  use  on  joints  where  the  inner  track  bolts  are  close  together. 
Length  of  bond  from  center  to  center  of  terminals  between  studs,  7 ^2  inches 
extended.  The  bond  shown  below  is  specially  suited  for  third  rail  work. 


Type  B.  S.  B.  (B-est  S-oldered  B-ond)-Form  A  Bond 
(5OO,OOO  circular  mils  capacity) 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances  57 

Rail   Bonds   for   Rail   Heads 

Extremely  good  soldered  contacts  are  easily  secured  with  this  style  of 
terminal,  for  in  hammering  and  expanding  the  studs  into  the  holes,  the  two  plane 
soldered  surfaces  are  brought  without  the  use  of  clamps  into  an  intimate 
contact  that  is  ideal  for  soldering.  This  double  form  of  contact,  which  the 
terminal  makes  with  the  steel,  is  large  in  area,  extremely  efficient  and  as  durable 
as  the  rail.  It  has  the  strength  of  a  welded  contact,  with  the  added  advantage 
of  requiring  no  elaborate  equipment  and  no  dangerously  high  working 
temperatures  for  its  installation.  It  would  be  impossible  to  imagine  a  more 
lasting  or  efficient  form  of  electrical  contact  than  can  readily  be  obtained  with 
this  style  of  bond. 

In  the  installation  of  this  terminal,  the  rail  is  first  drilled  with  one  of  our 
standard  two  or  four-spindle  drills.  The  rail  surface  is  then  brightened,  heated 
and  tinned  the  same  as  for  soldered  bonds.  The  terminal  studs  are  then  ham- 
mered home.  The  rail  is  then  reheated  and  the  bond  is  soldered,  as  described 
on  page  10  for  soldered  bonds.  The  work  if  carefully  done  will  need  no  test- 
ing. The  cost  of  installation  will  be  but  little  in  excess  of  that  for  the  regular 
soldered  bond.  This  form  of  double  application  to  the  rail  has  been  used 
extensively,  and  we  have  yet  to  learn  of  the  failure  of  a  single  terminal.  The 
bond  is  recommended  very  highly  for  any  set  of  conditions  where  exposed  bonds 
can  be  used.  For  concealed  bonds  of  this  types  see  pages  (57  to  84. 


Type   B.   S.   B.-Form  B  Bond  Applied  to  a  Rai 


58 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Rail   Bonds   for   Rail   Heads 

Soldered    Rail    Bonds 


Type    S.  B.  -  Foi 


1   Soldered    Bond 


The  Type  S.  B.  (S-oldered  B-ond)  Form  1  Bond,  shown  above,  has  been 
designed  for  application  to  the  head  of  T-rails.  In  this  bond  the  flexible  con- 
ductor is  composed  of  a  large  number  of  small  copper  wires,  twisted  together 
into  a  compact  strand,  which  is  flexible  in  all  directions.  The  small,  tough 
wires  do  not  break  in  the  loop,  and  projecting  or  loose  joint  plates  will  not 
force  the  bond  from  the  rail.  All  3/0  and  4/0  bonds  are  made  in  two  sizes 
each,  as  shown  below.  Those  having  small  terminals  can  be  used  on  any 
ordinary  size  of  rail ;  large  terminals  used  only  on  70-pound  standard  T-rails 
or  larger.  The  extended  length  of  these  bonds  is  measured  from  end  to  end 
of  terminals. 

Type    S.  B.  -  Form    1  Bond 


Size  of  Bond 

Length  of  Bond 
Formed,  in  Inches 

Dimensions  of 
Contact  Surfaces 
Inches 

Length  of  Bond 
Extended,  in  Inches 

Number  of  Wires 
in  Conductors 

1/0  B.  &  S. 

?x 

9/16  x  2 

8X 

37 

2/0  B.  &  S. 

?X 

9/1(5  x  2 

8X 

61 

3/0  B.  &  S. 

8 

5/8    x  2% 

9 

91 

3/0  B.  &  S. 

8^ 

3/4    x2^ 

9% 

91 

4/0  B.  &  S. 

8 

5/8    x2X 

9 

127 

4/0  B.  &  S. 

W 

3/4    x2^ 

9^ 

127 

300,000  C.  M. 

9 

3/4    x  2^ 

10 

127 

Showing    Application   of   Type    S.  B.  -  Form   1   Soldered    Bond 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


59 


Rail    Bonds    for   Rail   Heads 


Type  S.  B.-Form   1   B.  Soldered   Bond 

The  bond  shown  above  is  similar  to  the  Form  1  bond  shown  opposite, 
except  that  the  conductor  is  composed  of  very  thin  copper  strips  instead  of 
round  wire  strand.  It  will  be  observed  that  the  depth  and  form  of  loop  which 
is  offset  to  clear  the  joint  plate,  insure  great  flexibility. 

See  page  10  for  a  general  discussion  of  soldered  contacts,  and  for 
proper  methods  of  installing  soldered  bonds.  For  concealed  soldered  bonds 
see  pages  67  to  84,  and  for  the  soldered  foot  bond,  see  page  91. 


Type  S.  B.-Form   1  B.  Bond 


Size  of  Bond 

Length  of  Bond 
Formed,  in   Inches 

Length  of  Bond 
Extended,  in  Inches 

Number  of  Copper 
Ribbons   in  Conductor 

2/0  B.  &  S. 

Q/2 

7^ 

21 

3/0  B.  &  S. 

8 

9^ 

26 

4/0  B.  &  S. 

?X 

8% 

33 

300,000  C.  M. 

8 

9^ 

32 

500,000  C.  M. 

8% 

W/2 

40 

For  a  description  of  tools  for  soldered  bonds,  see  pages  131  to  135. 


60  American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 

Rail   Bonds    for   Rail   Webs 

As  already  explained  on  page  2(>,  rail  bonds  which  are  placed  under- 
neath the  splice  bars  and  attached  to  the  webs  of  rails  are  usually  provided 
with  two  conductor  branches,  each  of  which  is  made  either  of  stranded  fine 
copper  wires  (Crown  bonds)  or  of  thin  copper  strips  laid  parallel  (United 
States  bonds).  The  former  style  of  bond  is  generally  used  in  all  cases  where 
the  space  underneath  the  splice  bar  is  large  enough  not  to  compress  the  strand, 
while  the  latter  style  is  used  in  all  joints  having  narrow  spaces  between  plate 
and  web.  There  is  a  third  class  of  single  strand  Crown  bonds  made  to  extend 
around  the  splice  bars,  and  for  cross  bonding  and  special  purposes.  These 
three  styles  of  bonds  are  made  in  different  capacities,  lengths  and  forms  to 
meet  the  great  variety  of  track  conditions,  as  will  be  pointed  out  in  the  follow- 
ing pages.  The  lengths  of  these  bonds  are  measured  between  centers  of  terminals. 
The  principal  advantage  of  placing  bonds  under  splice  bars,  is  protection 
against  theft  and  from  external  mechanical  injury.  For  application  between 
a  splice  bar  and  the  web  of  a  rail,  a  bond  of  such  type  and  size  should  be 
selected,  as  will  never  be  compressed  or  injured  by  the  bar.  The  bond  con- 
ductors should  also  be  carefully  formed  or  bent  into  shape  after  installation. 

Many  of  the  forms  of  bond  conductors,  as  will  be  seen,  can  be  provided 
with  any  one  of  the  following  styles  of  terminals  : 

(a)  Single  solid  stud  terminals  for  compression. 

(b)  Single  tubular  stud  terminals  for  pin  expansion. 

(c)  Double  stud  terminals  for  compression. 

(d)  Double  stud  soldered  terminals  for  compression  and  soldering. 

(e)  Soldered  terminals  for  soldering  to  the  webs. 

Style  (d)  terminal  differs  from  style  (c)  only  in  having  its  surfaces  tinned 
ready  for  soldering  to  the  rail  surface.  The  relative  merits  of  these  various 
kinds  of  terminals  have  already  been  fully  discussed  on  pages  15  to  20,  to 
which  the  reader  is  referred. 

In  the  following  pages  will  be  shown  the  various  styles  and  forms  of  Crown 
and  United  States  bonds,  having  duplex  parallel  branches.  Each  will  be  divided 
into  two  general  classes.  First  will  be  shown  those  in  which  the  branches  enter 
the  terminal  head  in  a  straight  line,  or  are  tangent  to  the  terminal  studs.  The 
merits  of  this  style  have  already  been  pointed  out  on  page  28.  Secondly, 
those  bonds  in  which  the  branches  converge  at  and  enter  the  central  portion  of 
the  terminal  heads.  A  single  rail  bond  of  each  form  of  this  series  will  be 
shown  in  two  views  at  the  top  of  a  page.  On  the  same  page  below  will  be 
shown  one  end  only  of  the  other  bonds  in  the  same  series. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


61 


•e 
s 


"5 

cu 

!_| 

O 

X 

tj 
rt 

5 
o 

'o 

V 

U 

CU 

O 
U 

cd 
:_ 

d 

S3 

'J2 
c 

o 
^ 

cu 

'J2 

X 

x' 

•cu 

^d 

Q 
<-^ 

>^ 

CJ 
^ 

0 
U 

X 

53 

CU 
X 

rt 

,J5 

"  ^> 
"^ 

CU 

cu 

bi 

X 

2 

1 

X 

X 

o 

•rx 

b£ 

'5 
- 

fc. 

rs 
s 

some 

o 

MH 

S-i 
OS 

bh 

53 

X 

O 

<U 

X 

0) 

> 

£ 

SS 
•c 

53 

,J3 

^J 

:^' 

^ 

-c 

:? 

*§ 

d 

0 

u 
c 

5*" 

CJ 

J 

•^ 

I1 

U 

'3 

5 

C/3 

co 

1 

1 

'o 

T3 

£" 

o 

o* 

ci 

S, 

£ 

£ 

^ 

s 

"Z 

'rt 

^ 

^ 

'73 

h 

53 

X 

M 

— 

S 

J" 

-5 

CU 

i§ 

CJ 
X 

73 

_' 

,c 

X3 

r. 

S 

B 

"Zj 

^ 

'^ 

_  ^ 

1 

X 

rt 

^C 

0 

- 

I 

•C 
S 

0 

§ 

X 
CU 

_C 

TJ 

I 

rt 
1) 

0) 

j 

O 

CU 

U 

53 

"5 

h 
C 

s 

= 
^ 

i 

iilia  Railro 

1 

r. 

__>p. 

bX 

X 

O 

X 

st  severe  co 

"  s 

si 


_C       3J 

^     cu 


0     ^ 

JS     «     0     C 

H  K  a-  x 


rt     x     3     -1-     cj 


4^          CU 

x     9 


s  .S 


CU     g 
5n      O 


O 
x 

o  • 


o    S 


62 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Concealed  Rail   Bonds   for   Rail  Webs 

(See  pages  60  and  74) 


Type  C.  S.-O  1    Crown  Bond 


These  bonds  are  used  largely  for  single  bonding  on  rail  joints  having  a 
larger  bonding  space  below  than  above  the  track  bolts.  The  terminals  are 
usually  placed  midway  between  the  first  and  second  bolts.  Made  in  any 
length  or  capacity. 


Type  C.  P.-O1    Crown  Bond 


Showing  a  Type  C.  P.-O1   Crown  Bond  Installed  on  a  Rail 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


63 


Concealed   Hail   Bonds    for   Rail   Webs 

(See  pages  60  and  74) 


LENGTH 


Type  C.  S.-03 
Crown   Bond 


«—  B  — * 


The  bonds  shown  here  are  used  largely  for  double  bonding  on  rail  joints 
having  a  larger  bonding  space  below  than  above  the  track  bolts.  One  terminal 
is  usually  placed  between  the  first  and  second  bolt  holes  of  one  rail  and  the 
other  is  placed  between  the  second  and  third  bolt  holes  of  the  other  rail,  the 
two  bonds  being  staggered.  The  long  open  space  between  the  conductors  at 
one  end  of  the  bond  provides  room  for  one  track  bolt  and  one  terminal  of  the 
opposite  bond,  as  shown  below.  Made  in  any  length  or  capacity. 


Type  C.   P.-O3  Crown  Bond 


Showing  a  Type  C.   S.-O3  Crown  Bond   Installed  on  a  Kai 


64 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Concealed   Rail   Bonds    for   Rail   Webs 

(See  pages  60  and  74) 


—  B 


Type  C.  P.-O2   Crown  Bond 

These  bonds  are  used  largely  for  single  bonding  on  rail  joints  having  equal 
bonding  spaces  above  and  below  the  track  bolts.  The  terminals  are  usually 
placed  midway  between  the  rirst  and  second  bolt  holes.  Made  in  any  length 
or  capacity. 


Type  C.  S.-O2  Crown  Bond 


Showing  a  Type  C.  S.-O27Crown  Bond  Installed  on  a  Rail 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


65 


Concealed   Rail   Bonds   for   Hail   Webs 

(See  pages  60  and  74) 


—  LENGTH     ~ 


Type  C.  P.-O4  Crown  Bond 

The  bonds  shown  here  are  used  for  double  bonding  on  rail  joints  having 
equal  bonding  spaces  above  and  below  the  track  bolts.  One  terminal  is  usually 
placed  midway  between  the  first  and  second  bolt  holes  of  one  rail  and  the  other 
terminal  is  placed  between  the  second  and  third  holes  of  the  other  rail,  the  two 
bonds  being  staggered.  The  long  open  space  between  the  conductors  at  one 
end  of  the  bond  provides  ample  room  for  one  bolt  and  one  terminal  of  the  bond 
on  the  other  side  of  the  rail.  Made  in  any  length  or  capacity  required. 


Type  C.  S.-O4  Crown  Bond 


Showing  a  Type  C.  S.-O4   Bond  Attached   to  the   Web  of  a  Rail 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Concealed   Rail    Bonds    ior   Rail   Webs 

(See  pages  60  and  74) 


-B    -H 


Type  C.  P.-O6  Crown  Bond 


This  form  of  bond  is  used  for  single  bonding  or  for  double  bonding.  Except 
in  very  special  cases,  this  style  of  forming  the  conductor  loops  is  not  as 
satisfactory  as  those  shown  on  the  two  preceding  pages,  and  on  this  account 
none  of  the  other  styles  of  Crown  bonds  will  be  shown  with  this  form  of  loop, 
but  any  of  them  may  be  so  formed  upon  request.  Bonds  with  unequal  sized 
branches  will  take  form  No.  5,  while  those  with  equal  branches  will  take  the 
form  No.  6.  Made  in  any  size  or  length. 


Type  C.  S.-O6  Crown  Bond 


Showing  a  Soldered  Bond  Applied  to  Web  of  Rail 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


Concealed   Rail   Bonds   for   Rail   Webs 

(See  pages  60  and  74) 


r-  a 


B— H 


Type  C.  S.-l   Crown  Bond 


This  type  of  bond  differs  from  those  shown  on  page  02,  only  in  the  form  of 
terminal  head,  which  is  narrower,  and  in  its  method  of  connection  to  the  strand. 

The  three  styles  of  bonds  shown  below  are  exactly  similar  to  the  one  above, 
except  in  style  of  terminals,  and  they  can  be  used  in  similar  places. 


Type  C.  P.-l  Crown  Bond 

Having     tubular     terminal 
studs  for  pin  expansion. 


Type    B.    S.    B.-Form    C    1 
Soldered  Stud  Bond 

The  terminals  of  this  bond 
are  furnished  plain  for  com- 
pression or  tinned  for  sol- 
dering, as  ordered. 


Type  S.  B.-Form  C   1  Sol- 
dered Bond 

The  terminals  of  this  boijd 
are  furnished  tinned  for  sol- 
dering. 


68 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Concealed   Rail   Bonds   for   Rail   Webs 

(See  pages  60  and  74) 


B    - 


Type  C.  S.-3  Crown  Bond 


This  type  of  bond  differs  from  those  shown  on  page  (33  only  in  the  form 
of  terminal  head,  which  is  narrower,  and  in  its  method  of  connection  to  the 
strand. 

The  three  styles  of  bonds  shown  below  are  exactly  similar  to  the  one  above 
except  in  style  of  terminals,  and  they  can  be  used  in  similar  places. 


Type  C.  P.-3  Crown  Bond 

Having   tubular  terminal 
studs  for  pin  expansion. 


Type    B.   S.    B.-Form    C  3 
Soldered  Stud  Bond 

The  terminals  of  this  bond 
are  furnished  plain  for  com- 
pression or  tinned  for  sol- 
dering, as  ordered. 


Type  S.  B.-Form  C  3  Sol- 
dered  Bond 

The  terminals  of  this  bond 
are  furnished  tinned  for  sol- 
dering. 


Rail    Bonds    and   Appliances 


69 


Concealed   Rail   Bonds   for   Rail  Webs 

(See  pages  60  and  74) 


Type  C.  P.-2  Crown  Bond 

This  type  of  bond  differs  from  those  shown  on  page  64  only  in  the  form 
of  terminal  head,  which  is  narrower,  and  in  its  method  of  connection  to  the 
strand. 

The  three  styles  of  bonds  shown  below  are  exactly  similar  to  the  one  above 
except  in  style  of  terminals,  and  they  can  be  used  in  similar  places. 


Type  C.  S.-2  Crown  Bond 

Having  solid  studs  for  com- 
pression. 


Type    B.    S.    B.-Form    C  2 
Soldered  Stud  Bond 

The  terminals  of  this  bond 
are  furnished  plain  for  com- 
pression or  tinned  for  sol- 
dering, as  ordered. 


Type  S.  B.-Form  C  2  Sol- 
dered  Bond 

The  terminals  of  this  bond 
are  furnished  tinned  for  sol- 
dering. 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Concealed   Rail   Bonds    for   Hail  Webs 

(See  pages  60  and  74) 


Type  C.  P.-4   Crown  Bond 

This  type  of  bond  differs  from  those  shown  on  page  60  only  in  the  form 
of  terminal  head,  which  is  narrower,  and  in  its  method  of  connection  to  the 
strand. 

The  three  styles  of  bonds  shown  below  are  exactly  similar  to  the  one  above, 
except  in  style  of  terminals,  and  they  can  be  used  in  similar  places. 


Type  C.  S.-4  Crown  Bond 

Having  solid  terminal  studs 
for  compression. 


Type    B.    S.    B.-Form    C4 
Soldered  Stud  Bond 

The  terminals  of  this  bond 
are  furnished  plain  for  com- 
pression or  tinned  for 
soldering,  as  ordered. 


Type      S.      B.-Form       C4 
Soldered    Bond 

These  terminals  of  this 
bond  are  furnished  tinned 
for  soldering. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


71 


Concealed   Rail   Bonds   for   Rail  Webs 

(See  pages  60  and  74) 


!-— B— M 


Type  C.  S.-OF  Crown  Bond 


This  single  conductor  bond  is  sometimes  used  under  splice  bars  having  a 
large  bonding  space  beneath  the  track  bolts  and  little  or  none  above  the  bolts. 
It  is  a  good  bond  to  use  wherever  the  joint  construction  will  permit.  Some 
advantage  is  gained  by  making  this  style  of  bond  long  enough  to  allow  the 
terminals  to  project  beyond  the  ends  of  the  splice  bars. 

The  three  styles  of  bonds  shown  below  are  exactly  similar  to  the  above 
except  in  style  of  terminals,  and  they  can  be  used  in  similar  places. 


Type      C.     P.-OF       Crown 
Bond 

Having      tubular    terminal 
studs  for  pin  expansion. 


Type  B.  S.  B.    Form  C.  F. 
Soldered  Stud  Bond 

The  terminals  of  this  bond 
are  furnished  plain  for 
compression  or  tinned  for 
soldering,  as  ordered. 


Type     S.     B.-Form    C.     F. 
Soldered  Bond 

The  terminals  of  this  bond 
are  tinned  for  soldering. 


72 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Concealed   Rail   Bonds    for   Rail  Webs 

(See  pages  60  and  74) 


Type  C.  P.  C.  Crown  Rail  Bond 


Type  C.   P.  T.  Crown  Rail  Bond 

These  bonds  are  made  with  flexible  strand,  either  straight  or  crescent- 
shaped  between  terminals,  as  shown  in  the  cuts.  In  the  crescent-shaped 
Crown  bond,  type  C.  P.  C.,  the  curve  of  the  strand  permits  the  terminals  to 
spring  farther  apart  or  closer  together  when  the  rails  contract  or  expand.  In 
the  straight  bond,  type  C.  P.  T.,  to  provide  additional  length  of  each  wire  to 
compensate  for  the  movement  of  rails,  the  strand  is  pressed  back  so  that  it 
bulges  sidewise  midway  between  the  terminals.  The  standard  bonds  of  both 
styles  are  four  inches  between  centers  of  terminals,  but  either  bond  can  be 
made  in  any  length  greater  than  four  inches  between  centers,  if  desired.  Solid 
terminals  for  compression  will  be  furnished  on  order  when  desired. 

These  two  types  of  bonds  are  used  on  the  web  of  the  rail  under  the  splice- 
bar,  and  are  especially  suited  to  very  rigid  rail  joints  having  little  or  no  vibration. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


73 


Bonds   for   Rail   Webs 

Mining    Track    Rail    Bonds 


Showing    a    lO-inch  2/O  Type  C.  P.-O2    Crown    Bond  Applied  to  a  Small    Mining    Rail 


The  conditions  in  mining  tracks  are  so  severe  that  special  bonds  are 
required.  In  general,  the  rails  are  small  and  there,  is  considerable  motion  in 
the  joints.  The  bonds  must  therefore  be  very  flexible.  The  facilities  for  work- 
ing about  rail  joints  are  poor,  owing  to  the  confined  space  and  absence  of  light. 
Therefore  the  bonds  should  be  easy  to  apply.  As  the  cars  frequently  jump  the 
track,  the  bonds  should  be  protected.  Finally  the  bonds  must  be  efficient  and 
lasting. 

The  two  styles  of  bonds  shown  on  this  page  will  fully  meet  all  these  re- 
quirements. In  laying  new  track  rails,  25  pounds  per  yard  or  larger,  we  would 
recommend  the  special  Type  C.  P.-02,  shown  above,  having  extremely  flexible 
conductors.  For  small  rails  or  for  bonding  old  tracks  the  Type  C.  P.  F.  bond 
should  be  used  as  shown  below.  The  strand  of  this  bond  can  be  placed  below 
the  heads  or  nuts  of  track  bolts,  where  they  will  be  protected  from  injury. 


Showing  a  22-inch    2/O  Type  C.   P.   F.  Crown  Bond   Applied  Over  Plate  of  Small   Rail 


7-4 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Concealed   Rail    Bonds    for   Hail   Webs 


B 


Standard   Dimensions  of  Crown  Rail  Bonds 

Table  IX 
Bond  Terminals 


All  Dimensions  in  Inches 

Solid  Stud  Terminals 

Tubular  Stud  Terminals 

Outside 

Size  of  Bond               Diameter  B         Length  of       Thickness  of 
Stud  under          Crown  or 

Length  of 
Stud  under 

Thickness  of 
Crown  or 

Diameter  of 
Hole 

Head,  D            Head,  C 

Head,  I) 

Head,  C 

Through 

Stud,  G 

1/0 

X             X             X 

9 

X 

2 

2/0 
3/0 

$        X        t 

| 

| 

i 

4/0 

]/%                                    ty                                     y5y 

T6 

300,000  C.  M.               1                    #                 # 

$i 

H 

A 

500,000  C.  M. 

3/4                         * 

H 

y* 

I 

Bond  Conductors 

Duplex  Parallel  Bonds 


jjjs_                                             Unbalanced  Bonds 

Balanced  Bonds 

Size  of  Bond 

tween                  Smaller  Strand 

Larger  Strand 

No.  of 

Con 

Dia. 

Capacitv 

ductors      T 
A          No. 
Wires 

Dia. 
Strand 

Capacity 

No. 
Wires 

Dia. 

Strand 

Capacity 

in  each 
Strand 

of  each 
Strand 

of  each 
Strand 

I/O 

#          .. 

19 

.28 

53,000 

2/0 

^       19 

.28 

50,000  C.M. 

37 

.36 

86,000  C.M. 

37 

.32 

67,000 

3/0 

^       37 

.32 

65,000  C.M. 

61 

.40 

105,000  C.M. 

37 

.36      86,000 

4/0 

^       37 

.36 

88,000  C.M. 

61 

.44 

125,000  C.M. 

61 

.40 

106,000 

300,000  C.  M. 

%       61 

.44 

125,000  C.M. 

91 

.51 

175,OOOC.M. 

91 

.47 

150,000 

500,000  C.  M. 

1         127 

.56 

210,000  C.M. 

127 

.65 

290,000  C.M. 

127 

.61 

250,000 

Single  Strand   Bonds 


Pitch  of 

Pitch  of 

Size  of  Bond          Number 
of  Wires 

Diameter 
over  Strand 

Strand  in 
Diameters 

Size  of  Bond 

Number 
of  Wires 

Diameter 
over  Strand 

Strand  in 
Diameters 

Degrees 

i 

Degrees 

1/0 

.    27 

.41             20 

4/0  B.  &  S.  G. 

37 

.56 

20 

2/0                 37              .45             20 

300,000  C.  M. 

61 

.67 

20 

3/0 

37 

.50 

20 

500,000  C.  M. 

91 

.85 

20 

!                                                   -1 

Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


Concealed   Rail   Bonds   for   Rail  Webs 

We  give  below  in  tabulated  form  the  particular  size,  type  and  length  of 
duplex  parallel  Crown  bonds  best  suited  to  standard  rail  sections  and  drillings 
as  given  in  the  latest  editions  of  rail  catalogues  issued  by  the  Carnegie  Steel 
Company  and  the  Lorain  Steel  Company.  Any  style  of  terminals  can  be  used 
equally  well  on  these  bonds.  The  capacity  of  the  bond  is  such  that  there  will 
be  approximately  ^  inch  clearance  about  each  strand  in  a  new  rail  joint. 
If  the  rail  drilling  differs  from  the  standard  as  given  on  pages  177  and  179, 
the  bonds  can  be  lengthened  or  shortened  in  proportion,  so  as  to  bring  the 
bond  terminals  midway  between  the  bolt  holes. 

A.  S.  C.  E.     T-Rail  Sections 
Table  X 


Capacity  of  Strands  in 

Length  of  Bond                Form  Number 

Rail 

Capacity 
of  Bond 

Circular  Mils 

Inches                              of  Bond 

Section 

in  Circular 

Pounds 

Mils 

Smaller 
Strand 

Larger 
Strand 

Single 
Bonding 

Double          Single 
Bonding       Bonding 

Double 
Bonding 

50 

132,716 

66,358 

66,358            10 

14               2 

4 

60 

150,052              66,358 

83,694            10 

14             01 

03 

70 

167,388 

83,694 

83,694            10 

14             02 

04 

75 

167,388             83,694 

83,694            10 

14             02 

04 

80 

216,773 

83,694 

133,079            10 

14             01 

03 

85             238,704 

105,625 

133,079            10 

14             01 

03 

90 

238,704 

105,625 

133,079 

10 

14             01 

03 

100 

238,704 

105,625 

133,079 

10 

14             01 

03 

110             300,851 

133,079 

167,772 

10 

14             01 

03 

Series  " 

A"  and  "B"  T-Rails 

(See  page  177) 

i 

60 

167,388 

83,694 

83,694 

10 

14 

2 

4 

70 

167,388 

83,694 

83,694 

10 

14 

2 

4 

80 

266,158 

133,079 

133,079 

10 

14 

2 

4 

90 

211,250 

105,625 

105,625            10             14              2 

4 

100 

211,250 

105,625 

105,625 

10             14 

2 

4 

Lorain  Girder  Rails 

(See  page  179) 


73 

266,158 

133,079 

133,079 

9 

13 

02 

04 

90 

266,158 

133,079 

133,079 

9 

14 

02 

04 

95 

266,158 

133,079 

133,079 

9 

13 

02 

04 

116 

266,158 

133,079 

133,079 

9      13 

02 

04 

129 

335,544 

167,772 

167,772 

10 

14 

02 

04 

76 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Concealed   Rail   Bonds   for   Rail  Webs 

(See  pages  60  and  85) 


Type   U.  S.-O1    United  States  Bond 

The  United  States  rail  bonds  have  their  flexible  conductors  made  of  flat 
parallel  laid  ribbons  of  annealed  copper.  They  are  adapted  for  use  in  rail 
joints  having  narrow  spaces  between  the  joint  plates  and  rail  web,  as  already 
explained  on  page  27.  The  bonds  shown  here  are  used  largely  for  single 
bonding  on  rail  joints  having  a  larger  bonding  space  below  than  above  the  track 
bolts.  The  terminals  are  usually  placed  midway  between  the  first  and  second 
bolts.  Made  in  any  length  or  capacity. 


Type  U.  P.-01   United  States  Bond 


Showing  a  Type  U.  P.-O1    United  States  Bond  Installed  on  a  Rail 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


77 


Concealed   Rail   Bonds   for   Rail  Webs 

(  See  pages  60  and  85  ) 


Type  U.  S.-O3  United  States  Bond 

The  bonds  shown  here  are  used  largely  for  double  bonding  on  rail  joints 
having  a  larger  bonding  space  below  than  above  the  track  bolts.  One  terminal 
is  usually  placed  between  the  first  and  second  bolt  holes  of  one  rail,  and  the 
other  is  placed  between  the  second  and  third  bolt  holes  of  the  other  rail,  the 
two  bonds  being  staggered.  The  long  open  space  between  the  conductors  at 
one  end  of  the  bond  provides  room  for  one  track  bolt  and  one  terminal  of  the 
opposite  bond,  as  shown  below.  Made  in  any  length  or  capacity. 


Type  U.  P.-O3   United  States  Bond 


*f 


Showing  Type  U.  S.-O3  United  States  Bond  Installed  on  a  Rail 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Concealed   Rail    Bonds    for   Rail  Webs 

(  See  pages    60  and  85  ) 


LENGTH 


Type  U.  S.-O2  United  States   Bond 


These  bonds  are  used  largely  for  single  bonding  on  rail  joints  having 
equal  bonding  spaces  above  and  below  the  track  bolts.  The  terminals  are 
usually  placed  midway  between  the  first  and  second  bolt  holes.  Made  in  any 
length  or  capacity. 


Type  IT.  P.-O2   United  States  Bond 


Showing  a  Type  U.  P.-O2  United  States  Bond  Installed  on  a  Rail 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


79 


Concealed   Kail   Bonds    for   Rail  Webs 

(  See  pages  60  and  85  ) 


Type   LT.  S.-O4   United  States  Bond 

The  bonds  shown  here  are  used  largely  for  double  bonding  on  rail  joints 
having  equal  bonding  spaces  above  and  below  the  track  bolts.  One  terminal 
is  usually  placed  midway  between  the  first  and  second  bolt  holes  of  one  rail, 
and  the  other  terminal  is  placed  between  the  second  and  third  holes  of  the 
other  rail,  the  two  bonds  being  staggered.  The  long  open  space  between  the 
conductors  at  one  end  of  the  bond  provides  ample  room  for  one  bolt  and  one 
terminal  of  the  bond  on  the  other  side  of  the  rail.  Made  in  any  length  and 
capacity  required. 


Type  U.  P.-O4   United  States  Bond 


Type  U.  P.-O4   Bond  Attached  to  Web  of  a  Rail 


80 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Concealed   Rail   Bonds   for   Hail  Webs 


Type  U.  S.-O5   United  States  Bond 

This  form  of  bond  is  used  for  single  bonding  or  for  double  bonding. 
Except  in  very  special  cases,  this  style  of  forming  the  conductor  loops  is  not 
as  satisfactory  as  those  shown  on  the  two  preceding  pages,  and  on  this  account 
none  of  the  other  styles  of  United  States  bonds  shown  will  have  this  form  of 
loop,  but  any  of  them  may  be  so  formed  upon  request. 


Type  U.  P.-O6  United  States  Bond 


Type  U.  S.-O6  United  States  Bond  Applied  to  a  Rail 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


81 


Concealed   Rail   Bonds    for   Rail  Webs 

(  See  pages  60  and  85  ) 


Type  U.  S.-l    United  States  Bond 

This  type  of  bond  differs  from  those  shown  on  page  7t>  only  in  the  form 
of  terminal  head,  which  is  narrower,  and  in  its  method  of  connection  to  the 
conductor. 

The  three  styles  of  bonds  shown  below  are  exactly  similar  to  the  one 
above,  except  in  style  of  terminals,  and  they  can  be  used  in  similar  places. 


Type  U.P.-l  United  States 
Bond 

Having     tubular     terminal 
studs  for  pin  expansion. 


Type    B.  S.  B.-Form    U    1 
Soldered  Stud  Bond 

The  terminals  of  this  bond 
are  furnished  plain  for  com- 
pression or  tinned  for  sol- 
dering, as  ordered. 


Type  S.  B.-Form   U  1  Sol- 
dered Bond 

The  terminals  of  this  bond 
are  furnished  tinned  for 
soldering. 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Concealed   Rail    Bonds   for   Rail  Webs 

(See  pages  60  and  85) 


Type  U.  S.-3  United   States  Bond 

This  type  of  bond  differs  from  those  shown  on  page  77  only  in  the  form  of 
terminal  head, which  is  narrower,  and  in  its  method  of  connection  to  the  conductor. 

The  three  styles  of  bonds  shown  below  are  exactly  similar  to  the  one 
above,  except  in  style  of  terminals,  and  they  can  be  used  in  similar  places. 


Type  U.P.-3  United  States 
Bond 

Having     tubular     terminal 
studs  for  pin  expansion. 


Type    B.  S.  B.-Form    U    3 
Soldered  Stud  Bond 

The  terminals  of  this  bond 
are  furnished  plain  for  com- 
pression or  tinned  for  sol- 
dering, as  ordered. 


Type  S.  B.-Form  U  3  Sol- 
dered  Bond 

The  terminals  of  this  bond 
are  tinned  for  soldering. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


83 


Concealed   Rail   Bonds  for   Hail  Webs 

(See  pages  60  and  85) 


8    H 


Type  U.  P.-2  United  States  Bond 

This  type  of  bond  differs  from  those  shown  on  page  78  only  in  the  form 
of  terminal  head,  which  is  narrower,  and  in  its  method  of  connection  to  the 
conductor. 

The  three  styles  of  bonds  shown  below  are  exactly  similar  to  the  one 
above  except  in  style  of  terminals,  and  they  can  be  used  in  similar  places. 


Type  U.  S.-2  United  States 
Bond 

Having  solid  studs  for  com- 
pression. 


Type    B.  S.  B.-Form    U    2 
Soldered  Stud  Bond 

The  terminals  of  this  bond 
are  furnished  plain  for  com- 
pression, or  tinned  for  sol- 
dering, as  ordered. 


Type  S.  B.-Form  U  2  Sol- 
dered Bond 

The  terminals  of  this  bond 
are  tinned  for  soldering. 


84 


American    Steel    and   Wire    Company 


Concealed   Rail   Bonds   for   Rail  Webs 

(See  page  60) 


Type  U.  P.-4   United  States  Bond 

This  type  of  bond  differs  from  those  shown  on  page  ?(.)  only  in  the  form 
of  terminal  head,  which  is  narrower,  and  in  its  method  of  connection  to  the 
conductor. 

The  three  styles  of  bonds  shown  below  are  exactly  similar  to  the  one 
above,  except  in  style  of  terminals,  and  they  can  be  used  in  similar  places. 


Type  U.  S.-4  United  States 
Bond 

Having  solid  terminal  studs 
for  compression. 


Type    B.  S.  B.  -  Form    U  4 
Soldered  Stud  Bond 

The  terminals  of  this  bond 
are  furnished  plain  for  com- 
pression or  tinned  for  sol- 
dering, as  ordered. 


Type  S.  B.-Form  U4  Sol- 
dered   Bond 

The  terminals  of  this  bond 
are  tinned  for  soldering. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


85 


Concealed   Rail   Bonds   for   Hail   Webs 


Standard    Dimensions    of    United    States    Rail    Bonds 
Table  XI 


Bond    Terminals 


All  Dimensions  in   Inches 


Size  of  Bond 

Outside 
Diameter  B 
of  Stud 

Solid  Stud  Terminals                         Tubular  Stud  Terminals 

Length  of         Thickness         Length  of 
T-*"d               of  Crown               Stud 
Under           or  f[eacj  £            Under 
Head  I)                                       Head  D 

Thickness  of 
Crown  or 
Head  C 

Diameter 
of  Hole 
Through 
Stud  G 

1/0  B.  &  S.  G. 

X 

X         Xto*         A 

X  to  A 

& 

2/0  B.  &  S.  G. 

H 

X                    X   tO   &                    T% 

X   tO    3% 

A 

3/0  B.  &  S.  G. 

X 

X                                  V     tO     3^                                T»y 

X  to  ^ 

H 

4/0  B.  &  S.  G. 

% 

X                    X   tO   ^                    T»F 

X  to  A 

if 

300,000  C.  M. 

1 

X                 ^          H 

H 

* 

Bond    Conductors 

Duplex   Parallel  Bonds 


Unbalanced  Bonds 

Balanced  Bonds 

Distance  Between 

Conductors  (A)  =  1  Inch. 

Smaller  Conductor 

Larger  Conductor 

Forms  02  to  06 

Size  of 

i  )icfanrp 

Bond 

Between 

Number 

Conductors 
A 

Number 

Strips 

Capacity 

Number 
Strips 

Capacity 

of  Strips 
in  Each 
Conduc- 

Capacity Each 
Conductor 

tor 

1/0  B.  &  S.  G. 

X 

4 

36,000  C.  M. 

8 

70,000  C.  M. 

7 

53,000  C.  M. 

2/0  B.  &  S.  G. 

H 

6 

53,400  C.  M. 

9 

81,000  C.  M. 

9 

67,000  C.  M. 

3/0  B.  &  S.  G. 

H 

1 

62,000  C.  M. 

12 

106,OOOC.  M. 

11&12 

86,000  C.  M. 

4/0  B.  &  S.  G. 

H 

9 

80,  000  C.  M. 

15 

132.000C.  M. 

14 

106,000  C.  M. 

300,000  C.  M. 

i 

10 

115,000  C.  M. 

16 

185,000  C.  M. 

13 

150,000  C.  M. 

86 


American    Steel   and  Wire    Company 


Exposed  Bonds  for  Bridging  Splice  Bars 

(See  pages  60  and  74) 

A  long  rail  bond  extending  around  the  splice  bar  and  attached  to  the 
web  of  rails  can  often  be  used  to  better  advantage  than  any  other  type  of 
bond,  as  explained  on  page  30.  This  style  is  especially  serviceable  on  small 
rails  in  mines  where  there  would  not  be  sufficient  room  for  bonds  underneath 
the  splice  bars ;  and  for  rebonding  old  rails  in  paved  streets,  in  which  case  it 
is  not  necessary  to  disturb  the  plates.  Several  types  will  be  shown  on  this 
and  the  next  two  pages.  They  are  made  of  any  length  or  capacity  required. 


Type  C.  S.  S.  Crown  Bond 


These  are  "one-piece"  bonds,  the  terminals  being  forged  from  the  solid 
conductor.  They  are  provided  with  either  solid  or  tubular  terminals.  The 
extended  length  of  these  bonds  should  be  1^  inches  more  than  the  distance 
between  bond  holes,  to  allow  for  forming. 


Showing  a  Type  C.  P.  S.  Crown  Bond  Applied  to  a  Rail 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


87 


Exposed  Bonds  for  Bridging  Splice  Bars 

(See  pages  60  and  74) 


Type  C.  S.  F.  Crown  Bond 


This  type  of  bond  is  very  similar  to  the  Type  C.  S.-O.  F.  series,  shown  on 
page  71.  It  is  a  very  flexible  and  serviceable  bond  for  any  special  or  exposed 
track  bonding.  Also  made  with  tubular  terminals  as  shown  below.  Made  in 
any  length  or  capacity. 


Type  C.  P.  F.  Stub  End  Crown  Bond 


Stub  End  Bonds 


Are  made  to  any  length  or  capacity,  and  though  we  have 
shown  here  but  one  style  of  terminal,  it  will  be  understood 
that  stub  end  bonds  can  be  made  with  any  of  our  regular  terminals. 


Type  C.  P.  F.  Crown  Bonds  Applied  to  Conduit  Rails 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Exposed   Bonds   for   Bridging   Splice   Bars 

(See  pages  60  and  74) 


Type  C.  S.-O.  G.  Crown  Bond 

(Patented) 

These  make  an  extremely  flexible  and  serviceable  bond  for  bridging  splice 
bars  or  for  other  purposes.  The  portions  of  the  strand  adjacent  to  the  ter- 
minals are  bent  out  to  clear  the  splice  bars  and  then  dipped  in  molten  solder, 
which  renders  this  portion  of  the  bond  conductor  stiff  enough  to  retain  this  form 
indefinitely.  Its  extended  length  is  about  1  ^  inches  longer  than  the  distance 
between  bond  holes. 


Type  C.  P.-O.  G.  Crown  Bond 


The  Chicago  bond,  of  which  we  have  always  been  the  only  makers,  was 
the  first  type  to  be  provided  with  enlarged  tubular  terminals,  and  from  this  have 
been  developed  all  Crown  bonds  having  pin  expanded  terminals.  This  is  a 
one-piece  bond,  suitable  for  spanning  joint  plates.  Made  in  any  length  or 
capacity  up  to  4/0,  and  furnished  with  expanding  pins. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


Type  C.  P.  X.  Crown  Bond 

Used  for  Cross  Bonding 


It  is  advisable  to  bond  together  at  frequent  intervals  the  two  rails  of  a 
track,  or  the  several  parallel  tracks  of  a  system,  by  means  of  cross  bonds. 
These  aid  materially  in  preventing  open  track  circuits.  For  this  purpose  we 
supply  the  two  Crown  bonds  here  shown.  On  interurban  roads  it  is  advisable 
to  use  ten  or  more  of  these  bonds  per  mile,  while  in  city  streets  with  heavy 
traffic,  they  should  be  placed  much  nearer  together. 

Made  in  any  length,  though  generally  about  rive  inches  longer  than  the 
track  gauge. 


Application  of  Type  C.  S.  X.  Crown  Bond  to  Rail 


NOTE— We  make  other  bonds  similar  in  form  to  types  C.  S.-O.  G.  and  C.  P.-O.  G. 
shown  on  opposite  page.  The  terminal  shoulders  of  these  extend  back  on  the  conductor  to 
a  considerable  distance,  and  the  ends  of  the  bonds  are  not  dipped  in  solder.  This  bond 
provided  with  solid  terminals  is  known  as  type  C.  S.-G.  Crown  bond  and  the  tubular 
terminal  bond  is  called  type  C.  P.-G.  Crown  bond. 


90 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Socket    Terminals 

These  terminals  can  be  used  in  many  places  where  it  would  be  incon- 
venient to  order  special  lengths  of  bonds.  The  various  styles  of  terminal 
shanks  shown  are  provided  with  deep  sockets,  into  which  the  conductors,  cut 
to  proper  length,  may  be  soldered  by  the  purchaser.  Standard  terminals  of  these 
designs  are  made  with  studs  having  diameters  of  S/8,  ^,  fa  and  1  inch.  The 
sockets  in  every  case  are  drilled  to  fit  the  conductor,  as  ordered. 


Type  C.  P.  N.  D.     Duplex  Crown  Socket  Terminal 


Type  C.  S.  O. 


Type  C.  P.  O. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


91 


Rail   Bonds    for   Rail   Flanges 

(See  pages  19  and  58) 

Under  certain  conditions,  bonds  can  be  advantageously  applied  to  the 
flanges  of  rails.  This  is  especially  true  of  feeder  rails,  which  being  elevated 
on  insulators,  are  easy  of  access,  and  which  are  comparatively  free  from 
severe  vibrations.  In  general,  feeder  rails  require  short  heavy  bonds  of  high 
conductance,  such  as  the  type  B.  S.  B.,  form  A  bond  (see  page  56)  applied 
to  the  rail  head,  or  either  of  the  following  bonds  which  is  attached  to  the  flange. 


Type  S.  B.-Form  2  Soldered  Bond 


No  other  soldered  bond  has  given  such  efficient  and  lasting  service  as  this 
which  is  attached  to  the  under  side  of  the  flange.  This  bond  is  often  made 
large  in  capacity. 


Type  S.  B.-Form  2  Soldered  Bond   Applied  to  Third  Rail 


American    Steel    and   Wire    Company 


Hail  Bonds  for  Hail  Flanges 


Type  U.  S.  B.  United  States  Bond— Single  Loop 

The  bond  here  shown  is  designed  for  the  under  side  of  the  flange  of  rails. 
The  crown  of  the  terminal  is  beveled  to  bring  the  axis  of  the  terminal 
perpendicular  to  the  upper  surface  of  the  rail  flange.  The  terminals  are 
connected  by  a  conductor  built  up  of  layers  of  thin  copper  ribbons  bent  into 
either  of  the  two  forms  shown.  The  standard  formed  length  of  this  bond  is 
five  inches.  Using  our  hydraulic  punch  and  compressor,  shown  on  pages  126 
to  130,  this  bond  can  be  quickly  and  effectively  installed.  The  bond  is 
specially  suitable  for  feeder  rails,  and  is  made  in  any  size  up  to  500,000 
circular  mils. 


Type  U.  S.  B.  United  States  Bond  Applied  to  Rail— Double  Loop 


Part  III 


Bonding    Tools    and    Appliances 

Page 
Drilling  machines 94 

Compressors  ........       120 

Tools  for  Soldering 131 

Bond  Testers  and  Hand  Tools  136 


The  durability  and  efficiency  of  a  rail  bond  in- 
stallation, as  well  as  its  cost,  will  depend  to  a  large 
extent  upon  the  effectiveness  of  the  tools  used.  No 
workmen  can  do  good  work  with  poor  bonding  tools. 
We  were  the  pioneers  in  the  manufacture  of  rail 
bonds  and  our  extensive  and  thorough  experience 
has  enabled  us  to  develop  the  complete  series  of 
perfected  tools  shown  in  this  section.  First  and 
foremost  our  aim  has  been  to  produce  tools  of  the 
greatest  effectiveness  and  suitability  for  the  service 
to  which  they  are  to  be  put ;  to  make  them  perfect 
in  every  detail,  and  as  strong,  durable  and  reason- 
able in  cost  as  possible.  With  the  exception  of  the 
small  hand  tools,  which  are  sold  only,  all  of  the 
bonding  tools  shown  are  sold  or  rented  to  customers 
using  our  rail  bonds. 

We  solicit  your  correspondence  and  shall  be 
pleased  to  quote  you  on  rail  bonds  or  bonding  tools. 


94 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Drilling  Machines 


To  drill  a  bond  hole  in  a  rail  as  it  should  be  drilled,  exact  to  size,  with 
smooth  surfaces,  fitting  closely  the  terminal  of  the  bond  to  be  used,  the  drilling 
machine  must  be  attached  rigidly  to  the  rail.  Its  parts  must  be  strong  and 
durable  to  resist  wear,  and  they  must  be  accurately  and  closely  adjusted.  The 
various  styles  of  drilling  machines  here  shown  meet  these  requirements  in  every 
particular.  They  are  unique  and  simple  in  their  design  and  construction  and 
make  a  long  step  forward  in  the  evolution  of  rail  bonding.  Easily  handled  and 
operated,  they  work  rapidly  and  accurately.  All  machines  shown  (except 
Nos.  19  and  21-M)  are  rigidly  attached  to  the  rails  with  a  vise-like  grip. 
Those  which  are  attached  to  the  head  of  the  rail  can  easily  be  placed  in 
position  or  removed  in  eight  (8)  seconds,  and  without  disturbing  the  joint 
plates.  Each  machine  has  a  positive  automatic  feeding  device  which  can  be 
controlled  at  will.  The  drills  are  operated  with  a  vertical  hand  lever  or  with  a 
GOO-volt  D.  C.  series  wound  electric  motor.  It  has  been  demonstrated  beyond 
question  that  a  man  can  do  a  given  amount  of  drilling  much  easier  by 
operating  a  lever  than  he  can  by  turning  a  crank. 

In  every  hand-operated  machine  each  half  stroke  of  the  lever  rotates  all 
drills  forward  through  equal  angles  of  rotation.  In  all  multiple-spindle  drilling 
machines  each  separate  spindle  is  provided  with  an  adjusting  nut  so  that  each 
drill  can  be  adjusted  independently  of  the  others.  This  provision  offsets  uneven 
wearing  of  drills  or  setting  of  rails.  The  drill  points  are  held  rigidly  in  the 
machine  and  therefore  seldom  break  or  chip.  For  the  same  reason  the  holes 
may  be  started  without  first  prick  punching  the  rail. 

Where  necessary  the  machines 
are  equipped  with  gauges  for  deter- 
mining the  correct  depth  of  holes, 
and  with  screws  to  raise  or  lower 
the  frames  quickly  so  as  to  bring 
the  drill  points  into  their  correct 
position.  The  levers  by  which  the 
machines  are  operated  are  detach- 
able and  in  many  cases  serve  as 
handles  for  carrying  the  tools,  and 
as  wrenches  for  attaching  the  drills 
to  the  rails.  Each  drilling  machine 
is  equipped  with  all  fittings  and  one 
set  of  new  drills.  Many  parts  of 
these  machines  are  interchangeable 
and  small  parts  may  be  ordered  by 

No.  22    Drill    Being    Operated    by   Two    Men         mail. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


95 


Drilling   Machines 

Parts  should  be  ordered  by  part  numbers  as  shown  on  later  pages.     All 
parts  are  made  of  high  grade  steel,  and  machined  accurately  to  size. 


Four-Spindle   Drill,   Type   No.  '2'2 

The  hand-operated  double-twin  drill  shown  above  is  one  of  the  most 
perfect  machines  ever  constructed.  It  drills  at  one  time  all  four  holes  for  the 
twin  terminal  bond.  Two  men  can  operate  this  machine  and  drill  the  holes 
for  eight  joints  per  hour.  This  reduces  the  cost  of  installing  the  twin  terminal 
bonds  to  a  very  low  figure.  The  drill  grips  the  head  of  the  rail  rigidly  and  it 
can  be  placed  in  position  without  disturbing  the  splice  bars. 

Weight  of  machine  complete  approximately  125  pounds. 

See  next  page. 

Directions  for  Operating  Type  22  Four-spindle  Hand-operated  Drill 

Place  clamping  bars  22  over  head  of  rail  and  adjust  vertically  for  drilling 
by  means  of  adjusting  screws  27.  Holes  should  be  high  enough  on  rail  head 
to  leave  at  least  ^  inch  of  steel  in  lower  edge.  Clamp  machine  to  rail  tight 


96  American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 

Drilling   Machines 

Directions  for  Operating  No.  22  Drill — Continued 

enough  to  hold  securely,  but  not  tight  enough  to  break  the  clamping  bar,  with 
handle  wrench  34,  on  clamping  "nuts  25.  Machine  should  be  level  with  track. 
Run  drill  points  up  to  rail  by  means  of  hand  wheel  9,  and  adjust  drills  by  means 
of  adjusting  nuts  41,  so  that  all  four  drills  will  press  against  rails.  Keep  all 
the  adjusting  nuts  41  well  back  on  spindles  so  as  to  afford  good  driving  seats 
for  twist  drill  shank. 

Set  depth  gauge  29  to  nearest  index  mark  on  guide  bars  22.  Turn  pawl 
cam  15  to  mesh  feed  pawls  18  with  feed  ratchet  gear  13,  so  that  the  drills  will 
feed  into  rail  automatically.  Place  handle  lever  34  on  driving  stud  31  and 
operate,  drilling  holes  in  rail  to  required  depth,  which  will  be  shown  when  depth 
gauge  travels  to  next  index  mark  on  guide  bars.  Exact  depth  of  holes  is  important. 

Lift  feed  pawls  out  of  mesh  with  feed  ratchet  gear  by  means  of  pawl  cam 
15.  Then  feed  drills  back  from  rail  with  hand  wheel  9,  loosen  clamping  nuts. 
remove  machine  from  rail,  move  to  next  joint,  and  repeat. 

To  remove  twist  drill  from  drill  spindles,  loosen  set  screw  43  on  clamp  dogs, 
then  pull  out  the  drill.  Drills  must  be  kept  sharp  and  ground  at  proper 
angles  at  all  times,  else  much  trouble  will  result,  and  the  machine  may  be 
broken.  In  grinding  drills  duplicate  the  exact  shape  of  a  new  drill  point. 
While  use  of  oil  on  drill  points  is  optional  with  customers,  the  life  of  the 
machine  and  the  drills  will  be  much  prolonged  by  using  lard  oil,  and  the 
machine  will  work  easier.  The  holes  can  easily  be  cleaned  with  gasoline.  (See 
page  24.)  Keep  the  machine  clean  and  free  from  sand,  and  well  oiled  with 
good  machine  oil.  This  machine  can  be  operated  with  any  one  or  two  drills 

removed. 

Parts    for    Type  22    Drill 

1  Large  part  of  body  (back)  casting.  26  Washer  on  guide  bar  (clamp). 

2  Small  part  of  body  (front)  casting.  27  Adjusting  screw  on  guide  bar. 

3  Gear  cover,  casting.  28  Tie  for  guide  bar  (clamp). 

4  Springs  on  gear  cover.  29  Depth  gauge  for  drilling. 

5  Truss  plate  on  back  part  of  body.  80  Thumb  nut  for  depth  gauge. 

6  Small  yoke  for  feed  screw.  31  Driver  lever  for  driving  machine. 

7  Large  yoke  for  feed  screw.  32  Pawl  for  drive  lever. 

8  Plate  on  large  yoke  (outside  of  brass  nut).       33  Stud  for  drive  lever,  pawl  stud. 

9  Hand  wheel.  34  Handle  and  wrench  for  drive. 

11  Brass  nut  on  feed  screw.  35  Single  gear  spindle. 

12  Feed  screw.  36  Double  gear  spindle. 

13  Feed  ratchet  gear.  37  Intermediate  gear. 

14  Collar  on  feed  screw.  38  Intermediate  gear  staggered  teeth. 

15  Cam  for  feed  pawls  on  feed  screw.  39  Ratchet  driving  gears. 

16  T\-inch  plunger  for  cam  in  truss  plate.  40  Shaft  for  drive  gears. 

17  Spring  for  plunger  in  truss  plate.  41  Adjusting  nuts  on  spindle. 

18  Feed  pawls.  42  Clamps  (dogs)  for  holding  drills. 

19  Spring  for  feed  pawls.  43  %-mch  headless  set  screws  for  dogs  on 

20  y5(T-inch  headless  set  screw  in  pawls.  spindle. 

21  Brass  friction  in  feed  pawls.  44  Ball  race  in  truss  plate. 

22  Guide  and  clamping  bar  for  machine.  45  Truss  block  for  feed  screw. 

23  Loose  jaw  on  guide  bar  (clamp).  46  ^ -inch  balls. 

24  1-inch  nut  on  guide  bar  (clamp).  48  Oil  hole  cover  (front  body). 

25  ly^-inch  nut  on  guide  bar  (clamp).  49  Oil  hole  cover  (back  body). 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


97 


Drilling   Machines 


Type    22    Drill 
Hand    Operated 


50  Oil  hole  cover  (back  body).  58 

51  Collar  on  driving  shaft.  62 

52  Friction    spring    on    adjusting   nut    on 

spindles. 

53  Woodruff  key  for  guide  bars.  63 

54  j^-inch  cap  screw  in  truss  plate.  64 
56  Spring  for  driving  pawls. 


T\-inch  pins  for  collar  on  feed  screw, 
^-inch  cap  screws  for  small  and  large 

part  of  body  truss  plate  and  tie   on 

guide  bars. 

^-inch  cap  screw  for  small  yoke. 
T5s-inch  Fil.  screws  for  plate  on  large  yoke 

outside  brass  nut  for  feed  screw. 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Drilling   Machines 


Motor   Drill,  Type    22  M 


The  four-spindle  motor  drill  shown  above  is  one  of  the  most  perfect 
machines  ever  constructed.  It  drills  at  one  time  all  four  holes  in  the  head  of 
a  rail  for  our  standard  twin  terminal  bond.  The  construction  of  the  drilling 
machine  is  the  same  as  for  drill  No.  22,  already  explained  on  preceding  pages. 
Two  men  can  easily  handle  this  machine  and  drill  holes  for  seventeen  or  more 
joints  per  hour.  This  reduces  the  cost  of  installing  twin  terminal  bonds  to  an 
extremely  low  figure.  The  series  wound  motor  built  specially  for  this  drill  is 
light  and  compact  and  will  operate  directly  on  a  600-volt  trolley  circuit. 
The  internal  windings  are  thoroughly  well  protected  and  insulated,  and  the 
armature  shaft  is  geared  direct  to  the  drill  spindles.  The  machine,  having 
two  small  carriage  wheels,  can  be  placed  on  the  rail  and  moved  easily  from  joint 
to  joint,  or  it  can  be  carried  about  by  means  of  the  handle  which  hooks  into 
the  motor  frame.  Weight  of  machine  approximately  300  pounds. 


Rail  Bonds  and  Appliances 


Drilling  Machines 


Four-Spindle 
Motor  Drill,  Type    O22  M 


Single  Spindle 
Motor  Drill 
Type  0:2  1  M 


9Sb  American  Steel  and  Wire  Company 

Drilling  Machines 

The  022  M  and  O21  M  Motor  Drill 

An  entirely  new  design  of  four-spindle  motor  drill  has  been  developed  for 
our  Twin  Terminal  Bond,  as  shown  on  preceding  page.  While  this  new 
machine  weighs  but  little  more  than  our  old  drill  (shown  on  page  98)  and  can 
readily  be  carried  about  by  three  men,  it  is  much  stronger,  more  durable  and 
more  easily  handled.  It  is  carried  on  a  light  three-wheel  truck,  and  is  so 
designed  that  all  adjustments  and  operations  can  be  made  easily  and  quickly. 
It  is  fed  by  hand,  the  correct  depth  of  holes  can  readily  be  determined  by  a 
plainly  marked  index,  and  the  gearing  which  runs  in  a  grease  tight  casing  is 
pratically  noiseless  and  f rictionless.  All  four  holes  can  be  drilled  in  about  one 
minute,  and  it  requires  less  than  a  minute  to  set  the  machine,  thus  bringing  the 
cost  of  drilling  down  to  a  very  low  figure.  It  is  operated  by  a  GOO-volt  D.  C. 
series  wound  motor  of  ample  capacity  for  the  work  and  of  standard  make. 

By  removing  a  few  nuts  and  bolts,  the  whole  gear  case  can  be  removed 
from  the  side  bars  and  can  be  replaced  by  a  similar  gear  case  operating  a 
single  drill  spindle  suitable  for  drilling  holes  of  any  size  through  webs  of 
rails.  Adjustments  are  provided  for  quickly  raising  or  lowering  the  drill  point 
for  different  sizes  of  rails.  This  separate  attachment  provides  means  of 
obtaining  a  first  class  motor  driven  single  spindle  drill,  and  the  two  styles  of 
drills  make  a  very  flexible  arrangement  for  any  railway  system  using  the  Twin 
Terminal  Bond  as  a  standard. 


List  of  Parts  for  Type  O22  M  Motor  Drill 

Made  by  American  Steel  &  Wire  Co. 

1  Drill  Frame.  15     Feed  Points  Holder. 

2  Gear  Housing  on  Drill  Frame.  16     Feed  Wheel. 

8     Brass  Bushing  in  No.  2  with  Ijs-mch  16- A  Feed  Wheel  Shaft. 

Hole.  16- B  Raising  Wheel. 

4  Brass  Bushing  in    No.  2    with    if -inch  17     Bearing  for  Clamping    Lever    Stud    on 

Hole.  No.  14. 

5  Brass  Bushing  in   No.  2  with  1^-inch  18     Screw  Points  on  No.  15. 

Hole.  19     Motor  Yoke. 

5- A  Brass    Bushing    in    No.  2  with  1-inch  20     Wheel  on  rear  end  of  Truck. 

Hole.  20-  A  Wheel  on  forward  end  of  Truck. 

6  Thrust  Plate  for  Drill  Spindles.  21      Handles  on  No.  6. 

7  Back  Bearing  Casting  for  Drill.  22     Pivot  Bracket  on  No.  39. 

8  Brass   Bushing   in    No.  7  with    i;|-inch  23     Bushing  in  No.  20. 

Hole.  24     Bushing  in  No.  20-A. 

9  Brass   Bushing    in    No.  7  with    l|-inch  25     Stud  for  No.  20-A. 

Hole.  26     Nut  for  No.  25. 

10  Gear  Housing  on  Motor.  27     Stud  for  No.  22. 
10- A  Bushing  in  No.  10.  28     Sliding  Bracket.    . 

11  Back   Bearing  Cover  for  Motor.  29     Truck  Frame. 

12  Feed  Yoke.  30     Raising  Screw. 

13  FeedNutBushinginFeedYoke.  31     Brass  Washer  on  No.  30. 

14  Feed  Bracket.  32     Nut  on  No.  30. 

14-A  Bearing  for  No.  14.  33     Yoke  Bracket  on  Truck. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


98c 


Drilling  Machines 


84     Raising  Yoke  on  No.  14. 

35  Stud  for  No.  34. 

36  Nut  for  Raising  Screw  on  No.  33. 


37  Bolt  for  Feed  Yoke   No.  12  and  Pivot 

Bracket  No.  22. 

38  Nut  for  No.  39. 


98cl  American  Steel  and  \Vire  Company 

Drilling  Machines 

List  of  Parts  ior  Type  O22  M  Motor  Drill—  Continued 

39  Guide  Rods.  63  Roll  Bearing  Bushing  on  end  of  Arma- 

40  Stud  for  Rear  Truck  Wheel  No.  20.  ture  Shaft. 

41  Adjusting  Screws.  64  Roll  Bearing  Cup  on   end  of  Armature 

42  Drilling  Gage.  Shaft. 

43  Thumb  Nut  for  No.  42.  65  Rolls  for  Roll  Bearing. 

44  Washer  for  No.  42.  66  Spring  Ring  for  No.  63. 

45  Inside  Drill  Spindle  and  Gear.  67  Stud  for  Compound  Gears  in  No.  11. 

46  Outside  Drill  Spindle  and  Gear.  68  Ball    Race    in    No.  6   for  end  of    Drill 

47  Adjusting  Nut  on  Drill  Spindles.  Spindles. 

49  Clamping  Dog  for  Drills.  69  ^-inch  Steel  Balls  for  Ball  Race  No.  6S. 

50  Set  Screw  for  No.  49.  70  Bevel  Gear  on  Feed  Stud  No.  73. 

51  Intermediate  Gears  in  No.  1.  71  Bevel  Gear  on  Feed  Screw. 

52  40-Tooth  Gear  in  No.  2.  72  Feed  Screw. 

53  24-Tooth  Gear  in  No.  2.  73  Feed  Stud. 

54  Pinion  Gear  in  No.  2.  74  Stud  in  No.  2. 

55  55-Tooth  Gear  in  No.  10.  75  Clamping  Lever. 

56  Compound  Gears  in  No.  10.  76  Short  Clamping  Lever. 

57  Pinion  Gear  on  end  of  Armature  Shaft.       77  Releasing  Lever  on  No.  75. 

58  Nut  on  end  of  No.  60.  78  Pawls  on  No.  75. 

59  Sleeve    Coupling    on    No.  60  and  No.       79  Pawl  Rack  on  No.  14. 

54.  80     Lever  Stud  on  No.  17. 

60  Transmission  Shaft  between  Motor  and       81     Connecting  Rod  between  Nos.  77  and  78. 

Drill.  82     Brass  Connecting  Post  on  Starting  Box. 

61  Washers  on  end  of  No.  54.  83     Armature  Shaft. 

62  Nut  on  end  of  No.  54.  84     Brush  with  Pig  Tail. 

Directions  for  Operating  Type  O22  M  Motor  Drill 

Place  machine  over  rails  and  adjust  vertically  for  drilling  by  means  of  adjusting  screw 
No.  41,  then  clamp  to  rail  with  lever  No.  75. 

Run  drills  up  to  rail  with  feed  wheel  No.  16  and  adjust  by  means  of  adjusting  nuts 

No.  47,  so  that  all  four  drills  will  contact  with  rail.     Keep  all  adjusting  nuts  No.  47  well 

back   on  spindles  so  as  to  afford  good   driving  seats  for  twist   drill  shanks.     Set  depth 

gage  No.  42  to  nearest  index  mark  on  guide  bars  No.  39.     This  machine  is  graduated  for 

— bonds. 

Start  motor  by  placing  trolley  terminal  bushing  on  connecting  post  No.  82  and  feed 
machine  by  hand,  taking  care  that  drills  are  cutting  freely  until  the  depth  gage  reaches  the 
next  index  mark.  Feed  drills  back  from  rail  and  release  lever  No.  75,  then  raise  machine 
by  means  of  wheel  No.  16-B,  so  that  the  drill  points  will  be  above  the  rail  when  going 
from  one  joint  to  another.  To  remove  twist  drills  from  drill  spindles,  loosen  set  screw 
No.  43  on  clamp  dogs  and  then  pull  out. 

Drills  must  be  kept  sharp  and  ground  at  the  correct  angle  at  all  times,  duplicating 
the  point  of  a  new  drill.  Customers  should  use  a  good  quality  of  lard  oil  on  drill  points 
while  drilling.  This  is  necessary  to  get  the  best  results  from  the  machine  and  drills,  as  it 
will  prevent  a  lot  of  trouble.  The  holes  should  be  cleaned  with  gasoline. 

Keep  all  working  parts  of  the  machine  well  cleaned  and  oiled  with  a  good  quality 
machine  oil,  making  sure  that  oil  hole  covers  are  always  kept  closed.  This  is  very  impor- 
tant to  keep  dust  and  sand  out  of  bearings  and  will  increase  the  life  of  the  machine. 

MOTOR.  Use  a  two  (2)  ampere  fuse  wire  in  motor  circuit  at  all  times.  Never  start 
motor  under  full  load.  Use  starting  rheostat  in  starting  motor.  Keep  all  parts  of  motor 
wiring  and  especially  the  commutator  clean  and  dry.  Examine  brushes  frequently  to  see 
that  they  make  good  contact  with  the  commutator. 


Kail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


Drilling   Machines 

(See  next  page) 


List    of    Parts    for   Type    22  M    Motor   Drill 


65  Motor  drill  casting.  85 

66  40-tooth  gear.  87 

67  20-tooth  gear.  88 

68  30-tooth  gear.  90 

69  Stud  for  gears.  91 

71  Gear  housing  on  motor. 

72  Double  gear.  92 

73  Screw  on  end  of  double  gear. 

75  Intermediate  gears.  93 

76  Stud  for  intermediate  gears.  94 

77  Nut  for  stud.  95 

78  Back  bearing  cover.  96 

79  Ball  race  for  back  bearing.  97 

80  T\-inch  steel  rolls.  98 

81  Cone  for  ball  race. 

82  Pinion  gear  on  end  of  armature  shaft.  99 

83  Armature  shaft.  100 

84  T5?-inch  hexagon  nut  on  armature  shaft.       101 


Spring  on  ball  race  cone. 

T\-inch  cap  screw  on  back  bearing  cover. 

Carbon  brush  with  pig  tail. 

X-inch  roundhead  screwT  on  gearhousing. 

Collar  to  take  the  place  of  drive  lever  in 

drill. 
Connector  for  joining  motor  with  power. 

(Not  shown.) 
Rheostat. 

Brass  connecting  post, 
^j-inch  pipe  plugs  on  gear  housing. 
f5^-inch  stud  bolt  on  armature  shaft. 
Insulating  bushings  in  frame  for  leads. 
Round  head  screw  for  fastening  lead  to 

body. 

Oil  drain  plug. 

Thumb  screw  for  cover  over  commutator. 
T5?-inch  cap  screws  on  front  bearing  yoke. 


100  American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 

Drilling  Machines 

Directions  for  Operating  Motor  Drill,  Type  22  M 

The  directions  already  given  on  page  96  for  operating  the  type  22 
double  twin  drill,  apply  equally  well  to  the  operation  of  type  22  M  motor  drill, 
since  the  drilling  machines  are  the  same  in  each.  The  rear  end  of  this 
machine  should  be  supported  by  blocks.  After  the  machine  has  been  placed 
in  position  on  the  rail,  the  motor  is  started  by  fastening  the  connector  92 
(page  99),  which  is  attached  to  the  trolley  wire  by  means  of  a  flexible  wire 
and  light  pole,  to  the  brass  connecting  post  94.  The  motor  is  grounded 
through  the  drill  frame  to  the  rail. 

Motor  Use  a  two  (2)  ampere  fuse  in  motor  circuit  at  all  times.  This  should 
be  placed  on  the  trolley  pole.  Never  start  the  motor  under  full  load. 
Use  the  starting  rheostat  93  in  starting  motor.  Keep  all  parts  of  motor  wiring, 
and  especially  the  commutator,  clean  and  dry.  Examine  the  brushes  frequently 
to  see  that  they  make  good  contact  with  commutator.  Keep  the  drill  points 
sharp  and  well  lubricated  with  lard  oil.  The  motor  is  built  for  500-600  volts, 
is  series  wound  and  is  amply  large  for  the  work  required  under  normal  condi- 
tions. The  motor  operates  at  variable  speed,  depending  on  load,  the  speed 
decreasing  with  increasing  load.  It  should  not  be  required  to  work  steadily 
at  very  low  voltages  or  under  extremely  heavy  overloads. 

Parts  ior  Type  22  M   Double  Twin  Drill 

1  Large  part  of  body  (back).  25     ly^-inch  nut  on  guide  bar  (clamp). 

2  Small  part  of  body  (front).  26    Washer  on  guide  bar  (clamp). 

5  Truss  plate  on  back  part  of  body.  27  Adjusting  screw  on  guide  bar. 

6  Small  yoke  for  feed  screw.  28  Tie  for  guide  bar  (clamp). 

7  Large  yoke  for  feed  screw.  29  Depth  gauge  for  drilling. 

8  Plate  on  large  yoke  (outside  of  brass  nut).  30  Thumb  nut  for  depth  gauge. 

9  Hand  wheel.  34  Handle  and  wrench  for  drive. 

11  Brass  nut  on  feed  screw.  35  Single  gear  spindle. 

12  Feed  screw.  36  Double  gear  spindle. 

13  Feed  ratchet  gear.  37  Intermediate  gear. 

14  Collar  on  feed  screw.  38  Intermediate  gear  staggered  teeth. 

15  Cam  for  feed  pawls  on  feed  screw.  39  Ratchet  driving  gear. 

16  T5B-inch  plunger  for  cam  in  truss  plate.  40  Shaft  for  drive  gears. 

17  Spring  for  plunger  in  truss  plate.  41  Adjusting  nuts  on  spindle. 

18  Feed  pawls.  42  Clamps  (dogs)  for  holding  drills. 

19  Spring  for  feed  pawl.  43  X~mcn  headless  set  screws. 

20  T5g-inch  headless  set  screw  in  pawls.  44  Ball  race  in  truss  plate. 

21  Brass  friction  in  feed  pawls.  45  Truss  block  for  feed  screw. 

22  Guide  and  clamping  bar  for  machine.  46  ^-inch  balls. 

23  Loose  jaw  on  guide  bar  (clamp).  48  Oil  hole  cover  (front  body). 

24  1-inch  nut  on  guide  bar  (clamp).  49  Oil  hole  cover  (back  body). 


Rail    Bonds    and    . V  p p  I  i:m <•«<>* 


Drilling   Machines 

(See  page  98) 


Motor  Drill,  Type  22  M— Continued 

(Motor  parts  shown  on  page  99) 


50  Oil  hole  cover  (back  body).  63 

51  Collar  on  driving  shaft.  64 

52  Friction    spring    on    adjusting    nut    on 

spindles.  102 

53  Woodruff  key  for  guide  bars.  103 

54  j^-inch  cap  screw  in  truss  plate.  104 
56     Spring  for  driving  pawls.  105 
58    y3^-inch  pins  for  collar  on  feed  screw.  106 
62     ^-inch  cap  screws  for  small  and  large  107 

part   of   body  truss  plate  and  tie  on  108 

guide  bars.  109 


^5-inch  cap  screw  for  small  yoke. 
T5g-inch  Fil.  screws  for   plate   on  large 
yoke  outside  brass  nut  for  feed  screw. 
Handle  stud. 

Wheel  bracket  (right  hand). 
Wheels. 
Wheel  stud. 
Nut  for  wheel  stud. 
Wheel  bracket  (left  hand). 
Clamping  bracket, 
^-inch  cap  screws  for  clamping  bracket. 


102 


Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Drilling  Machines 


Motor   Driven   Drill,  No.  24  M 


The  four-spindle  motor  drill  shown  above  is  one  designed  especially  for 
third  rail  lines,  and  similar  places  where  a  very  short  and  compact  machine  is 
required.  It  bores  at  one  time  all  four  holes  in  the  head  of  a  rail  for  our  stan- 
dard twin  terminal  bond.  Two  men  can  easily  handle  this  machine  and  drill 
holes  for  fifteen  or  more  joints  per  hour.  This  reduces  the  cost  of  installing 
the  twin  terminal  bonds  to  an  extremely  low  figure.  The  motor  built  specially 
for  this  drill  is  light  and  compact  and  will  operate  directly  on  a  600-volt  trolley 
circuit.  The  internal  windings  are  thoroughly  protected  and  insulated, 
and  the  armature  shaft  is  geared  direct  to. the  drill  spindles.  The  machine  can 
be  carried  about  by  using  the  wrench  as  a  handle  and  hooking  it  into  the 
motor  frame.  Approximate  total  weight,  185  pounds. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


103 


Drilling   Machines 

(See  pages  94  and  104) 


List  of  Parts  for  Type  24  M   (and  Type  2O  M)   Motor 


1  Body. 

2  Back  bearing  support. 

3  Gear  housing. 

4  Cover  over  front  of  motor. 

5  Front  bearing  support. 

6  Brace  over  cover. 

7  Armature  shaft. 

8  Bushing  on  armature  shaft. 

9  Ball  race  for  front  bearing. 

10  Cone  for  ball  bearing  in  front  bearing. 

11  Spring  on  cone  in  front  bearing. 

12  y^-inch  steel  ball  for  ball  bearings. 

13  Carbon  brush. 

14  Brush  holder. 

15  Spring  in  brush  holder. 

16  Cone  for  ball  bearing  in  back  bearing. 

17  Ball  race  for  back  bearing. 

18  Spring  on  cone  in  back  bearing. 


19  Intermediate  gears. 

20  Double  gear  for  type  20  motor  drill. 
20-A   Double  gear  for  type  24  motor  drill. 

21  Ball  rest  for  truss  in  gear  housing. 

22  Stud  for  intermediate  gears. 

23  J^-inch  hexagon  nut  for  stud. 

24  Cap  screw  for  ball  rest. 

26  ^g-inch  cap  screw  on  body. 

27  Rubber  washer. 

28  Insulating  bushing. 

29  Hexagon  nut. 

30  Brass  connecting  post. 

31  Fiber  ring  for  brush  holder. 

32  ^j-inch  cap  screw  for  bracket  on  drill. 

33  Flat  head  screw  in  body. 

34  Round  head  screw  for  brush  holder. 

35  Connector    for    connecting   power  with 

post  30.     Not  shown. 


104  American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 

Drilling   Machines 

Directions  for  Operating  Type  24  M   Motor  Drill 

Place  clamping  bars  5  over  head  of  rail  and  adjust  vertically  for  drilling 
by  means  of  adjusting  screws  39.  Holes  should  be  high  enough  on  rail  head 
to  heave  at  least  /2  -inch  of  steel  in  lower  edge.  Clamp  machine  to  rail  just 
tight  enough  to  hold  it  securely,  but  not  tight  enough  to  break  the  clamping 
bar,  with  handle  wrench  48  on  clamping  nuts  8.  Machine  should  be  level 
with  track.  Run  drill  points  up  to  rail  by  means  of  crank  handle  13  and  ad- 
just drills  by  means  of  adjusting  nuts  36,  so  that  all  four  drills  will  press 
against  rails.  Keep  all  these  adjusting  nuts  36  well  back  on  spindles  so  as  to 
afford  good  driving  seats  for  twist  drill  shanks. 

Set  depth  gauge  41  to  nearest  index  mark  on  guide  bars  5.  Turn  pawl 
cam  19  to  mesh  feed  pawls  22  with  feed  ratchet  gear  16,  so  that  the  drills  will 
feed  into  rail  automatically.  Connect  up  motor  and  operate,  drilling  holes  in 
rail  to  required  depth,  which  will  be  shown  when  depth  gauge  travels  to  next 
index  mark  on  guide  bars.  Exact  depth  of  holes  is  important. 

Lift  feed  pawls  out  of  mesh  with  feed  ratchet  gear  by  means  of  pawl  cam 
19.  Then  draw  back  drills  from  rail  with  crank  handle  13,  loosen  clamping 
nuts,  remove  machine  from  rail  and  move  to  next  joint. 

To  remove  twist  drills  from  drill  spindles,  loosen  set  screw  34  on  clamp 
dogs,  then  pull  out  of  spindle  end.  Drills  must  be  kept  sharp  and  ground  at 
proper  angles  at  all  times,  else  much  trouble  will  result,  and  the  machine  may 
be  broken.  In  grinding  drills  duplicate  the  exact  shape  of  a  new  drill  point. 
Keep  the  machine  clean  and  free  from  sand. 

The  motor  is  started  by  fastening  the  connector  35  (page  103),  to  the 
brass  connecting  post  30  and  attaching  to  the  trolley  wire  by  means  of  a 
flexible  wire  and  light  pole.  The  motor  is  grounded  through  the  drill  frame 
to  the  rail. 


Motor  Use  a  two  (2)  ampere  fuse  in  motor  circuit  at  all  times.  This  can  be 
placed  on  the  trolley  pole.  Never  start  the  motor  under  full  load. 
Keep  all  parts  of  motor  wiring,  and  especially  the  commutator,  clean  and  dry. 
Examine  the  brushes  frequently  to  see  that  they  make  good  contact  with  com- 
mutator. Keep  the  drill  points  sharp  and  well  lubricated  with  lard  oil,  thus 
avoid  overloading  the  machine.  Keep  all  bearings  well  oiled  with  good 
machine  oil.  The  motor  is  built  for  500-600  volts,  is  series  wound  and  is 
amply  large  for  the  work  required  under  normal  conditions.  The  speed  of  the 
motor  varies  with  and  depends  upon  the  load.  It  should  not  be  required  to 
work  steadily  at  very  low  voltages,  or  under  extremely  heavy  overloads. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


105 


Drilling   Machines 

(See  page  102) 


List    of    Parts  for  Type  24  M    Drill 

(Motor  parts  shown  on  page  103) 


1  Large  part  of  body  (front). 

2  Small  part  of  body  (back). 

3  Truss  plate  on  back  part  of  body. 

4  Yoke  for  feed  screw. 

5  Guide  and  clamping  bar  for  machine. 

6  Loose  jaw  on  guide  bars  (clamp). 

7  Washer  on  guide  bars  (clamp). 

8  ljVmch  nut  on  guide  bars  (clamp). 

9  Key  for  guide  bars. 

10  Yoke  strap  on  guide  bars. 

11  1-inch  nut  on  guide  bars. 

12  Feed  screw. 

13  Crank  handle. 

14  Collar  on  feed  screw. 

15  Pin  in  collar  on  feed  screw. 

16  Feed  ratchet  gear. 

17  Ball  race  in  truss  plate  for  feed  screw. 

18  34-inch  steel  balls. 

19  Cam  for  feed  pawls. 

20  Plunger  in  truss  plate  for  feed  pawls. 

21  Spring  in  truss  plate  for  plunger. 

22  Feed  pawls. 

23  Brass  plunger  for  friction  in  feed  pawls. 

24  Spring  for  feed  pawls. 

25  T5^-inch    headless     set    screw    for    feed 

pawls. 


26  Bevel    gear    for    connecting    drill    with 

motor. 

27  Spur  gear  on  bevel  gear. 

28  Stud  for  spur  and  bevel  gear. 

29  Intermediate  gears. 

30  Drill  spindles  with  gear,  2^  inches  from 

outer  edge  of  thread. 

31  Drill  spindles  with  gear,  33/s  inches  from 

outer  edge  of  thread. 

32  3^-inch  steel  balls. 

33  Ball  race  in  truss  plate. 

34  X'mch  headless  set  screw  for  dogs  on 

spindle. 

35  Clamps  (dogs)  for  holding  drill. 

36  Adjusting  nut  on  drill  spindle. 

37  Friction     spring    on    adjusting   nut    on 

spindle. 
39     Adjusting  screw  on  guide  bars. 

41  Depth  gauge  for  drilling. 

42  Thumb  nut  for  depth  gauge. 

44  ^-inch  cap  screws  on  truss  plate. 

45  Y% -inch  cap  screws  on  bracket. 

46  Bracket  to  support  motor  on  drill. 

47  3^-inch  cap  screw  for  fastening  motor  to 

drill. 

48  Handle  and  wrench  for  machine. 


106 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Drilling  Machines 


Two-spindle  Drill,  Type  ISo.  2O,   for  Soldered  Stud  Bonds 

The  two  drills  shown  on  this  page  have  been  developed  primarily  for  the 
installation  of  type  B.  S.  B.  bonds  on  webs  of  rails,  though  they  can  be  used 
equally  well  for  drilling  holes  in  the  heads  of  rails  for  twin  terminal  bonds. 
These  are  two-spindle  machines,  drilling  two  half-inch  holes  1^-inch  centers 
in  one  operation.  No.  20  is  operated  by  hand,  and  weighs  approximately  80 
pounds.  No.  20  M  is  operated  by  a  600-volt  series  wound  motor  and  weighs 
approximately  105  pounds.  Special  brackets  for  connecting  to  head  of  rail 
will  be  made  for  either  drill,  adapting  either  for  drilling  holes  in  web  or  head  of 
any  style  or  size  of  rail.  The  same  high  class  of  material  and  workmanship  enters 
into  the  construction  of  these  drills  as  in  the  four-spindle  drills  already  described. 


Motor  Drill,    Type    >To.  2O  M 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances  107 

Drilling   Machines 

Directions  for  Operating  Type  2O  and  Type  2O  M   Drills 

Place  clamping  bars  over  head  of  rail  and  adjust  vertically  for  correct 
position  of  holes  in  rail,  as  shown  on  opposite  page.  Clamp  machine  to  rail  tight 
enough  to  hold  it  securely,  but  not  tight  enough  to  break  the  clamping  bar, 
with  handle  wrench  on  clamping  nuts.  Machine  should  be  level  with  track. 
Run  drill  points  up  to  rail  by  means  of  hand  wheel  or  crank  handle  and  adjust 
drills  by  means  of  adjusting  nuts,  so  that  both  drills  will  press  against  rails. 
Keep  all  the  adjusting  nuts  well  back  on  spindles  so  as  to  afford  good  driving 
seats  for  drill  shanks. 

For  twin  terminal  bonds  set  depth  gauge  to  nearest  index  mark  on  guide 
bars  and  turn  pawl  cam  to  mesh  feed  pawls  with  feed  ratchet  gear,  so  that  the 
drills  will  feed  into  rail  automatically.  Place  handle  wrench  on  driving  stud  or 
connect  up  motor  and  operate,  drilling  holes  through  the  rail  web  or  to  required 
depth  in  the  head. 

Lift  feed  pawls  out  of  mesh  with  feed  ratchet  gear  by  means  of  pawl  cam. 
Then  draw  back  drills  from  rail  with  hand  wheel  or  crank  handle,  loosen  clamp- 
ing nuts,  remove  machine  from  rail,  move  to  next  joint,  and  repeat. 

To  remove  twist  drills  from  drill  spindles,  loosen  set  screw  on  clamp  dogs, 
then  pull  out  of  spindle  end.  Drills  must  be  kept  sharp  and  ground  at  proper 
angles  at  all  times,  else  trouble  will  result,  and  the  machine  may  be  broken. 
In  grinding  drills  duplicate  the  exact  shape  of  a  new  drill  point.  Keep  the 
machine  clean  and  free  from  sand. 

The  motor  is  started  by  fastening  the  brass  connecting  post  with  connector, 
which  is  attached  to  the  trolley  wire  by  means  of  a  flexible  wire  and  light  pole. 
The  motor  is  grounded  through  the  drill  frame  to  the  rail. 

Motor  Use  a  two  (2)  ampere  fuse  in  motor  circuit  at  all  times.  This  should 
be  placed  on  the  trolley  pole.  Never  start  the  motor  under  full  load. 
Keep  the  drill  points  sharp  and  well  lubricated  with  lard  oil  and  thus  avoid 
overloading  the  machine.  Keep  all  bearings  well  oiled  with  good  machine  oil. 
The  motor  is  built  for  500-600  volts,  is  series  wound  and  is  amply  large  for  the 
work  required  under  normal  conditions.  Speed  of  motor  varies  with  and 
depends  upon  the  load.  It  should  not  be  required  to  work  steadily  at  very 
low  voltages,  or  under  heavy  overloads. 

See  pages  108  to  111. 


108 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Drilling  Machines 

List  of  Parts  for  Type  2O  Hand  Drill 

(See  page  106) 


1  Large  part  of  body  (back).  29 

2  Small  part  of  body  (front).  30 

3  Truss  plate  on  back  part  of  body.  31 

4  Clamping  frame.  32 

5  Clamp  bar.  34 

6  Loose  jaw  on  clamp  bar. 

7  Loose  washers  on  clamp  bar.  35 

8  lT73-mch  nut  on  clamp  bar. 

9  Key  on  clamp  bar.  36 

10  Guide  rods.  37 

11  Yoke  for  feed  screw.  38 

12  Nuts  on  guide  rods. 

13  Small  yoke  on  feed  screw.  39 

14  Feed  screw.  40 

15  Hand  wheel.  41 

16  Pin  in  hand  wheel. 

17  Collar  on  feed  screw.  42 

18  Pin  in  collar  on  feed  screw.  43 

19  Truss  block  for  feed  screw.  44 

20  Feed  ratchet  gear.  45 

21  Spring  for  plunger  in  truss  plate.  46 

22  Plunger  for  cam  in  truss  plate.  48 

23  Feed  pawls.  50 

24  Cam  for  feed  pawls.  51 

25  Brass  plunger  for  friction  in  feed  pawls.       52 

26  Springs  for  feed  pawls.  53 

27  T5B-inch  headless  set  screw  for  feed  pawls. 

28  Drive  lever  for  driving  machine.  54 


Pawls  for  drive  lever. 
Double  ratchet  driving  gears. 
Single  ratchet  driving  gear. 
Stud  for  drive  lever  (pawl  stud). 
Intermediate    gear  with   the   gears   1|| 

inches  apart. 
Intermediate  gear  with  the  gears  %  inch 

apart. 

Drill  spindle  with  one  gear. 
Drill  spindle  with  two  gears, 
j^-inch  headless  set  screw  for  dogs  on 

spindle. 

Clamp  (dogs)  for  holding  drill. 
Adjusting  nuts  on  spindles. 
Friction    spring    on    adjusting    nuts    on 

spindles. 

^-inch  steel  balls. 
Ball  race. 

Clamping  screw  on  clamp  bar. 
Adjusting  screws  on  clamp  bar. 
Depth  gauge  for  drilling. 
Thumb  nut  for  depth  gauge. 
Dust  shield  on  drive  lever. 
Cap  screw  for  small  yoke  in  truss  plate. 
Cap  screw  for  truss  plate. 
Cap  screw  for  small  and  large  part  of 

body. 
Handle  and  wrench  for  drive. 


List    of    Parts    for    Type    2O  M    Drill 

Lists  of  parts  of  motor  shown  on  page  111 
(See  page  106) 


1  Large  part  of  body  (front).  9 

2  Small  part  of  body  (back).  10 

3  Truss  plate.  11 

4  Yoke  for  feed  screw.  12 

5  Guide  and  clamping  bar  for  machine.  13 

6  Loose  jaw  on  guide  bar  (clamp).  14 

7  Loose  washer  on  guide  bar  (clamp).  15 

8  lyVinch  nut  on  guide  bars  (clamp).  16 


Key  in  guide  bars. 

Yoke  strap  on  guide  bars. 

1-inch  nut  on  guide  bars. 

Feed  screw. 

Feed  ratchet  gear. 

Ball  race  for  feed  screw  in  body. 

T5^-inch  steel  balls. 

Cam  for  feed  pawls. 


(Parts  continued  on  page  110) 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


109 


Drilling  Machines 


Type    20    Hand    Drill 


110 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Drilling   Machines 


Type  2O  M  Drill 


(List  of  parts  contini 

17  Stud  for  reversing  feed. 

18  Crank  handle. 

19  Gear  on  reversing  stud. 

20  Gear  on  feed  screw. 

21  Pin  in  gear  on  feed  screw. 

22  Nut  on  stud  for  reversing  feed. 

23  Washer  on  stud  for  reversing  feed. 

24  Spring  for  plunger  in  body. 

25  Plunger  for  feed  cam  in  body. 

26  Feed  pawls. 

27  Brass     plunger     for    friction     in     feed 

pawls. 

28  Spring  in  feed  pawls. 

29  T5g-inch  headless  set  screw  in  feed  pawls. 

30  Drive  gear. 

31  Bevel  gear  on  drive  gear  stud  to  con- 

nect drill  with  motor. 

33  Intermediate  gears. 

34  Drill  spindle   with   gear   2^  -inch   from 

outer  edge  of  thread. 


:ed  from  page  108) 

35  Drill  spindle    with    gear  3^-inch  from 

outer  edge  of  thread. 

36  3^ -inch  steel  balls. 

37  Ball  race  in  truss  plate. 

38  X'mcn  headless  set  screw  for  dogs  in 

spindle. 

39  Clamps  (dog)  for  holding  drill. 

40  Adjusting  nut  on  drill  spindle. 

41  Friction     spring    on    adjusting    nut    on 

spindle. 

42  Depth  gauge  for  drilling. 

43  Thumb  nut  for  depth  gauge. 
45     Adjusting  screw  on  guide  bars. 

47     ^-inch  bolts  for  fastening  parts  of  drill 
together. 

49  Bracket  to  support  motor  on  drill. 

50  ^s-inch  cap  screw  on  bracket. 

51  ^-inch  cap  screw  for  fastening   motor 

to  body  of  drill. 

52  Handle  and  wrench  for  machine. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


111 


Drilling   Machines 

(See  page  106) 


1  c| 


List  of  Parts  for  Type  2O  M   Motor 


1  -  Body. 

2  -  Back  bearing  support. 

3  Gear  housing. 

4  Cover  over  front  of  motor. 

5  Front  bearing  support. 

6  Brace  over  cover. 

7  Armature  shaft. 

8  Bushing  on  armature  shaft. 

9  Ball  race  for  front  bearing. 

10  Cone  for  ball  bearing  in  front  bearing. 

11  Spring  on  cone  in  front  bearing. 

12  T5^-inch  steel  ball  for  ball  bearings. 

13  Carbon  brush. 

14  Brush  holder. 

15  Spring  in  brush  holder. 

16  Cone  for  ball  bearing  in  back  bearing. 

17  Ball  race  for  back  bearing. 

18  Spring  on  cone  in  back  bearing. 

19  Intermediate  gears. 


20  Double  gear  for  type  20  motor  drill. 
20A  Double      gear     for      type      20      motor 

drill. 

21  Ball  rest  for  truss  in  gear  housing. 

22  Stud  for  intermediate  gears. 

23  ^-inch  hexagon  nut  for  stud. 

24  Cap  screw  for  ball  rest. 

26  ^-inch  cap  screw  on  body. 

27  Rubber  washer. 

28  Insulating  bushing. 

29  Hexagon  nut. 

30  Brass  connecting  post. 

31  Fiber  ring  for  brush  holder. 

32  ^-inch      cap     screw    for    bracket     on 

drill. 

33  Flat  head  screw  in  body. 

34  Round  head  screw  for  brush  holder. 

35  Clamp  for  connecting  power  with  post 

30.     Not  shown. 


112 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Drilling   Machines 


Single    Spindle    Drill    No.   21 

(See  page  114) 

The  large  single  spindle  drills  shown  on  this  and  the  next  page  will  bore 
any  size  hole  up  to  1^  inch,  through  rail  webs  for  any  type  of  single  stud 
terminal  bond.  Like  the  multiple  spindle  drills  already  described,  they  have 
a  double  acting  lever  and  an  automatic  feed.  They  are  adjustable  in  all 
respects  and  are  provided  with  fittings  for  rigid  attachment  to  the  rail,  either 
by  means  of  a  special  splice  bar,  as  shown  in  No.  021,  or  to  the  head  of  the 
rail,  as  shown  in  No.  21.  Being  held  so  rigidly,  the  drill  points  will  pass 
entirely  through  the  rail  without  breaking,  at  the  same  time  boring  a  perfectly 
smooth  and  true  hole.  These  drills  have  many  distinct  advantages  over  other 
track  drills,  as  pointed  out  on  page  94. 

Type  No.  21  can  be  used  on  all  roads  where  traffic  will  permit.  It  has  a 
positive  and  simple  method  of  attachment  to  the  head  of  the  rail.  Approxi- 
mate weight,  85  pounds. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


113 


Drilling   Machines 


No.  021   Drill 

(See  pages  116  and  11?) 


Type  Xo.  021  has  been  developed  specially  for  drilling  rails  on  roads 
where  traffic  cannot  be  interrupted.  The  drill  is  attached  to  a  special  splice 
bar  made  for  each  style  of  rail.  This  special  bar  is  provided  with  a  guide 
along  the  lower  edge  of  its  base  to  which  the  drill  may  be  rigidly  attached, 
and  along  which  it  can  easily  be  moved  and  set  for  each  bond  hole.  The  special 
bar  replaces  one  of  the  regular  plates  and  is  held  in  position  by  two  track 
bolts.  Two  of  these  special  bars  accompany  each  drill,  so  that  as  the  holes 
are  being  drilled  at  one  joint,  the  plates  can  be  changed  at  the  next  joint  by 
another  operator.  This  whole  drilling  outfit  lies  below  the  top  of  the  rails,  thus 
allowing  trains  to  pass  above  it  freely.  This  makes  an  ideal  drill  for  use  by 
electrified  steam  roads,  where  it  is  unsafe  to  attach  any  device  to  the  head 
of  the  rail.  It  cannot  be  used  on  T-rails  under  85  pounds  per  yard  in  size. 

Nos.  21  and  021  drills  can  readily  be  operated  by  two  men  who  should 
drill  from  twelve  to  fifteen  holes  per  hour,  depending  upon  the  rail  and  traffic 
conditions. 

Approximate  weight  of  Xo.  021  drill,  100  pounds,  and  of  the  plate,  40 
pounds. 


114 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Drilling   Machines 

Directions  for  Operating  Type  21    Drill 

Place  clamp  bar  4  over  ball  of  rail  and  clamp  securely,  but  not  enough  to 
break  the  rod,  using  handle  wrench  54  on  clamping  nut  6.  Bring  adjusting 
screw  31  into  contact  with  top  of  rail.  Run  back  drill  spindle  20  by  means  of 
crank  handle  30  to  within  one-eighth  inch  of  brass  bushing  14.  Loosen  clamp 
screws  28  and  adjust  frame  1  so  that  drill  point  will  be  in  required  position  for 
drilling,  and  as  close  to  the  rail  as  possible,  then  tighten  screws  28  firmly.  Turn 
pawl  cam  27  to  mesh  feed  pawls  26  with  feed  ratchet  on  feed  sleeve  8.  Place 
driving  handle  wrench  54  on  driving  lever  9  and  operate  drill. 

Allow  the  feed  of  the  machine  to  drive  the  drill  entirely  through  the  rail.  If 
fed  through  by  hand  after  the  point  has  passed  partly  through,  it  is  liable  to 
leave  a  burr  in  the  hole,  and  injure  the  bond  terminal  when  installed.  Take 
pawls  out  of  mesh  with  feec^  ratchet  by  means  of  pawl  cam  27,  after  hole  is 
drilled.  Draw  drill  spindle  and  drill  back  by  means  of  crank  handle  30. 

Drill  must  be  kept  sharp  and  ground  to  the  proper  angle  at  all  times. 
This  is  very  important.  Oil  on  the  drill  point  is  optional  with  the  customer, 
but  the  life  of  machines  and  drills  is  prolonged,  and  the  machine  works  much 
easier  when  good  lard  oil  is  used.  The  holes  can  be  cleaned  with  gasoline. 


List   of    Parts    for   Type    21    Drill 


1  Frame.  26 

2  Body.  27 

3  Cover  on  body.  28 

4  Clamp  bar.  29 

5  Loose  jaw  on  clamp  bar.  30 

6  Nut  on  clamp  bar.  31 

7  Washer  on  clamp  bar.  32 

8  Feed  sleeve.  33 

9  Driving  lever.  34 

10  Ratchet  driving  gear — 25  teeth.  35 

11  Ratchet  driving  gear — 27  teeth.  36 

12  Gear  sleeve  on  drill  spindle.  38 

13  Adjusting  bar  on  clamp  bar.  39 

14  Brass  bushing  in  front  end  of  frame.  40 

15  Brass  bushing  in  rear  end  of  frame.  41 

16  Feed  screw.  42 

17  Shaft  for  driving  lever  and  gears.  43 

18  Ball  race  on  drill  spindle.  46 

19  Intermediate  gear.  47 

20  Drill  spindle.  49 

21  Collar  on  drill  spindle.  50 

22  Large  nut  on  drill  spindle.  51 

23  Large  washer  on  drill  spindle.  52 

24  Stud  for  driving  pawls.  53 

25  Stud  for  connecting  body  to  frame.  54 


Feed  pawl. 

Cam  for  feed  pawls. 

Clamp  screws  on  frame. 

Catch  pawl  for  feed  ratchet. 

Crank  handle  on  feed  screw. 

Adjusting  screw. 

Driving  pawls. 

Washers  on  rear  end  of  drill  spindle. 

Key  in  drill  spindle. 

Stud  for  catch  pawl. 

Key  in  clamp  bar. 

Small  nut  on  drill  spindle. 

Cap  screw  for  adjusting  bar. 

Key  in  feed  screw. 

Spring  for  catch  pawl. 

Cap  screws  for  body. 

Round  head  screw  for  driving  lever. 

Set  screw  for  clamping  drill  in  spindle. 

Spring  for  driving  pawls. 

Friction  plunger  in  feed  pawl. 

Headless  set  screw  in  feed  pawl. 

Spring  in  feed  pawl. 

^4-inch  steel  balls  (ball  bearing). 

Shield  (gear  cover). 

Driving  handle  and  wrench. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


115 


Drilling   Machines 

(See  page  112) 


Type  21  Drill 


116  American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Drilling   Machines 


Ratchet  Drill  No.   19 

The  above  ratchet  drill  under  some  conditions  can  be  used  to  very  good 
advantage,  and  for  that  reason  we  are  making  the  one  shown  above.  This  drill 
is  of  our  own  make  and  will  do  its  work  well. 


Directions  for  Operating  Type  O21   Single  Spindle   Drill 

Fasten  splice  bar  5  to  rail  with  two  track  bolts  and  place  clamping  bracket 
4  of  machine  over  splice  bar.  Locate  machine  for  drilling  by  letting  drilling 
gauge  drop  in  hole  in  splice  bar.  Then  clamp  machine  to  splice  bar  by  means 
of  screw  7. 

Adjust  drill  point  vertically  by  means  of  screw  56  and  clamp  rear  end  of 
frame  1  to  clamping  bracket  4  by  means  of  lever  51,  making  sure  that  frame 
presses  against  nuts  53. 

Place  wrench  55  on  driving  shaft  18  and  adjust  cam  34  to  place  feed  pawl 
39  into  mesh  with  feed  ratchet  and  sleeve  42,  then  operate  drill. 

When  hole  is  drilled,  take  feed  pawl  out  of  mesh  and  draw  drill  back  out 
of  hole  by  means  of  handle  48. 

Release  clamping  lever  51  and  turn  machine  over  on  clamping  bracket,  to 
drill  hole  for  other  end  of  bond. 

To  clamp  drill  in  holder,  insert  drill  into  holder  11  and  tighten  nut  9. 

To  take  drill  out  of  holder,  place  wrench  on  nut  9  and  12  and  loosen  nut  9. 

Drills  must  be  kept  sharp,  and  ground  at  the  proper  angle  at  all  times. 
Oil  on  drill  points  is  optional  with  customers.  The  life  of  the  machine  and 
drill  is  much  prolonged  when  lard  oil  is  used  and  the  machine  works  much 
easier. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


117 


Drilling   Machines 

(See  page  113) 


52 


List  of  Parts  for  Type  O21   Single  Spindle  Drill 


1  Frame.  29 

2  Gear  case.  30 

3  Cover  on  gear  case.  31 

4  Clamping  bracket.  32 

5  Special  splice  bar.  33 

6  Drilling  gauge.  34 

7  Clamping  screw.  35 

8  Clamping  gibb.  36 

9  Nut  on  drill  holder.  37 

10  Bushing  on  drill  holder.  38 

11  Drill  holder.  39 

12  Large  nut  on  drill  spindle.  40 

13  Large  washer  on  drill  spindle.  41 

14  Set  screw  holder  on  drill  spindle.  42 

15  Set  screw  on  holder.  43 

16  Drill  spindle.  44 

17  Brass  bushing  in  frame.  45 

18  Driving  shaft  in  gear  case.  46 

19  Pin  for  holding  frame  and  gear  case.  47 

20  Dowel  pin  on  frame  and  pawl  pin.  48 

21  Double  gear  in  gear  case.  49 

22  Key  in  drill  spindle  for  double  gear.  50 

23  Spring  in  driving  pawl.  51 

24  Driving  pawls.  52 

25  Key  in  driving  shaft.  53 

26  Stud  for  driving  pawls.  54 

27  Intermediate  gear  in  gear  case.  55 

28  Driving  ratchet  and  gear  (28-tooth  gear).        56 


Driving  ratchet  and  gear  (34-tooth  gear). 

Set  screw  in  pawl  holder. 

Pawl  holder. 

X-inch  pipe  plug. 

Hook  on  gear  case. 

Feed  pawl  cam. 

Take-up  pawl. 

Headless  set  screw  in  feed  pawl. 

Friction  plunger  in  feed  pawl. 

Spring  in  feed  pawl. 

Feed  pawl. 

Spring  in  take-up  pawl. 

Stud  for  take-up  pawl. 

Feed  ratchet  and  sleeve. 

^g-inch  steel  ball  in  feed  sleeve. 

Ball  race  on  drill  spindle. 

Key  on  feed  screw. 

Feed  nut  in  frame. 

Feed  screw. 

Handle  on  feed  screw. 

Small  washer  on  drill  spindle. 

Small  nut  on  drill  spindle. 

Clamping  lever  on  frame. 

Bolt  on  clamping  nut. 

Nuts  on  clamping  brackets. 

Cap  screw  on  gear  case  cover. 

Wrench  for  machine. 

Adjusting  set  screw,  for  drilling. 


118 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Drilling   Machines 


Motor  Drill,  Type  21  M 

(Duntley  Track  Drill) 

The  above  cut  represents  the  most  recent  type  of  heavy  duty  single  spindle 
motor  drill.  It  is  mounted  in  a  special  frame  and  forms  the  most  complete  and 
convenient  motor  track  drill  on  the  market.  The  side  spindle  feature  of  the 
drill  permits  drilling  close  to  the  ties  without  the  use  of  an  angle  gear,  and  the 
vertical  screw  adjustment  affords  ready  means  of  locating  the  holes  vertically 
on  ordinary  T-  or  deep  girder  rails.  The  horizontal  rods  are  of  seamless 
drawn  tubing  and  the  bearing  surface  of  the  drill  frame  on  the  rods  is  very 
long,  insuring  true,  straight  holes  so  essential  for  efficient  bonding.  A  screw 
and  band  wheel  feed  is  provided  in  the  combination  with  means  for  quickly 
removing  the  drilling  tool  for  sharpening  or  renewal.  Weight  of  track  drilling 
frame  complete  with  electric  drill,  150  pounds. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances  119 

Drilling   Machines 

Directions  for  Operating  Type  21  M   Drill 

Place  machine  over  the  rails  with  the  ears  on  the  under  part  of  yoke,  1 
resting  on  the  outside  of  rail.  If  on  a  steep  grade,  clamp  frame  to  rails  with 
cam  31. 

To  adjust  for  drilling,  turn  hand  wheel  6  on  bracket  7  to  raise  or  lower  the 
drill  until  the  right  position  has  been  found. 

Bring  drill  point  up  to  rail  and  put  end  of  feed  screw  27  into  thrust  yoke 
23  and  put  pin  u  B  "  in  to  hold  screw.  Now  adjust  yoke  26  and  drop  pins  "  C  ' 
through  holes  in  yoke  and  guide  rods. 

Start  motor  by  means  of  switch  button  "A." 

When  hole  is  drilled,  take  pins  "  B  "  and  "  C  "  out  and  bring  back  yoke  26, 
then  pull  machine  back  by  means  of  handle  24. 

Drills  must  be  kept  sharp  and  ground  at  the  proper  angles  at  all  times. 
Oil  on  drill  points  is  optional  with  customers.  The  life  of  machine  and  drill  is 
much  prolonged  when  lard  oil  is  used.  The  holes  can  be  cleaned  with  gasoline. 
Special  high  speed  drills  should  be  used  in  this  machine.  See  page  1-40. 

Motor  Use  a  two  (2)  ampere  fuse  in  motor  circuit  at  all  times.  This  should 
be  placed  on  the  trolley  pole.  Never  start  the  motor  under  full  load. 
Keep  the  drill  points  sharp  and  well  lubricated  with  lard  oil  and  thus  avoid 
overloading  the  machine.  Keep  all  bearings  well  oiled  with  good  machine  oil. 
The  motor  is  built  for  500-600  volts,  is  series  wound  and  is  amply  large  for  the 
work  required  under  normal  conditions.  It  should  not  be  required  to  work 
steadily  at  very  low  voltages,  or  under  heavy  overloads. 

List  of  Parts  for  Type  21  M   Motor  Drill 

1  Yoke  on  guide  rods  on  front  of  machine.  16  Knurled  nut  on  drill  spindle. 

2  Guide  rods.  17  Sleeve  in  drill  spindle. 

3  Slide  bracket  on  guide  bar  (right  hand).  18  Cover  on  bearing  casting. 
3-L  Slide  bracket  on  guide  bar  (left  hand).  19  Bearing  casting. 

4  Motor  frame.  20  Brush  holder.     • 

5  Yoke  on  motor  frame  for  adjusting.  21  Spring  for  brushes. 

6  Adjusting  wheel  on  yoke.  22  Carbon  brushes. 

7  Adjusting  bracket  on  motor  frame.  23  Thruss  yoke. 

8  Gear  housing  on  motor  frame.  24  Handle  on  bearing  casting. 

9  Cover  between  gear  housing  and  frame.  25  Feed  nut. 

10  Armature  shaft,  pinion  and  commutator.  26  Yoke  for  feed  nut. 

11  Intermediate  gears  in  housing.  27  Feed  screw. 

12  Gear  on  drill  spindle.  28  Hand  wheel  on  feed  screw. 

13  Sleeve  outside  of  drill  spindle.  29  Yoke    on    guide    rods    on    rear    end   of 

14  Drill  spindle.  machine. 

15  High    speed    drill   with    No.    3    Morse  30  Lead  wires  for  motor. 

shank.  31     Cam  for  clamping  frame  to  rail  not  shown. 


120 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Compressors 

In  these  screw  compressors,  the  old  style  outer  screw  has  been  replaced 
by  a  cylindrical  sleeve  2,  which  in  one  position  is  free  to  slide  in  or  out  of  the 
frame  with  a  single  thrust  or  pull  of  the  operator.  Turning  this  sleeve  through 
a  quarter  revolution  brings  two  shoulders  to  press  against  the  compressor  frame, 

and  these  take  all  the 
thrust  of  the  inner 
screw  ram.  This 
construction  is  sim- 
ilar to  the  breech 
block  of  a  modern 
cannon.  The  speed 
with  which  it  can  be 
operated  gives  to  this 
tool  a  distinct  advan- 
tage over  the  large 
outer  screw  of  the 
older  style  compres- 
sors. This  mecha- 
nism also  permits 
the  use  of  a  short 
stiff  well  constructed 

screw  ram,  and  brings  the  wrench  close  to  the  frame  of  the  tool  and  near  to  the 
rail.     These  features  add  to  the  life  and  effectiveness  of  the  tool. 

To  bring  the  head  or  crown  of  the  terminal  against  the  web  of  the  rail,  a 
steel  collar  5,  backed  by  a  strong  compression  spring  7,  is  placed  around 
and  projects  beyond  the  ram  toward  the  web  of  the  rail.  When  the  breech  block 
is  thrown  forward  and  the  ram  is  screwed  in,  the  collar  which  surrounds  the 
projecting  end  of  the  terminal  stud  will  be  pressed  against  the  web  of  the  rail 
with  great  force  by  the  compression  spring,  thereby  drawing  the  head  of  the 
terminal  into  place  against  the  other  side  of  the  rail. 

The  diameter  of  the  collar  5  is  slightly  greater  than  the  diameter  of  the 
hole  in  the  rail.  As  the  terminal  stud  expands  and  forms  the  button  in 
front  of  the  ram,  the  flow  of  the  copper  over  the  rail  surface  is  restricted  to  the 
diameter  of  the  collar,  so  that  the  metal  of  the  stud  is  kept  directly  in  front  of 
the  ram,  where  it  should  be  in  order  to  produce  a  very  intense  contact  pressure. 
The  frame  is  of  high  grade  cast  steel  and  it  is  compact,  strong  and  durable, 
and  the  compressor  produces  uniformly  good  results.  The  strength  of  each 
frame  is  ample  to  sustain  the  load  for  compressing  1  inch  diameter  terminals, 
or  less,  with  a  good  margin  of  safety. 

We  make  five  styles  of  screw  compressors,  which  differ  only  in  form  and 
size  of  frame. 


No.  4O-48  Screw  Compressor 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


121 


Compressors 

Hand  Screw  Compressors 


Number  of  Compressor 

Approximate 
Weight,   Pounds 

Style  and  Size  of  Rail 

40 

67 

T-  rails  up  to  5  X  inches 

42 

80 

T-rails  under  7  inches 

44 

105 

Girder  rails  under  7  inches 

46 

140 

Girder  rails  up  to  9  inches 

48 

165 

Girder  rails  9  inches  and  over 

A.  B.  X  W.  CO 

PAT?B-!E-DB 
I-B-D7. 


List  of  Parts  for  Type  4O-48  Screw  Compressor 


1  Body  casting. 

2  Breech  block  sleeve. 

3  Screw  ram. 

4  Screw  in  body. 


5  Collar  on  screw  ram. 

6  y^-inch  pin  in  screw  ram. 

7  Spring  on  screw  ram. 

8  Wrench  for  machine. 


122 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Compressors 


Type  61  Hydraulic  Screw  Compressor 


The  screw  hydraulic  compres- 
sor, shown  above,  is  built  upon  en- 
tirely new  principles.  It  is  extremely 
strong  and  durable,  rapid  in  action 
and  contains  no  valves  or  intricate 
parts  to  get  out  of  order.  It  has 
a  capacity  of  35  tons,  which  pres- 
sure exerted  on  a  terminal  stud  will 
produce  lasting  and  effective  results, 
as  explained  on  page  15. 
Weight,  115  pounds. 


Directions  for  Operating  Type  61 
Screw  Hydraulic  Compressor 

Run  the  piston  screw  3  up  until 
the  outer  sleeve  5  is  at  the  top  of  the 

threaded  sleeve  2.  Then  run  screw  24  clear  back  and  draw  out  the  steel  breech 
block  sleeve  23  as  far  as  necessary  to  place  the  compressor  over  the  ball  of  the  rail. 
By  means  of  adjusting  screws  26  adjust  the  machine  vertically  to  allow  the 
collar  20  to  pass  over  the  projecting  end  of  the  bond  terminal,  and  then  return 
sleeve  23  to  its  proper  place  and  turn  shoulders  against  the  stops  provided. 
Tighten  the  screw  ram  24  very  solid  against  rail  over  terminal  with  wrench 
27.  Make  sure  that  the  oil  chamber  is  properly  filled  with  machine  oil.  By 
turning  the  outer  sleeve  5  by  hand,  the  piston  should  be  felt  to  strike  the  oil  when 
the  outer  sleeve  is  half  an  inch  down  on  the  threaded  brass  sleeve  2. 

By  means  of  wrench  29,  run  the  piston  screw  3  down  to  the  bottom  or 
shoulder  of  the  threaded  sleeve  2.  The  terminal  of  the  bond  will  then  have 
been  fully  and  effectively  compressed.  Now  run  the  piston  screw  back  to  the 
top  of  the  threaded  sleeve  2,  and  the  screwT  ram  24  back  to  its  original  place. 
Draw  back  the  sleeve  23,  lift  compressor  from  the  rail,  and  all  is  ready  for  the 
next  terminal. 

Bond  terminals  should  be  straight,  smooth  and  clean.  No  bond  terminal 
or  bond  hole  should  vary  enough  in  diameter  to  require  more  than  one  com- 
pression. Our  bond  terminals  are  within  .005  inch  of  specified  size,  and  our 
No.  21  drilling  machines  will  drill  holes  within  this  same  limit. 

These  standard  machines  have  ample  factors  of  safety  in  all  cases  when 
the  bond  terminals  and  the  holes  they  are  in  tented  to  fit  are  of  correct  size. 
A  machine  with  extra  heavy  frame  will  be  furnished  at  slightly  increased  cost 
for  extra  special  compression  work. 


Kail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


123 


Compressors 


ZO  21     ZZ 


List  of  Parts  for  Type  61   Screw  Hydraulic  Compressor 


1  Body  or  frame.  16 

2  Threaded  brass  sleeve.  17 

3  Piston  screw.  18 

4  T5ff-inch    headless    cap    screw    for    outer  19 

sleeve. 

5  Outer  sleeve.  20 

6  ^-inch  pin  in  piston  screw  and  on  small  21 

piston.  22 

7  Leather  packing  for  cup  in  oil  chamber.  23 

8  Steel  cup  for  oil  chamber.  24 

9  Small  piston.  25 

11  Handles  on  body.  26 

12  Leather  cup    packing    on  end   of  small  27 

piston.  28 

13  Packing  screw  on  end  of  small  piston.  29 

14  Leather  cup  packing  on  large  piston.  30 

15  Brass  nut  on  large  piston. 


Large  compressor  piston. 
Leather  washer  on  large  piston. 
Brass  washer  on  large  piston. 

round    head    screw    on 


large 


piston. 
Collar  on  screw  ram. 


n  screw  ram. 


-nc     pn 
Spring  on  screw  ram. 
Breech  block  sleeve. 
Screw  ram. 
Adjusting  gauge. 
Adjusting  screw. 
Wrench  for  sleeve  screw. 
Spanner  wrench  for  nut  on  large  piston. 
Wrench  handle. 
J^-inch  headless  set  screw  in  body. 


124 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Compressors 


O63    and    O64    Screw    Hydraulic    Compressors 

The  screw  hydraulic  compressor  shown  above  is  a  special  and  heavier 
form  of  No.  61  compressor  already  described  on  preceding  page,  and  is  made  for 
use  on  large  rail  sections.  The  No.  063  compressor,  which  weighs  160 
pounds  complete,  will  work  on  all  girder  and  high  T-rails  under  seven  inches 
in  height,  while  No.  064  compressor,  weighing  180  pounds,  is  intended  for  all 
rails  equal  to  and  over  seven  inches  in  height.  These  machines  are  operated 
just  the  same  as  No.  61  compressor,  directions  for  which  have  already  been 
given. 

List  of  Parts  for  Type  O63  and  O64  Compressor 


1  Body.  22 

2  Threaded  brass  sleeve.  23 

3  Piston  screw.  24 

4  Outer  sleeve.  25 

5  T5g-inch  headless  set  screw  in  outer  sleeve.  26 

6  %-inch  pin  in  piston  screw  and  on  small  27 

piston.  28 

7  Small  piston.  29 

8  Leather  packing  for  oil  chamber  cup.  30 

9  Oil  cup  for  oil  chamber.  31 

10  Cup  packing  for  end  of  small  piston.  32 

11  Packing  screw  in  end  of  small  piston.  33 

12  Large  compressor  piston.  35 

13  Brass  nut  on  large  piston.  36 

14  Leather  cup  packing  on  large  piston.  37 

15  Brass  washer  on  large  piston.  38 

16  Leather  washer  on  large  piston.  39 

17  X  -inch  round  head  screw  on  large  piston.  40 

18  Cup  on  sleeve  screws  42 

19  Sleeve  screw.  45 

20  X'mcn  Pm  m  sleeve  screw.  46 

21  Spring  on  sleeve  screw.  47 


Steel  sleeve. 

^-inch  headless  set  screw  in  body. 

Lever  for  adjusting  shoe. 

Pawl  for  locking  shoe. 

Link  for  connecting  pawl  with  handle. 

Handle  for  releasing  pawl. 

Cotter  pin  for  pins  in  pawl  on  handle. 

Pins  for  pawl  on  handle. 

Spring  in  lever. 

Adjusting  shoe. 

Plunger  in  shoe. 

Spring  for  plunger  in  shoe. 

Nut  for  stud. 

Chain  for  connecting  lever  with  body. 

Hook  for  chain. 

Plate  on  body  over  shoe. 

Plunger  in  plate. 

Spring  for  plunger  in  plate. 

Handles  on  body. 

Wrench  handle  for  piston  screw. 

Spanner  wrench  for  nut  on  large  piston. 

Wrench  for  screw  in  steel  sleeve. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


125 


Compressors 


126 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Compressors 


Screw  Hydraulic    Compressor   No.  68 

This  represents  a  very  compact  and  light  but  powerful  and  effective  form 
of  screw  hydraulic  compressor  for  installing  type  U.  S.-B.  rail  bonds  (see  page 
92)  in  the  flange  of  T-rails.  It  is  a  companion  tool  to  the  hydraulic  punch 
No.  66,  shown  on  succeeding  page.  All  metal  parts  are  of  steel  and  well 
constructed.  Weight,  60  pounds. 


Directions    for   Operating    Type    68    Screw    Hydraulic   Compressor 

Run  the  piston  screw  4  up  until  the  outer  sleeve  3  is  at  the  top  of  the  threaded 
sleeve  2.  Turn  back  screw  ram  5  far  enough  to  pass  over  bond  terminal 
projecting  through  rail  base.  Place  compressor  on  rail,  bring  point  of  ram  5 
over  center  of  terminal  and  place  hook  21  over  ball  of  rail.  Set  lever  16  by 
means  of  adjusting  screw  20,  so  that  when  handle  of  lever  is  drawn  upward  the 
terminal  head  will  be  drawn  up  against  base  of  rail.  Run  ram  5  solid  against 
bond  terminal  by  means  of  rod  25.  Make  sure  that  oil  chamber  is  properly 
filled  with  oil.  By  means  of  wrench  24,  now  run  the  piston  screw  4  down  as 
far  as  it  will  go,  or  until  the  outer  sleeve  3  contacts  with  bottom  of  threaded 
sleeve  2.  The  bond  terminal  will  then  be  fully  and  effectively  compressed. 

Run  the  piston  screw  back  to  the  top  of  the  threaded  sleeve  2,  and  the 
ram  5  back  to  its  original  place,  move  compressor  to  next  terminal  and  repeat. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


127 


Compressors 


List  of  Parts  for  Type  68  Screw   Hydraulic_Compressor 

(Patents  pending) 


1  Body.  12 

2  Brass  threaded  sleeve.  13 

3  Outer  sleeve.  14 

4  Piston  screw.  15 

5  Screw  ram.  16 

6  Large  compressor  piston.  18 

7  Small  piston.  19 

8  Steel  cup  for  oil  chamber.  20 

9  Leather  packing  for  cup  in  oil  chamber.       21 

10  ^-inch    pin    in    piston    screw    and    on       23 

small  piston.  24 

11  Leather  cup  packing    on  end  of   small       25 

piston.  26 


Packing  screw  in  end  of  small  piston. 

Brass  nut  on  end  of  large  piston. 

Leather  cup  packing  for  large  piston. 

J^-inch  pipe  plug  in  body. 

Lever  for  forcing  rail  on  head  of  bond. 

Plunger  in  lever. 

Spring  for  plunger  in  lever. 

Adjusting  screw  on  lever. 

Hook  for  holding  machine  to  rail. 

Headless  set  screw  in  outer  sleeve. 

Wrench  handle. 

Rod  for  large  screw  in  body. 

Handle  on  body. 


128  American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Compressors 


Hydraulic    Punch    ISo.   66 


This  is  a  very  effective  and  highly  developed  machine  for  punching  one 
inch  holes  or  smaller  through  the  flange  of  T-rails  for  type  U.  S.-B.  rail  bonds. 
It  is  a  companion  tool  to  the  screw  hydraulic  compressor  No.  68,  described  on 
preceding  page.  It  is  provided  with  a  pump  having  two  pistons,  one  of  large 
diameter  for  filling  the  power  cylinder  quickly,  and  one  of  small  diameter  for 
applying  the  working  pressure.  The  pump  and  power  piston  are  above  the 
rail,  bringing  a  minimum  amount  of  metal  below  the  rail.  A  knuckle  joint 
between  the  die  and  the  plunger  ram  permits  the  die  to  readily  adjust  itself  to 
any  irregularities  in  the  rail  section.  The  frame  is  made  of  high  grade  cast 
steel  and  is  strong  and  durable.  Weight  of  machine  complete,  200  pounds. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances  129 

Compressors 

Directions  for  Operating  Type  66   Hydraulic  Punch 

Place  machine  on  rail  with  edge  of  flange  resting  against  guide  strap  56, 
and  lower  the  slide  48  over  head  of  rail.  Release  all  the  valves  by  forcing 
down  operating  levers  4  and  5  against  ears  on  body  of  pump.  Make  sure 
that  pump  is  properly  filled  with  clean  oil,  which  should  reach  within  ^  inch 
of  the  top  of  pump.  Insert  lever  59  in  operating  lever  5  and  work  large  piston 
until  punch  54  and  die  53  are  tight  on  the  rail.  Insert  lever  59  in  operating 
lever  4  and  work  small  piston  until  hole  is  punched  in  rail. 

Release  valves  and  insert  end  of  lever  59  in  slot  of  slide  48,  and  by  pry- 
ing under  ball  of  rail  force  back  punch  54  from  hole  in  rail,  then  pull  slide 
up  and  remove  machine  from  rail.  To  carry  this  punch,  insert  lever  59  in 
opening  back  of  39,  and  use  lever  as  handle  or  use  small  handle  41. 

CAUTION— Make  sure  that  punching  or  slug  is  removed  f  rom  the  die  53,  after 
each  hole  is  punched.  Keep  all  inner  working  parts  clean  and  nicely  adjusted. 

List  of  Parts  for  Type  66   Hydraulic  Punch 

(Diagram  of  punch  shown  on  page  128) 

1  Body  of  punch.  29  Leather    cup    packing    in    end    of    low 

2  Body  of  pump.  pressure  piston. 

3  Cover  on  pump.  30  Nut  in  end  of  low  pressure  piston. 

4  Operating  lever  for  high  pressure  piston.  31  Valve  stem. 

5  Operating  lever  for  low  pressure  piston.  32  Valve  chamber  for  low  pressure  piston. 

6  Piston  and  releasing  lever  for  high  pres-  33  Leather  washer  for  valve  chamber. 

sure  piston.  34    Spring  for  valve  in  valve  chamber. 

7  Piston  and  releasing  lever  for  low  pres-        35    Nut  on  valve  chamber. 

sure  piston.  36    Cup  packing  on  end  of  pump. 

8  Leather  washers  on  operating  lever.  37    Nut  for  packing  on  end  of  pump. 

9  Threaded  washer,  right  hand  thread.  39     Bolt  for  fastening  pump  and  punch. 

10  Threaded  washer,  left  hand  thread.  40  Washer  for   bolt    fastening   pump    and 

11  Screw  and  pin  for  releasing  levers.  punch. 

12  High  pressure  piston.  41  Handle  for  machine. 

13  Rod  in  high  pressure  piston.  42  Leather  cup   packing  on    end   of    large 

14  Valve  stem  in  high  pressure  piston.  piston. 

15  Stuffing  nut  in  valve  chamber.  43  Brass  nut  on  end  of  large  piston. 

16  Leather  washer  for  stuffing  nut.  44  Large  compression  piston. 

17  Cup  packing  for  stuffing  nut.  45  Headless    set  screw  in    body  for    large 

18  Spring  for  valve  in  high  pressure  piston.  piston. 

19  Plug  on  end  of  high  pressure  piston.  46  Spring  in  body  for  plunger  for  slide. 

20  Valve  chamber  for  high  pressure  piston.  47  Plunger  for  slide. 

21  Valve  in  valve  chamber.  48  Slide. 

22  Spring  for  valve  in  valve  chamber.  49  Plate  for  slide. 

23  Leather  washer  on  valve  chamber.  52  Connecting  link. 

24  Nut  in  end  of  valve  chamber.  53  Die. 

25  Low  pressure  piston.  54  Punch. 

26  Rod  in  low  pressure  piston.  55  Screw  for  punch. 

27  Valve  stem  in  low  pressure  piston.  56  Guide  strap. 

28  Spring  for  valve  in  low  pressure  piston.  59  Lever  for  pump. 


130 


American    Steel    and  \V^ire    Company 


Compressors 


Type    66    Hydraulic    Punch 

(See  preceding  page) 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


131 


Tools    for   Soldering 


Material  Needed  for  Soldered  Bonds 


Clamp  No.  84  for  all  Types  o 

Clamps  The  operation 
of  the  clamps 
for  holding  soldered  bonds 
in  position  while  soldering 
is  a  detail  of  considerable 
importance.  The  effec- 
tiveness and  economy  of 
our  clamps  are  unequalled. 
They  are  very  simple, 
strong  and  durable,  and 
can  be  manipulated  easily 
to  locate  and  hold  the  bond 
securely  while  soldering. 


Soldered  Bonds 


Clamp  No.  85  for  Form    1   Soldered  Bonds 


132 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Tools    for   Soldering 


Hand-power  Grinder  No.  SO 


Hand-power   Grinding  Machine      The   frame   of    the    hand-power    grinding 

machine  is  made  of  cast  steel.  All  wear- 
ing parts  are  machined  accurately  to  size.  The  shaft  is  our  special  design, 
made  of  the  highest  grade  of  tempered  spring  steel  and  is  very  flexible.  This 
machine,  though  light  and  easily  handled,  will  endure  very  rough  usage. 


Portable  Electric  Grinder      We      illus- 
trate   here 

a  very  convenient  outfit  for  grinding  rail 
surfaces  when  electric  power  is  available. 
A  small  six  hundred  volt  D.  C.  motor  with 
rheostat  and  switch  attached  to  the 
handle  has  the  emery  wheel  mounted 
directly  on  the  armature  shaft,  as  shown. 
Total  weight,  30  pounds ;  speed,  2400 
revolutions  per  minute.  A  two-ampere 
fuse  should  be  placed  in  the  motor 
circuit. 


Portable  Electric    Grinder   No.   SI 
(Diintley) 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


133 


List  of  Parts  for  No.   8O   Hand-power  Grinder 


1  Frame. 

2  Bearing  for  driving  shaft. 

3  Bearing  for  high  speed  shaft. 

4  Handles. 

5  Pipe  legs. 

8  Collar  on  driving  shaft. 

9  Set  screws  in  collar  on  driving  shaft. 

10  Driving  shaft. 

11  Crank  handle. 

13  Keys  for  gears. 

14  Large  gear. 

15  Pinion  gear. 

16  Balance  wheel. 

17  Nut  on  high  speed  shaft. 

18  Collar  for  emery  wheel  on  high  speed 

shaft. 

19  Grinding  rest. 

20  Thumb  nut. 


2L  Bolt  for  grinding  rest. 

22  Set  screw  in  balance  wheel. 

23  Set  screw  in  sleeve  on  flexible  shaft. 

24  Sleeve  on  flexible  shaft. 

25  Outer  spring  for  flexible  shaft. 

26  Inner  spring  for  flexible  shaft. 

27  Sleeve  on  spindle  end  of  flexible  shaft. 

28  Sleeve  for  emery  wheel  spindle  on  flex- 

ible shaft. 

29  Collar  for  emery  wheel  on  spindle. 

30  Nut  on  wheel  spindle. 

31  Emery  wheel  spindle. 

32  Catch  for  flexible  shaft. 

33  Washer  on  catch  for  flexible  shaft. 

34  Cap  screw  on  catch  for  flexible  shaft. 

35  High  speed  shaft  on  machine. 

36  Emery  wheel. 


134 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Tools    for   Soldering 


Double  Burner  Brazier  No.  S3  for 
Soldered   Bonds 


Braziers  The  brazier  is  a  most  potent 
factor  in  the  cost  of  install- 
ing soldered  bonds.  Our  type  has  two 
adjustable  burners,  which  consume  all  of 
the  generating  gases  and  produce  an  in- 
tense flame,  which  is  regulated  by  needle 
valves  in  each  burner,  or  by  a  single  globe 
valve  in  the  swinging  arm.  By  means  of 
a  pipe  wrench,  the  burners  are  placed  in 
the  position  most  advantageous  for  any 
given  type  of  bond.  The  tank  holds 
enough  fuel  to  last  more  than  half  a  clay, 
and  is  equipped  with  a  very  efficient  air 
pump,  the  handle  of  which  serves  for 
carrying  the  tank.  All  parts  of  this  brazier 
are  simple  in  design,  strong  and  durable. 


List  of  Parts  for  Type  83   Double  Burner  Brazier 


1  Gasoline  tank.  22 

2  Pump  handle  and  rod.  23 

3  Pump  rod  guide.  24 

4  Leather  washer  for  pump  rod  guide. 

5  Brass  plug  in  cup  in  top  of  tank.  25 

6  Brass  cup  on  top  of  tank.  26 

7  Leather  washer  in  cup  on  top  of  tank. 

8  Pump  tubing.  27 

9  Large  steel  washer  on  pump  rod.  28 

10  Leather  cup  packing  for  pump. 

11  Small  steel  washer  on  pump  rod.  29 

12  X"mcn   hexagon  nut    on  end  of  pump       30 

rod.  31 

13  Air  valve  seat.  32 

14  Leather  plug  in  air  valve. 

15  Air  valve  in  pump  chamber.  33 

16  Spring  in  air  valve.  34 

17  Leather  washer  for  brass  plug  in  lower       35 

end  of  tank.  36 

18  Brass  plug  in  lower  end  of  tank.  37 

19  Brass  elbow  union.  38 

20  Union  nut.  39 

21  Brass  nipple  in  union. 


Air  valve  chamber  in  pump. 

Elbow  pipe. 

^•8 -inch  x  l^j-inch  nipple  between  valve 

and  lower  elbow, 
^-inch  globe  valve. 
^ -inch  pipe  between  globe  valve  on 

tee  pipe. 
Tee  pipe. 
^8-inch  x  3^-inch  pipe  nipple  between 

tee  and  elbow. 
Hook  for  holding  pipes  up. 
Burner. 

Shield  on  burner, 
^-inch  round  head  screw  for  shield  on 

burner. 

Needle  valve  seat  nut  on  burner. 
Stuffing  nut  on  burner. 
Needle  valve  stem. 

-j5g-inch  x  1^-inch  set  screw  on  burner. 
y5g-inch  x  ^-inch  set  screw  on  burner. 
x  j^-inch  set  screw  on  burner. 
x  3-inch    pipe    between     elbow 

and  burner. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


135 


Tools    for   Soldering 

Directions  for  Operating  Type  83   Double  Burner  Brazier 

To  start  the  torch,  remove  brass  plug  5,  and  pour  a  good  grade  of  clean 
gasoline  into  tank,  leaving  2-inch  top  space  for  air.  Pump  air  into  tank  by 
means  of  pump  handle  2.  Quite  high  pressure  required  for  best  results. 

Lower  burners  30  from  tank,  letting  them  rest  on  rail  or  a  stone.  Open 
globe  valve  25  and  needle  valves  35,  and  light  escaping  gasoline,  regulating 
valves  35,  so  that  not  too  much  gasoline  escapes.  When  burners  get  heated 
and  give  out  blue  flame,  they  will  be  ready  for  work. 

Burners  30  should  be  turned  or  adjusted  so  that  flame  will  strike  squarely 
on  surface  to  be  heated.  Adjust  screws  36  so  as  to  bring  hottest  portion  of 
flame  against  rail  surface.  When  through  brazing,  close  valves  35  and  globe 
valve  25  and  let  air  out  of  tank  by  means  of  brass  plug  5. 


Brazier  Torch  Type  83 


136  American    Steel    and   Wire    Company 

Rail   Bond   Testers 

Directions   for  Using  A.  S.  &  W.  Rail    Bond  Tester 

(See  page  41) 

Place  the  two-point  contact  bar  1  across  the  rail  joint,  bringing  the 
contact  points  4  into  contact  with  the  inner  or  bright  edge  of  rail  head. 
Ordinarily  these  points  should  be  12  inches  apart  for  correct  readings,  though 
they  may  be  spaced  nearer  together  for  short  bonds.  A  very  slight  pressure 
on  the  hand  lever  12  will  be  sufficient  to  make  positive  contacts  with  the  rail 
provided  the  points  are  kept  sharp. 

The  single-point  contact  bar  22  carrying  the  tape-line  27  should  be  placed 
on  the  rail,  either  to  the  right  or  to  the  left  of  the  joint,  according  to  direction 
it  is  intended  to  work,  and  if  let  fall  an  inch  or  so  on  top  of  the  rail,  the 
contact  will  be  good.  Connect  the  single-point  contact  bar  28  with  instru- 
ment binding  post  marked  R  (rail),  and  hook  tape  line  on  nearest  end  of  two- 
point  contact  bar.  Always  connect  the  two  contact  points  above  the  rail  joint 
to  the  instrument  so  that  the  center  instrument  binding  post  marked  C  will  be 
connected  with  the  central  or  common  contact  point  on  the  rail,  or  the  one 
nearest  to  the  single-point  contact  bar. 

By  means  of  the  shoulder-strap  30  suspend  the  instrument  in  a  horizontal 
position,  so  that  on  open  circuit  the  needle  rests  on  zero.  The  millivoltmeter 
is  differentially  wound,  and  the  right-hand  scale  measures  the  potential  drop 
across  the  joint.  In  this  circuit  is  placed  an  open  circuit  (O.  C.)  switch,  and 
a  multiplier  of  10,  marked  250,  which  should  be  used  in  every  case  where  there 
is  liable  to  be  a  sharp  deflection. 

Handle  the  instrument  carefully  on  account  of  its  delicate  construction. 
The  needle  is  adjustable  to  zero  by  screw  on  box  cover.  When  everything  is 
in  readiness,  as  above  outlined,  and  when  there  is  sufficient  direct  current 
flowing  through  the  rail  for  a  readable  deflection,  move  the  single-point  contact 
bar  out  on  the  uncut  rail  until  zero  deflection  is  obtained,  when  the  number  of 
feet  of  rail  equivalent  in  resistance  to  the  joint  is  read  off  the  tape-line  direct. 

List  of  Parts  for  A.  S.  &  W.   Rail   Bond  Tester 

1  Contact  bar.  18  Spring  holder 

2  Right  hand  contact  post.  19  Spring  for  tape. 

3  Left  hand  contact  post.  20  Stud  for  adjusting  spring. 

4  Contact  screws.  21  Headless  set  screw  on  stud  for  adjusting 

5  Clamping  screws  on  contact  posts.  spring 

(5     Binding  screws  on  contact  posts.  22     Wood  handle  for  holder 

A     4  jUi!      g  ""T8'  *•  28     Round-head  wood  screw  in  tape  holder. 

8  Washers  on  adjusting  screws.  ,..„.      1A 

9  Collar  on  adjusting  screws.  ^     Millivoltmeter. 

10  Pin  in  collar  on  adjusting  screws.  25  Leads  for  connecting  millivoltmeter  with 

11  Adjusting  bar.  co^ '  bar s 

12  Hand  lever.  *"  Round- head  screws  for  cover  on  tape 

13  Stud  on  adjusting  bar.  holder. 

14  Cotter  pin  for  stud  on  adjusting  bar.  27  Tape. 

15  Tape  holder.  28  Contact  screw  on  tape  holder. 

16  Cover  for  tape  holder.  29  Leather  strap. 

17  Cover  on  spring  holder.  30  Leather  strap. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


137 


Rail   Bond   Testers 


138  American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 

Rail   Bond   Testers 

(See  pages  41  and  42) 
Directions  for  Setting  Up  and  Using  Crown  Rail  Bond  Tester 

This  testing  apparatus  has  recently  been  simplified  and  greatly  improved. 
To  set  up  this  apparatus,  turn  the  short  horizontal  contact  bar  27  at  right 
angles  to  the  handle  and  fasten  in  this  position  with  the  thumb  nut  6.  Close 
the  small  battery  switch  on  the  side  of  the  testing  box.  This  switch  should  be 
kept  open  at  all  times,  except  when  the  instrument  is  not  in  use,  otherwise 
when  the  contact  points  23  rest  on  any  conducting  substance,  the  battery  in 
the  testing  box  will  run  down.  Adjust  the  telephone  receiver  16  to  the  ear  by 
means  of  the  head  piece  and  connect  the  receiver  to  the  two  binding  posts  15 
on  the  testing  box.  The  apparatus  is  now  ready  for  te.sting. 

Place  the  contact  bar  carrying  the  four  contact  points  across  the  rail  joint 
to  be  tested  so  as  to  bring  the  joint  midway  between  the  two  central  contact 
points.  If  the  two  outer  points  make  good  contact  with  the  rail  a  certain 
definite  tone  will  be  produced  in  the  receiver.  This  tone,  called  the  first  tone, 
will  be  nearly  constant  in  intensity  for  all  conditions  of  rail  joints  except  tho^e 
which  are  entirely  open.  By  pressing  the  spring  contact  point  down  on  the 
rail  with  the  foot,  a  second  tone,  usually  differing  from  the  first,  will  be  pro- 
duced. When  this  second  tone  is  equal  to  the  first  in  intensity,  the  resistance  of 
the  joint  will  be  equal  to  that  of  approximately  6  feet  oflQ-pound  rail,  or  0.00009 
ohm.  When  the  second  tone  is  less  intense  than  the  first  tone  the  resistance 
of  the  joint  will  be  less  than  (5  feet  of  70-pound  rail  and  the  softer  the  switch 
tone  the  better  the  condition  of  the  joint.  If,  however,  the  second  tone  is  more 
intense  than  the  first  tone  the  resistance  of  the  joint  is  greater  than  that  of  0 
feet  of  70-pound  rail,  and  the  louder  the  second  tone  with  respect  to  the  first, 
the  greater  the  resistance  of  the  joint.  Joints  which  give  no  first  tone  at  all  but 
an  extremely  loud  second  tone,  may  be  considered  as  open  circuited.  If  no 
second  tone  can  be  obtained  differing  from  the  first  tone,  then  one  of  the  two 
inner  contact  points  probably  does  not  contact  with  the  rail.  If  both  first  and 
second  tones  are  extremely  faint,  or  if  they  are  intermittent,  the  battery  is 
running  very  weak  and  it  should  be  replaced  by  a  new  battery. 

Keep  the  four  contact  points  sharp  and  maintain  a  good,  clean  and  tight 
electrical  connection  between  the  contact  points  and  the  wires.  Do  not  burn 
out  the  instrument  on  an  open  and  arcing  rail  joint.  The  longer  the  contact 
bar  is  allowed  to  remain  on  each  joint  the  quicker  the  battery  will  run  down, 
because  they  are  short  circuited  through  the  rail  joints.  A  little  practice  will 
soon  enable  one  to  determine  the  condition  of  a  joint  very  quickly. 

List  of  Parts  for  Crown  Rail  Bond  Tester 

1  Handle.  15  Binding  post  for  receiver  cords. 

4  Bolts  on  handle  and  hinge  joints.  16  Telephone  receiver. 

5  Hinge  on  handle.  17  Telephone  receiver  cords. 
8  Plate  for  hinge  joint.  21  Dry  cells  in  testing  box. 

10  Plate  oh  connecting  bar.-  25     Head  piece  for  receiver. 

11  Contact  screw  holder.  26     Short  bar  for  contact  points. 

12  Contact  screw  points.  27     Connecting  bar. 


Kail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


139 


Rail   Bond   Testers 


A.  B.  &  W.  CD. 
PAT.  APPLIED  FDR 


Crown    Rail    Bond    Tester 


140 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Hand   Tools 


Portable    Drill    Grinder   No.    16    (Clark  I 

We  again  call  attention  to  the  importance  of  keeping  drill  points  very 
sharp  and  properly  shaped.  This  cannot  be  emphasized  too  strongly.  A  dull 
or  poorly  sharpened  drill  point  greatly  increases  the  amount  of  power  required  for 
operating  the  machine.  It  may,  in  fact,  require  enough  to  break  the  machine, 
and  will  always  lead  to  enlarged  or  roughened  holes.  We  show,  on  these  two 
pages,  a  light  portable  hand  drill  grinder,  which  every  railway  company  should 
possess,  so  that  their  men  can  sharpen  the  drills  while  they  are  working  on  the 
track.  This  machine  can  be  readily  attached  to  any  support,  and  operated 
by  hand.  In  sharpening  points,  give  them  exactly  the  same  angles,  and  make 
them  look  exactly  like  new  drill  points,  then  they  will  cut  smoothly  and  easily. 


6-inch    Blacksmith's    Drill 


One-half    Inch    Twist    Drill   No.    12 

The  above  ^-inch  twist  drill  is  used  on  all  of  our  multiple  spindle  drilling 
machines  for  twin  terminal  and  type  B.  S.  B.  rail  bonds.  It  has  a  specially  formed 
shank  designed  for  the  spindles  of  these  machines. 

The  standard  blacksmith's  drill  shown  above  is  used  in  all  of  our  single 
spindle  machines.  The  drill  is  approximately  6  inches  long  over  all,  and  can 
be  used  in  varying  diameters  up  to  1  ^  inches.  Its  shank  is  f4-inch  in  diameter 
by  2  inches  long.  Made  special  for  drill  21  M. 

These  drills  are  kept  in  stock  for  immediate  shipment,  at  reasonable  prices. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


141 


Hand   Tools 


List  of  Parts  for  Hand   Drill  Grinder  No.   16 


1  Back  casting.  12 

2  Front  casting.  13 

3  Front  bearing  casting.  14 

4  Wheel  cover.  15 

5  Bolt  for  wheel  cover.  16 

6  Large  drive  gear.  17 

7  Pinion  on  intermediate  shaft.  18 

8  Large  gear  on  intermediate  shaft.  19 

9  Pinion  on  wheel  shaft.  20 

10  Intermediate  shaft.  21 

11  Wheel  shaft.  22 


Collar  on  wheel  shaft. 

Emery  wheel. 

Drill  holder. 

Set  screw  on  back  casting. 

Stand. 

Collar  on  driving  stud. 

Set  screw  for  collar  on  driving  stud. 

Driving  stud. 

Crank  handle. 

T-bolt  on  stand. 

Clamping  nut  on  T-bolt. 


142 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Hand   Tools 


Tap  Style  of  Groove  Cutter  No.    16,  for  Form  C 
Twin  Terminal  Bond 


Hand  Groove  Cutter  No.    14 


The  two  styles  of  groove  cutters  shown  above  are  used  in  cutting  threads 
or  a  groove  in  the  wall  of  the  hole  drilled  in  steel  for  twin  terminal  bonds,  as 
described  on  page  53.  No.  16  cutter  should  always  be  used  in  connection 
with  form  C  twin  terminal  bonds,  while  No.  14  gives  best  results  with  forms  A 
and  B  bonds. 


Hail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


143 


Hand  Tools 


Blunting  Punch  No.    11 


The  punch  No.  11  is  used  to  dull  the  outer  edge  of  the  holes  to  prevent 
scarfing  the  copper  terminal  studs  as  they  are  inserted  in  the  holes. 


Expanding  Hammer  No.    1O 


The  three-pound  hammer  No.  10  has  a  long  flexible  handle  and  is  espe- 
cially suited  for  installing  twin  terminal  bonds. 


144  American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Hand   Tools 


Driver  for   Form   C  Twin  Terminal   Bond   No. 


The  special  punch  or  set  No.  17  is  used  when  installing  form  C  twin  ter- 
minal bonds,  which  are  placed  on  Weber  joints.  The  horizontal  angle  of  this 
style  of  joint  prevents  the  direct  driving  of  the  terminal  studs. 


Steel  Taper  Punch  No.    12 

(See  table  I,  page  17) 


This  No.  12  punch  should  always  be  used  in  the  installation  of  tubular  ter- 
minal bonds,  as  explained  on  page  15.  It  is  made  of  a  high  grade  steel. 
and  given  a  special  temper.  Made  in  different  sizes  for  different  sized  terminals. 


Part    IV 

Page 

Notes    on    Electricity          .....     146 
Electric  Railway  Material       .         .         .          .163 

Engineering    Data 176 

Index 189 

We  are  extensive  manufacturers  of  iron,  steel 
and  copper  wire  of  every  description — round,  fiat, 
square,  triangular  and  odd  shape — for  mechanical 
and  electrical  purposes.  A  few  of  these  products 
will  be  briefly  catalogued  in  this  section. 

We  make  electrical  wires  and  cables,  both  solid 
and  stranded,  of  any  capacity,  for  all  purposes. 
Insulated  with  paper,  varnished  cambric  or  with  our 
special  Crown  or  Globe,  or  30  per  cent  rubber. 
These  are  lead  encased,  steel  armored  or  protected 
in  any  other  way  required  for  aerial,  underground  or 
submarine  service,  as  used  in  connection  with  incan- 
descent lighting  or  distribution  of  power. 

American  wire  rope,  heavy  cables  and  hawsers ; 
elevator,  tramway,  derrick  ropes  and  extra  flexible 
rope. 

American  Railway  Fences,  for  right  of  way  and 
all  other  service.  Also  fence  gates  and  steel  fence 
posts. 

Inquiries  accompanied  by  specifications  respect- 
fully solicited.  Write  for  catalogues.  Prices  quoted 
on  application. 


146  American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 

Notes  on  Electricity 

SO  far  as  the  practical  electrical  worker  or  engineer  is  concerned,  electri- 
city may  be  considered  as  one  of  the  various  forms  of  energy.  Being 
such,  it  is  never  created,  but  is  always  produced  at  the  expense  of  an 
equal  or  greater  amount  of  energy  in  some  other  form.  Energy  in  the  form  of 
electricity  serves  no  useful  purpose  as  such.  It  must  be  transformed  back  into 
some  useful  form  of  energy  such  as  mechanical,  chemical  or  thermal  before  it 
can  be  utilized.  P^lectrical  energy  must  always  be  used  when  it  is  produced, 
and  produced  when  needed  for  it  cannot  be  stored.  Because  of  the  ease  of 
transforming  it  into  other  useful  forms  of  energy,  and  of  transferring  it  over 
great  distances,  electricity  is  being  utilized  more  and  more  for  commercial 
purposes.  The  ultimate  nature  of  electricity  is  unknown,  though  recent  dis- 
coveries would  indicate  that  matter  itself  is  composed  of  ultimate  particles  or 
charges  of  electricity. 

Electric  Current     This  may   be  defined   as   the  quantity   of   electricity   per 
second  which  passes  through  any  circuit  or  conductor  when 

the  flow  is  uniform.  An  electric  current  is  thought  to  be  transmitted  through 
a  conductor  by  being  handed  on  from  particle  to  particle.  The  electric  cur- 
rent (transformed)  is  that  which  does  work.  It  heats  the  conductor,  furnish- 
ing heat  and  light ;  it  turns  the  motor  armature,  furnishing  mechanical  power. 
It  deposits  the  metal  in  the  electrolytic  cell,  and  it  is  the  source  of  the  lifting 
power  of  the  electro  magnet.  Current  is  measured  by  ammeters,  instruments 
through  which  all  of  the  current  passes. 

A  current  which  continues  flowing  in  the  same  direction  no  matter  how 
its  strength  may  vary,  is  called  a  continuous  current,  or  sometimes  a  direct 
current  (I).  C.).  If  the  strength  of  such  a  current  is  constant,  it  is  called  an 
unvarying  current ;  if  its  strength  is  not  constant,  it  is  a  varying  continuous 
current.  A  regular  varying  continuous  current  is  called  a  pulsatory  current. 
A  current  which  alternately  flows  in  opposite  directions,  no  matter  how  its 
strength  may  vary,  is  called  an  alternating  current  (A.  C.).  This  may  be 
periodic  or  non-periodic.  The  continuous  or  direct  current  is  generally  used 
where  small  amounts  of  power  are  involved,  as  in  telephone  and  telegraph  and 
bell  circuits,  also  in  cases  where  large  amounts  of  power  are  to  be  transmitted 
through  comparatively  short  distances,  as  in  the  lighting  of  a  large  building  or 
operation  of  a  small  railway  system.  When  electric  energy  in  quantity  is  to  be 
transferred  over  long  distances  or  distributed  over  wide  areas,  alternating 
currents  are  used  to  reduce  the  cost  of  the  necessary  copper. 

The  practical  unit  of  current  is  the  ampere.  The  value  of  an  ampere  is  equal 
to  one-tenth  of  unit  current  in  the  C.  G.  S.  system  of  electro-magnetic  units, 
and  is  represented  with  sufficient  accuracy  for  practical  purposes  by  the 
unvarying  current,  which,  when  passed  through  a  solution  of  nitrate  of  silver 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances  147 

Notes  on  Electricity 

in  water,  in  accordance  with  certain  specifications,  deposits  silver  at  the  rate  of 
0.001118  of  a  gramme  per  second.  It  is  that  current  which  will  flow  in  a  cir- 
cuit having  a  resistance  of  one  ohm  and  a  voltage  pressure  of  one  volt. 

Voltage  The  direct  cause  of  a  flow  of  current  is  a  propelling  or  driving 
force  in  the  circuit  called  an  electromotive  force  (e.  m.  f.)  or  a 
difference  of  potential  or  voltage  difference.  This  may  be  compared  to  a  flow  of 
water  through  a  pipe  line  connecting  two  reservoirs.  As  long  as  both  reservoirs 
remain  at  the  same  level  (or  potential)  there  will  be  no  flow ;  when  one  is 
raised  above  the  other  a  pressure  or  head  will  be  established  (similar  to  a 
difference  of  potential,  or  e.  m.  f.  in  a  circuit)  which  will  cause  a  flow. 
It  is  the  primary  function  of  all  electrical  generators  to  produce  this  e.  m.  f. 
Thus  the  two  unconnected  poles  of  a  battery  or  dynamo  in  operation,  are 
at  different  potentials,  they  are  charged  with  opposite  kinds  of  electricity, 
positive  and  negative,  and  this  e.  m.  f.  will  cause  a  current  to  flow  when  the 
poles  are  connected  by  a  conductor.  If  this  connecting  conductor  be  opened 
at  any  point,  the  full  voltage  of  the  generator  will  be  found  at  the  separated 
points,  the  region  between  them  will  be  under  electric  stress,  and  the  electronic 
transfer  will  cease. 

The  practical  unit  of  e.  m.  f.  is  called  a  volt.  A  volt  is  such  electromotive 
force  as  w7ould  cause  a  current  of  one  ampere  to  flow  against  a  resistance  of 
one  ohm.  Volts  are  measured  by  voltmeters,  through  which  a  very  small 
portion  of  current,  or  none,  passes. 

Circuit  The  complete  path  through  which  a  current  flows  is  called  a  circuit. 
There  must  always  be  at  least  three  parts  to  any  circuit,  an  electric 
generator,  a  receiving  device  in  which  the  electric  energy  is  transferred  into 
useful  energy,  such  as  a  motor  or  electric  lights,  or  both,  and  two  conductors, 
the  feeder  and  the  return,  which  connect  the  generator  with  the  receiver. 
Under  certain  unfavorable  conditions  the  conductors  may  become  the  receiver, 
in  which  case  all  the  electric  energy  will  be  dissipated  as  heat.  In  D.  C. 
railway  circuits  the  overhead  feeder  system  is  usually  connected  with  the  posi- 
tive dynamo  brush,  and  the  grounded  track  return  is  connected  with  the  nega- 
tive brush.  If  the  rails  are  poorly  bonded  or  heavily  loaded,  the  current  wall 
divide  and  some  of  it  will  return  or  be  shunted  through  the  earth  or  through 
parallel  pipe  lines  and  the  earth  to  the  generator. 

In  commercial  work  only  three  of  the  pure  metals  are  used  as  conduc- 
tors— copper,  aluminum  and  iron.  Of  these  the  first  is  pre-eminently  the 
best,  while  next  in  order  come  aluminum  and  iron.  The  last  is  used 
almost  exclusively  for  telegraph  work  and  for  the  return  portion  of  railway 
circuits. 


148  American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 

Notes  011  Electricity 

A  circuit  is  said  to  be  grounded  when  any  metallic  portion  is  connected  to 
ground.  The  grounded  portion  will  be  at  zero  potential,  or  at  the  potential  of 
the  earth.  If  but  one  point  of  a  circuit  is  grounded,  no  current  will  flow  into 
ground,  but  if  two  or  more  points  are  grounded,  some  current  will  escape  into 
ground,  for  the  ground  between  such  points  then  becomes  a  "  parallel  "  or  shunt 
circuit,  and  the  current  will  divide  between  the  two  paths.  If  no  part  of  a  circuit 
is  grounded,  it  is  said  to  be  insulated.  Conductors  may  be  insulated  (a)  by  sup- 
porting them  on  insulators  or  substances  which  conduct  little  or  no  electricity, 
or  (b)  by  covering  them  throughout  their  length  with  some  form  of  insulation  or 
dielectric  material  which  will  not  conduct  electricity. 

The  conducting  power  of  any  substance  of  unit  dimensions  is  called  its 
conductivity.  The  commercial  standard  of  conductivity  in  this  country  is  the 
one  established  by  Dr.  Matthiesen  in  1861.  It  is  that  of  a  piece  of  sup- 
posedly pure  copper  wire  of  constant  cross-section  meeting  the  following  speci- 
fications :  * 

Specific  gravity,  8.89. 
Length,  1  meter,  or  39.3704  inches. 
Weight,  1  gram,  or  15.432  grains. 
Resistance,  0.141729  ohm  at  0°  C. 

Specific  resistance,  1.594  microhms  per  cubic  centimeter,  or 
0.6276  microhm  per  cubic  inch  at  0°  C. 

Much  of  the  copper  now  produced  is  higher  in  conductivity  than  Dr. 
Matthiesen 's  standard  by  one  or  two  per  cent,  owing  to  improved  methods  of 
refining  copper.  It  is  usual,  however,  to  specify  that  soft  drawn  copper  shall 
have  98  per  cent  conductivity,  and  hard  drawn  copper  97  per  cent  of 
Matthiesen's  standard. 

The  diameter  of  a  conductor  is  usually  expressed  in  mils.  A  circular  mil. 
is  very  generally  taken  as  the  unit  of  area  in  considering  the  cross-section  or 
carrying  capacity  of  electrical  conductors.  This  is  the  area  of  a  circle  whose 
diameter  is  one  mil,  or  one-thousandth  of  an  inch.  It  equals  .7854  of  a  square 
mil.  This  unit  area  possesses  several  advantages  in  making  wiring  calculations 
and  in  determining  the  relations  between  different  wires  having  known  diameters. 
The  cross-section  of  any  solid  round  wire  in  circular  mils  is  found  by  squaring 
the  diameter  of  the  wire  in  mils,  and  conversely,  the  diameter  of  a  wire  in  mils 
is  obtained  by  extracting  the  square  root  of  the  section  expressed  in  circular 
mils.  The  constant  TT,  which  expresses  the  ratio  between  the  circumference 
and  diameter  of  any  circle,  does  not  enter  into  these  calculations,  thus  greatly 
simplifying  them. 

Circular  mils  =  square  inches  -r  .0000007854  =  (diameter  in  mils)2 

Square  inches  =  circular  mils  X  .0000007854 

One  circular  mil  =  .0005067087  square  millimeter 

One  square  millimeter  =  1,973  circular  mils 

There  are  1,273,236  circular  mils  in  one  square  inch 

*  This  and  much  of  the  following  is  taken  from  our  "  Electrical  Wires  and  Cables  "  Catalogue  and  Handbook. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


149 


Notes  on  Electricity 

Wire    Gauges 

The  sizes  of  wires  are  ordinarily  expressed  in  certain  gauge  numbers 
arbitrarily  chosen.  There  are  several  independent  gauge  systems,  and 
it  is  necessary  in  each  case  to  specify  the  particular  wire  gauge  used. 
Though  the  gauge  numbers  have  the  advantage  of  enabling  manufacturers  to 
carry  wires  in  stock  from  which  purchasers  may  choose  with  a  reasonable 
assurance  of  quick  delivery,  there  is  nevertheless  a  tendency  to  do  away  with 
all  gauge  numbering  methods  and  to  distinguish  different  electrical  wires  by 
their  diameters  expressed  in  mils. 

The  American  Standard  or  Brown  &  Sharpe  gauge  is  used  in  America  as 
the  standard  for  copper  wire  used  for  electrical  purposes.  In  this  gauge  both 
the  sizes  and  the  areas  vary  in  geometrical  progression.  The  diameters  of 
wires  are  obtained  from  the  geometric  series,  in  which  the  first  number,  No. 
4/0  =  0.46  inch  in  diameter,  and  No.  36  =  .005  inch,  the  nearest  fourth  sig- 
nificant figure  being  retained  in  the  areas  and  diameters  so  obtained. 

The  American  Steel  and  Wire  Co.'s  gauge  is  used  almost  universally 
in  this  country  for  steel  and  iron  wires,  except  galvanized  telegraph  and  tele- 
phone wire  which  is  always  made  to  the  Birmingham  wire  gauge. 

The  Birmingham  wire  gauge  is  used  largely  in  England  as  their  standard, 
and  in  this  country  for  galvanized  telegraph  and  telephone  wires. 

The  following  table  gives  the  numbers  and  diameters  in  decimal  parts  of 
an  inch  for  the  various  wire  gauges  used  in  this  country  and  England. 

Comparative  Sizes  Wire  Gauges  in  Decimals  of  an  Inch 


8 

^  so 

_  3 
D_tJ 

6  " 

American 
Steel  and  Wire 
Co.'s  Gauge 

American 
Standard 
(B.&.S)Gauge 

E 
& 

1? 

s° 

111 
211 

!§ 
.=1 

TJ^ 
O  ° 

£ 

_  3 
O  ^ 

American 
Steel  and  Wire 
Co.'s  Gauge 

11* 

£ 

Birmingham 
or  Stubs' 

British 
Imperial 
Standard 

|| 
O  ° 

•5 

B 

£ 

OUUUUOO 

.4900 

.500 

18 

.0475 

.04030 

.049 

.048 

.0490 

.238 

OIXJOOO 

.4615 

.58000 

.464 

19 

.0410 

.03589 

.042 

.040 

.0400 

.250 

00000 

.4305 

.51650 

.500 

.432 

20 

.0348 

.03196 

.035 

.036 

.0350 

.263 

0000 

.3938 

.4(5000 

.454 

.400 

4540 

21 

.0317 

.02846 

.032 

.032 

.0315 

.279 

000 

.3625 

.40964 

.425 

.372 

!4250 

22 

.0286 

.02535 

.028 

.028 

.0295 

.290 

00 

.3310 

.36480 

.380 

.348 

.3800 

23 

.0258 

.02257 

.025 

.024 

.0270 

.303 

0 

.3065 

.32486 

.340 

.324 

.3400 

24 

.0230 

.02010 

.022 

.022 

.0250 

316 

1 

.2830 

.28930 

.300 

.300 

.3000 

.033 

25 

.0204 

.01790 

.020 

.020 

.0230 

.331 

2 

.2625 

.25763 

.284 

.276 

.2840 

.040 

26 

.0181 

.01594 

.018 

.018 

.0205 

.342 

3 

.2437 

.22942 

.259 

.252 

.2590 

.050 

27 

.0173 

.01420 

.016 

.0164 

.01875 

.356 

4 

.2253 

.20431 

.238 

.232 

.2380 

.063 

28 

.0162 

.01264 

.014 

.0148 

.01650 

.371 

5 

.2070 

.18194 

.220 

.212 

.2200 

.068 

29 

.0150 

.01126 

.013 

.0136 

.01550 

.383 

6 

.1920 

.16202 

.203 

.192 

.2030 

.083 

30 

.0140 

.01003 

.012 

.0124 

.01375 

.394 

.1770 

.14428 

.180 

.176 

.1800 

.097 

31 

.0132 

.00893 

.010 

.0116 

.01225 

.408 

8 

.1620 

.12849 

.165 

.160 

.1650 

.110 

32 

.0128 

.00795 

.009 

.0108 

.01125 

.419 

9 

.1483 

.11443 

.148 

.144 

.1480 

.120 

33 

.0118 

.00708 

.008 

.0100 

.01025 

.431 

10 

.1350 

.  10189 

.134 

.128 

.1340 

.135 

34 

.0104 

.00630 

.007 

.0092 

.00950 

.448 

11 

.1205 

.09074 

.120 

.116 

.1200 

.149 

35 

.0095 

.00561 

.005 

.0084 

.00900 

.458 

12 

.1055 

.08081 

.109 

.104 

.1090 

.162 

36 

.0090 

.00500 

.004 

.0076 

.00750 

.472 

13 

.0915 

.07196 

.095 

.092 

.0950 

.172 

37 

.0085 

.00445 

.0068 

.00650 

.485 

14 

.0800 

.06408 

.083 

.080 

.0830 

.185 

38 

.0080 

.00396 

.0060 

.00575 

.499 

15 

.0720 

.05706 

.072 

.072 

.0720 

.197 

39 

.0075 

.00353 

.0052 

.00500 

.509 

16 

.0625 

.05082 

.065 

.064 

.0650 

.212 

40 

.0070 

.00314 

.0048 

.00450 

.524 

17 

.0540 

.04525 

.058 

.056 

.0580 

.225 

150  American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 

Notes  on  Electricity 

Resistance  All  substances  offer  a  resistance  to  the  passage  of  an  electric 
current  through  them.  The  resistance  of  a  substance  may  be 
denned  as  that  inherent  physical  property,  depending  on  temperature,  molecular 
construction,  and  dimensions,  which  modifies  the  strength  of  current  flowing 
through  it.  Resistance  bears  a  reciprocal  relation  to  conductivity,  the  greater 
the  one  the  less  the  other. 

The  practical  unit  of  resistance  is  the  international  oJini,  which  is  the 
resistance  offered  to  an  unvarying  electric  current  by  a  column  of  pure  mercury 
at  a  temperature  of  melting  ice,  14.4521  grams  (0.51  ounce)  in  mass,  of  a 
constant  cross-sectional  area,  and  106.3  centimeters  (41.85  inches)  in  length. 
To  obtain  a  concrete  idea  of  this  unit  it  may  be  remembered  that  a  copper 
wire  having  a  diameter  of  one-tenth  of  an  inch  (No.  10  B.  and  S.  gauge)  has  at 
08  degrees  F.  a  resistance  of  approximately  one  ohm  per  thousand  feet,  or  5.28 
ohms  per  mile. 

Resistance  varies  greatly  with  different  metals  and  is  in  general  less  for  a 
pure  metal  than  for  any  of  its  alloys.  Its  value  will  in  every  case  depend  upon 
the  relation  of  three  factors,  the  length  of  the  wire,  its  cross-sectional  area, 
and  the  nature  or  chemical  composition  of  the  metal,  all  of  which  vary  with 
temperature.  Increasing  or  decreasing  the  length  (L)  of  any  conductor  will 
increase  or  decrease  the  resistance  (R)  of  the  conductor  in  direct  proportion. 
Increasing  or  decreasing  its  sectional  area  (A)  will  inversely  affect  its  resistance, 
that  is,  as  the  section  of  the  conductor  increases  the  resistance  becomes  pro- 
portionately less,  and  conversely.  The  term  conductor  as  used  in  this  connec- 
tion should  be  taken  in  its  broadest  sense,  meaning  the  whole  length  of  any 
circuit  or  any  portion  of  a  circuit  under  consideration,  whether  it  be  in  a  straight 
or  curved  line  or  wound  in  a  coil. 

For  example  :  One  mile  of  any  given  wire  will  have  twice  the  resistance 
of  one-half  mile  of  the  same  wire,  or  5.28  times  the  resistance  of  1000  feet. 
Again,  if  we  have  two  wires  of  equal  length,  one  of  which  has  a  sectional  area  five 
times  as  great  as  that  of  the  other,  then,  assuming  uniform  quality  and  treat- 
ment, the  electrical  resistance  of  the  larger  wire  will  be  one-fifth  that  of  the 
smaller,  and  as  the  weight  per  unit  length  varies  directly  as  the  sectional  area, 
it  follows  that  the  resistance  of  a  wire  weighing,  for  example,  500  pounds  per 
mile,  will  equal  one-fifth  the  resistance  of  a  wire  weighing  100  pounds  per  mile, 
assuming  uniform  quality  and  treatment  as  before. 

Algebraically,  these  relations  may  be  expressed  thus : 

R=K  X(L-f-) 

Where  (K)  is  a  constant  for  any  metal  and  represents  its  resistivity  or 
specific  resistance. 

Resistivity,  a  factor  depending  only  on  the  material  or  structure  of  the 
metal,  as  compared  with  pure  copper  as  unity,  may  be  expressed  in  a  number 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


151 


Notes  on  Electricity 

of  different  ways,  all  being  equivalent  to  the  resistance  of  some  unit  of  cross- 
section.  This  unit  may  be  expressed  either  in  linear  dimensions  or  as  a  com- 
bination of  weight  and  dimensions.  It  may  represent  the  resistance  measured 
between  opposite  faces  of  a  unit  cube  of  the  metal.  Or,  another  and  more  com- 
mon way  of  expressing  resistivity  is  in  terms  of  oJuns  per  mil-foot,  meaning 
the  resistance  of  a  round  wire  one  foot  long,  having  a  diameter  of  one  mil  or 
.  001  inch  and  an  area  of  one  circular  mil.  With  this  unit,  the  resistance  of 
any  wire  is  found  by  multiplying  its  length  (L)  by  its  resistivity  (K,  below)  in 
ohms  per  mil-foot  and  dividing  this  product  by  the  section  area  expressed  in 
circular  mils. 

Physical  Properties  of  Copper,  Aluminum,  Iron  and 

Steel  Wire 


Physical  Properties 

Copper 

Aluminum 
99  Per  Cent 
Pure 

Iron 
(Ex.  B.  B.) 

Steel 
(Siemens 
Martin) 

Annealed 

Hard  Drawn 

Conductivity,     Matthiesen's    stan- 
dard                      

99  to  102 
10.36 

96  to  99 
10.57 

61  to  63 
16.7 

16.8 
62.9 

8.7 
119.7 

Ohms  per  mil-foot  at  68°  F.  =  20° 
C.  (K.)   

Ohms  per  mile  at  68°  F.  =  20°  C. 

f     54,600                55,700                 88,200 

332,000 

632,000 

cir.  mils 

1    cir.  mils              cir.  mils              cir.  mils 

cir.  mils 

Pounds  per  mile-ohm  at  68°  F.  = 
20°  C               

875 
.00238 

896              424.0 
.00238                .0022 

4700 
.0028 

8900 

Temperature  coefficient  of  resistiv- 
ity per  degrees  F.  at  32°  F. 

Temperature  coefficient  of  resistiv- 
ity per  degrees  C.  at  0°  C.    .    . 

.00428 

.00428                .0040                    .0050 

Specific  gravity.     Mean  values   .    . 

8.89 

8.94                   2.68                     7.77 

7.85 

Pounds  per  1000  feet  per  circular 

.003027 

.320 
.093 

.003049              .000909                .002652 

.322                    .0967                    .282 
.093                    .214                      .113 

.002671 

.288 
.117 

Weight     in     pounds      per     cubic 

Specific  heat.     Mean  values    .    .    . 

M  citing  point  i 
values  .  . 

Melting  point  i 

i  degrees  F.     Mean 

2012 
1100 
.00000950 

2012 
1100 
.00000950 

1157 
625 

.00001285 

2975 
1685 

.00000673 

2480 
1360 
.00000662 

n  degrees  C.     Mean 

Mean   coefficient  of  linear  expan- 
sion.    Degrees  F  

Mean  coefficie 
sion.     Deg 

nt  of  linear   expan- 
rees  C 

.0000171 

.0000171 

.0000231 

.000120 

.000118 

SOLID  WIRE 
Pounds  per 
square  inch 

Tensile  strength    . 
Elastic  limit   .    .    . 
Modulus    of    elas- 

(        30,000  to 
1        42,000 

i          6,000  to 
1        16,000 

(   7,000,000  to 
1  17,000,000 

45,000  to 
68,000 

25,000  to 
45,000 

13,000,000  to 
18,000,000 

20,000  to 
35,000 

}       14,000    { 

10,500,000  to 
11,500,000 

50,000  to 
55,000 

25,000  to 
30,000 

22,000,000  to 
27,000,000 

100,000  to 
120,000 

50,000  to 
72,000 

22,000,000  to 
27,000,000 

CON- 

Tensile strength    . 

(        29,000  to 
i        37,000 

43,000  to 
65,000 

J       25,800    { 

.     .     . 

98,000  to 
118,000 

CENTRIC 
STRAND 

Elastic  limit  .    .    . 

(         5,800  to 
1        14,800 

23,000  to 
42,000 

}       13,800    { 

45,000  to 
55,000 

Pounds  per 
square  inch 

Modulus    of    elas- 
ticity   

f   5,000,000  to 
\  12,000,000 

12,000,000  to 
14,000,000 

Approx. 
10,000,000 

16,000,000  to 
22,000,000 

152 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Notes  on  Electricity 

Bare    Copper   Wire    Table 

The  data  from  which  these  tables  have  been  computed  are  as  follows : 
Matthiesen's  standard  resistivity,  Matthiesen's  temperature  coefficients,  special 
gravity  of  copper=8.80.  Resistance  in  terms  of  the  international  ohm. 


Diameter  of  Wire 


Cross-sectional  Area 


American 
Standard 
(f5.  &  S  )  Gauge 

In  Inches 

Allowable 
Variation  in 
Per  Cent 
Either  Way 

In 

Millimeters 

Circular  Mils 
(d2) 
d  =  .001  Inch 

Square  Inch 
(d2  x  .7854) 

Square 
Millimeter 

0000 

.4600 

.45 

11.68 

211600. 

.166190 

107.219 

000                      .4096 

.50 

10.40 

167772. 

.131770 

85.011 

00                      .3648 

.50 

9.266 

133079.                .104520 

67.432 

0                      .3250 

.50 

8.255 

105625.               .082958 

53.521 

1 

.2893 

.50 

7.348 

83694. 

.065733 

42.408 

2 

.2576 

.50 

6.543 

66358. 

.052117 

33.624 

3 

.2294 

.75 

5.827 

52624. 

.041331 

26.665 

4 

.2043 

.75 

5.189 

41738. 

.032781 

21.149 

5 

.1819 

.75 

4.620 

33088. 

.025987 

16.766 

6 

.1620 

.75 

4.115 

26244. 

.020612 

13.298 

7 

.1443 

.75                    3.665 

20822. 

.016354 

10.550 

8 

.1285 

1.00                    3.264 

16512. 

.012969 

8.3666 

9 

.1144 

1.00 

2.906 

13087. 

.010279 

6.6313 

10 

.1019 

1.00 

2.588 

10384. 

.0081553 

5.2614 

11 

.0907 

1.00 

2.304 

8226.5 

.0064611 

4.1684 

12 

.0808 

1.25 

2.052 

6528.6 

.0051276 

3.3081 

13 

.0720 

1.25 

1.829 

5184.0 

.0040715 

2.6267 

14 

.0641 

1.25 

1.628 

4108.8 

.0032271 

2.0819 

15 

.0571 

1.25 

1.450 

3260.4 

.0025607 

1.6520 

16 

.0508 

1.50 

1.290 

2580.6 

.0020268 

1.3076 

17 

.0453 

1.50 

1.151 

2052.1 

.0016117 

1.0398 

18 

.0403 

1.50 

1.024 

1624.1              .0012756 

.82294 

19 

.0359 

1.75 

.9119 

1288.8             .0010122 

.65304 

20 

.0320 

1.75 

.8128 

1024.0 

.00080425 

.51887 

21 

.0285 

1.75 

.7239 

812.25 

.00063794 

.41157 

22 

.0253 

1.75 

.6426 

640.09 

.00050273 

.32434 

23 

.0226 

2.00 

.5740 

510.76 

.00040115 

.25880 

24 

.0201 

2.00 

.5105 

404.01 

.00031731 

.20471 

25 

.0179 

2.00 

.4547 

320.41 

.00025165 

.16235 

26 

.0159 

2.00 

.4039 

252.81 

.00019856 

.12810 

27 

.0142 

2.00 

.3607 

201.64 

.00015837 

.10217 

28 

.0126 

2.00 

.3200 

158.76 

.00012469 

.08044 

29 

.0113 

2.00 

.2870 

127.69 

.00010029 

.06470 

80 

.0100 

2.50 

.2540 

100.00 

.000078540 

.05067 

31 

.00893 

3.00 

.2268 

79.74 

.000062631 

.04040 

32 

.00795 

3.00 

.2019 

63.20 

.000049639 

.03202 

33 

.00708 

3.00 

.1798 

50.13 

.000039369 

.02540 

34 

.00630 

3.50 

.1600 

39.69 

.000031173 

.02011 

35 

.00561 

4.00 

.1425 

31.47 

.000024718 

.01594 

36 

.00500 

4.50 

.1270 

25.00 

.000019635 

.01266 

37 

.00445 

5.00 

.1130 

19.80 

.000015553 

.01003 

38 

.00396 

6.00 

.1006 

15.68 

.000012316 

.00794 

39 

.00353 

7.00 

.08966 

12.46 

.0000097868 

.00631 

40 

.00314 

8.00 

.07976 

9.86 

.0000077437 

.00499 

Rail    Roiids    and    Appliances 


153 


Notes  on  Electricity 

Bare    Copper   Wire    Table — Continued 

Giving  dimensions,  weights,  lengths  and  resistances  of  bare  round  solid 
wires,  Matthiesen's  Standard  of  Conductivity.  While  these  values  are  theo- 
retically correct,  slight  variation  should  be  expected  in  practice. 


Pounds  per 

Ohms  per                                                  Feet  per 

American 

Standard 

Ohm  at                 Pound  at 

1000  Feet  at 

1000  Feet  at 

Ohm  at 

(B.  &  S.) 

1000  Feet 

20  C.                     20  C. 

20  C. 

50  C.              Pound 

20  C. 

Gauge 

68  F. 

68  F. 

68  F. 

122  F. 

68  F. 

640.5 

13,090 

.0000764 

.04893 

.05467 

1.561 

20,440 

0000 

508.0 

8,232 

.0001215               .06170              .06893               1.969 

16,210                     000 

402.8 

5,177 

.0001931               .07780              .08692               2.482 

12,850                      00 

319.5 

3,256 

.0003071 

.09811 

.1096                 3.130 

10,190                        0 

253.3 

2,048 

.0004883 

.1237 

.1382 

3.947 

8,083 

1 

200.9 

1,288                             .0007765              .1560 

.1743                 4.977 

6,410                        2 

159.3 

810.0                            .001235                .1967 

.2198                 6.276 

5,084                        3 

126.4 

509.4                            .001963                 .2480 

.2771                 7.914 

4,031                         4 

100.2 

320.4                            .003122 

.3128 

.3495 

9.980 

3,197 

5 

79.46 

201.5                            .004963 

.3944 

.4406 

12.58 

2,535 

6 

68.02 

126.7 

.007892 

.4973 

.5556 

15.87 

2,011 

7 

49.98 

79.69 

.01255 

.6271 

.7007 

20.01 

1,595 

8 

39.63 

50.12                          .01995                  .7908 

.8835 

25.23 

1,265                        9 

31.43 

31.52                          .03173                  .9972 

1.114                 31.82 

1,003                       10 

24.93 

19.82                         .05045                1.257 

1.405                 40.12 

795.3                    11 

19.77 

12.47                         .08022                1.586 

1.771                 50.59 

630.7                    12 

15.68 

7.840                        .1276                   1.999 

2.234                 63.79 

500.1 

13 

12.43 

4.931                        .2028                  2.521                2.817                 80.44             396.6                    14 

9.858 

3.101                        .3225                  3.179                3.552               101.4 

314.5                    15 

7.818 

1.950                        .5128 

4.009                4.479               127.9 

249.4 

16 

6.200 

1.226 

.8153 

5.055 

5.648 

161.3 

197.8 

17 

4.917 

.7713 

1.296 

6.374 

7.122 

203.4 

156.9 

18 

3.899 

.4851 

2.061 

8.038 

8.980              256.5 

124.4 

19 

3.092 

.3051                    3.278 

10.14 

11.32                 323.4 

98.66 

20 

2.452 

.1919                    5.212                   12.78 

14.28                407.8 

78.24 

21 

1.945 

.1207 

8.287                  16.12 

18.01 

514.2 

6205 

22 

1.542 

.07589 

13.18 

20.32 

22.71 

648.4 

49.21 

23 

1.223 

.04773                20.95 

25.63 

28.63 

817.6 

39.02 

24 

.9699 

.03002                33.32 

32.31 

36.10 

1,031 

30.95 

25 

.7692 

.01888                52.97 

40.75 

45.52 

1,300 

24.54 

26 

.6100 

.01187                84.23 

51.38 

57.40 

1,639 

19.46 

27 

.4837 

.007466             133.9 

64.79 

72.39 

2,067 

15.43 

28 

.3836 

.004696             213.0 

81.70 

91.28 

2,607 

12.24 

29 

.3042 

.002953             338.6 

103.0 

115.1 

3,287 

9.707 

30 

.2413 

.001857            538.4 

129.9 

145.1 

4,145 

7.698 

31 

.1913 

.001168            856.2 

161.8 

183.0 

5,227 

6.105 

32 

.1517 

.0007346 

1,361 

206.6 

230.8                6,591 

4.841 

33 

.1203                  .0004620 

2.165 

260.5           i     291.0           j     8,311                      3.839 

34 

.09543                .0002905 

3,441 

328.4                366.9              10,480                      3045 

35 

.07568               .0001827 

5,473 

414.2 

462.7 

13,210 

2.414 

36 

.06001 

.0001149 

8,702 

522.2 

583.5 

16,660 

1.915 

37 

.04759 

.00007210 

13,870 

658.5 

735.7 

21.010 

1.519 

38 

.03774                .00004545 

22,000 

830.4 

927.7 

26,500 

1.204 

39 

.02993                .00002858 

34,980 

1047.0 

1170.0 

33,410 

0.955 

40 

154  American    Steel    and    Wire    Company 

Notes  on  Electricity 

For  telephone  and  telegraph  conductors  it  is  customary  to  use  still  another 
unit  of  resistivity — weight  per  mile-ohm.  This  is  the  weight  of  a  conductor  one 
mile  in  length,  which  has  a  resistance  of  one  ohm.  It  equals  the  product  of 
the  resistance  per  mile  and  the  weight  per  mile.  However  great  may  be  the 
variation  in  weight  of  wires  of  different  sizes,  the  variation  in  resistance  is 
equally  great  inversely,  and  so  the  balance  is  preserved. 

To  illustrate  :  If  the  mile-ohm  be  5,000,  the  resistance  of  a  wire  weighing 
1,000  pounds  per  mile  will  be  5  ohms,  while  a  similar  wire  weighing  5  pounds 
per  mile  will  have  a  resistance  of  1,000  ohms.  This  method  of  expressing 
resistance  is  more  direct  than  the  others,  which  require  interpretation  before 
the  results  may  be  used  in  any  calculation.  Values  for  these  various  units  will 
be  found  tabulated  on  page  151. 

Temperature  Effects  on   Resistance 

Temperature  bears  an  important  part  in  all  tests  and  calculations  of 
electrical  conductors,  for  their  resistances  vary  directly  with  temperature.  The 
resistance  of  copper  wire  increases  about  twenty-three  one-hundredths  and 
that  of  iron  wire  about  twenty-eight  one-hundredths  per  cent  for  each  addi- 
tional degree  F. 

Dr.  Matthiesen,  while  experimenting  with  copper  conductors,  derived  the 
following  formula  for  the  change  of  resistance  with  temperature  in  copper  wire  : 

R=R0  (1+  .00387t+  .000005!)t2) 

Later  experiments  have  shown  that  for  practical  engineering  purposes  all 
terms  below  the  second  may  be  dropped,  and  that  the  above  equation  for  tem- 
perature changes  in  copper  wire  may  now  be  written  : 

R,  =  R0(1  +  .0042t)  for  t  in  degrees  C.  or 
R,  =  R0(1  +  .0023t)  for  t  in  degrees  F. 
Where  R0  =  Resistance  at  0°  C. 

Rt  =  Resistance  at  any  temperature  t". 
The  general  equation  for  any  conductor  is  usually  written : 

Rt=R0(l+^t),  where 

a  is  called  the  temperature  coefficient  of  the  conductor.  These  coefficients  vary 
considerably  with  the  purity  of  metals,  and  they  change  slightly  even  in  the 
purest  metals.  The  following  average  values  of  the  temperature  coefficient 
have  been  found,  experimentally,  at  0"  C. 


Metals 

Centigrade 

Fahrenheit 

Aluminum 

.0040 

.0022 

gar 

.00428 
.0038 

.00238 
.0021 

Mercury 
Platinum 

.0007 
.0025 

.0004 
.0014 

Silver,  annealed 

.0040 

.0022 

Soft  iron 

.0050 

.0028 

Tin 

.0044 

.0025 

Zinc 

.0041 

.0028 

Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


155 


INotes  on  Electricity 

Pounds    per   Mile-ohm  of  Copper  Wire   at  Various  Temperatures 
and   Conductivities 


Per  Cent 

Pounds  per  Mile-ohm 

Per  Cent 

Pounds  per  Mile-ohm 

Conductivity 
Matthiesen's 
Standard 

Conductivity 
Matthiesen's 
Standard 

At  32°  F. 
0°C. 

At  60°  F. 
15.6°  C. 

At  68°  F 
20°  C. 

At  104°  F. 
40°  C. 

At  32°  F. 
0°  C. 

At  60°  F. 
15.  6°  C. 

At  68°  F. 
20°  C. 

At  104°  F. 
40°  C. 

96.0 

841.9 

893.4 

908.7 

980.8 

99.0 

816.4 

866.3 

881.1 

951.0 

.2 

840.2 

891.5 

906.8 

978.7 

.2 

814.8 

864.6 

879.4 

949.1 

.4 

838.4 

889.7 

904.9 

976.7 

.4 

813.1 

862.8 

877.6 

947.2 

.6 

836.7 

887.8 

903.0 

974.7 

.6 

811.5 

861.1 

875.8 

945.3 

.8 

835.0 

886.0 

901.2 

972.7 

.8 

809.9 

859.4 

874.1 

943.4 

97.0 

833.2 

884.2 

899.3 

970.6 

100.0 

808.2 

857.6 

872.3 

941.5 

.2 

831.5 

882.4 

897.4 

968.7 

.2 

806.6 

855.9 

870.6 

939.6 

.4 

829.8 

880.5 

895.6 

966.7 

.4 

805.0 

854.2 

868.8 

937.8 

.6 

828.1 

878.7 

893.8 

964.7 

.6 

803.4 

852.5 

867.1 

935.9 

.8 

826.4 

876.9 

891.9 

962.7 

.8 

801.8 

850.8 

865.4 

934.1 

98.0 

824.7 

875.1 

890.1 

960.7 

101.0 

800.2 

849.2 

863.7 

932.2 

.2 

823.1 

873.4 

888.3 

958.8 

.2 

798.7 

847.5 

862.0 

930.4 

.4 

821.4 

871.6 

886.5 

956.8 

.4 

797.1 

845.8 

860.3 

928.5 

.6 

819.7 

869.8 

884.7 

954.9 

.6 

795.5 

844.1 

858.6 

926.7 

.8 

818.1 

868.1 

882.9 

953.0 

.8 

794.0 

842.5 

856.9 

924.9 

102.0 

792.4 

840.8 

855.2 

923.1 

Data  Relating  to  Bare  Copper  Strand 
Approximate   Values 


Size 
B.  &S. 

| 
Area 
Circular           Strand 
Mils              Square 
Inches 

Number 
Wires  in 
Strand 

Diameter 
Each  Wire 
Inches 

Diameter 
of  Strand 
Inches 

Weight 
per  1000- 
Foot  Strand 
Pounds 

Weight 
per  Mile 
Pounds 

Resistance 
per  1000 
Feet  at 
68°  F.  or 
20°  C. 

2,000,000          1.56874 

91 

.1482 

.6302 

6204.8 

32761. 

.00530 

1,750,000          1.36494 

91 

.1387 

.5257 

5429.3 

28667. 

.00607 

1,500,000          1.17831 

91 

.1284 

.4124 

4653.6 

24571. 

.00707 

1,250,000            .98170 

91 

.1172 

.2892 

3878.0 

20475. 

•00852 

1,000,000            .78494 

61 

.1280 

.1520 

3100.3 

16370. 

.01060 

950,000            .74618 

61 

.1248 

.1232 

2945.3 

15551  . 

.01115 

900,000       .      .70724 

61 

.1215 

.0935 

2790.3 

14733. 

.01179 

850,000            .66852 

61 

.1181 

.0629 

2635.3 

13914. 

.01247 

800,000            .62810 

61 

.1145 

1.0305 

2480.2 

13096. 

.01325 

750,000            .58922 

61 

.1109 

.9981 

2325.2 

12277. 

.01413 

700,000            .54954 

61 

.1071 

.9639 

2170.2 

11459. 

.01514 

650,000            .51020 

61 

.1032 

.9288 

2015.2 

10640. 

.01630 

(500,000            .47146 

61 

.0992 

.8928 

1860.2 

9822. 

.01767 

550,000            .43181 

37 

.1219 

.8533 

1703.0 

8992. 

.01925 

500,000            .39237 

37 

.1162 

.8134 

1548.2 

8175. 

.02116 

450,000            .35234 

37 

.1103 

.7721 

1393.4 

7357. 

.02349 

400,000            .31431 

37 

.1040 

.7280 

1238.5 

6539. 

.02648 

350,000            .27512 

37 

.0973 

.6811 

1083.34 

5720. 

.03026 

300,000     i        .23591 

19 

.1256 

.6285 

926.01 

4889. 

.03531 

250,000            .19635 

19 

.1147 

.5738 

771.67 

4074. 

.04233 

0000 

211,600            .16609 

19 

.1055 

.5275 

653.14 

3448.5 

.04997 

000 

167,772     •        .13187 

19 

.0940 

.4700 

512.07 

2703.7 

.06293 

00 

183,079     :       .10429 

7 

.1380 

.4134 

406.98 

2148.9 

.07935 

0 

105,625            .08303 

7 

.1228 

.3684 

322.39 

1702.2 

.10007 

1 

83,694            .06559 

7 

.1093 

.3279 

255.45 

1348.8 

.12617 

2 

66,358            .05205 

7 

.0973 

.2919 

202.5 

1069.2 

.15725 

3 

52,624            .04132 

.0867 

.2601 

160.6 

848.0 

.19827 

4 

41,738            .03276 

7 

.0772 

.2316 

127.4 

672.7 

.25000 

6 

26,244            .02059 

7 

.0612 

.1836 

80.1 

422.9 

.39767 

8 

16,512            .01298 

f 

.0486 

.1458 

50.4 

266.1 

.62686 

10 

10,384            .00815 

7 

.0385 

.1155 

31.7 

167.4 

1.00848 

12 

6,528            .00511 

7 

.0305 

.0915 

19.9 

105.0 

1.59716 

14 

4,108            .00322 

7 

.0242 

.0726 

12.5 

66.0 

2.54192 

156  American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 

Notes  on  Electricity 

Ohm's  Law  In  any  circuit  or  portion  of  circuit  through  which  a  current  flows 
there  is  always  a  fixed  numerical  relation  between  the  current, 
the  voltage  and  the  resistance.  This  relation  was  first  discovered  and  formu- 
lated into  a  law  by  Ohm,  a  noted  German  scientist.  This  law  states  that  the 
current  which  floivs  in  the  circuit  equals  the  electric  pressure  divided  by  the  resistance 
of  the  circuit.  (I  =  E-r  R.)  Under  any  given  set  of  conditions  the  resistance 
of  a  circuit  will  remain  nearly  constant.  The  current  flowing  through  this 
circuit  will  then  vary  directly  as  the  voltage,  and  conversely  the  potential  drop 
across  the  ends  of  a  circuit  or  any  portion  of  a  circuit  will  vary  with  the 
current  strength  and  will  equal  the  product  of  the  current  flowing  times  the 
resistance  of  the  circuit  or  portion  of  circuit  under  consideration  (E  =  I  X  R). 
Thus,  for  example,  if  100  amperes  flow  through  a  single  rail  having  a  resistance 
of  .00043  ohm,  the  voltage  drop  from  end  to  end  of  the  rail  will  be  100  X 
.00043  =  .043  volt.  And  if  the  resistance  of  the  bonded  joint  were  say  .05 
ohm,  the  potential  drop  across  the  joint  would  be  5  volts,  and  this  would  be 
indicated  by  a  voltmeter  connected  across  the  joint. 

Conductors  are  in  series  when  they  are  connected  end  to  end  and  when  the 
same  current  flows  successively  through  each.  The  total  resistance  of  several 
resistances  in  series  will  equal  the  sum  of  the  separate  resistances.  Thus  we 
place  five  100-volt  incandescent  lamps  in  series  between  the  trolley  and  ground, 
and  the  same  current  passes  through  all  of  the  lamps.  Conductors  are  in 
parallel  or  multiple  when  the  current  divides  among  them  or  when  only  a 
separate  portion  of  the  main  line  current  passes  through  each  branch.  For 
example,  all  of  the  electric  cars  on  a  system  would  be  in  parallel  between  the 
trolley  and  ground,  the  current  operating  the  motors  of  one  car  would  not  flow 
through  the  motors  of  another  car.  That  portion  of  the  total  current  flowing 
through  each  parallel  branch  will  be  inversely  proportional  to  the  resistance  of 
each  branch.  The  total  or  combined  resistance  of  several  circuits  in  parallel 
will  equal  the  reciprocal  of  the  sum  of  the  reciprocals  of  the  separate  resistances,  or  it 
will  equal  the  reciprocal  of  the  sum  of  the  conductances. 

Alternating   Currents 

In  a  I).  C.  circuit  the  same  current  passes  continuously  in  one  direction 
through  the  circuit,  and  it  has  a  uniform  strength  in  all  parts  of  a  series  circuit. 
Just  as  much  current  enters  the  negative  brush  of  the  generator  as  leaves  at 
the  positive  brush.  In  an  alternating  current  circuit  the  current  alternates 
or  reverses  regularly  in  direction  25  or  60  times  a  second.  The  number  of 
complete  cycles  or  double  alternations  per  second  is  called  the  frequency.  The 
action  of  an  alternating  current  may  be  compared  to  that  of  water  in  a  closed 
tube  which  is  caused  to  move  back  and  forth  in  the  tube  by  the  regular 
reciprocating  motion  of  a  close  fitting  piston.  The  body  of  water  once  set 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances  157 

Notes    on   Electricity 

in  motion  would  tend  to  continue  in  motion  owing  to  its  momentum,  and  when 
at  rest  it  would  resist  motion  owing  to  its  inertia.  Alternating  currents,  unlike 
direct  currents,  have  two  properties  somewhat  similar  to  these  mechanical 
properties. 

Induction  The  region  surrounding  any  conductor  carrying  a  current  is  filled 
with  magnetic  flux.  This  flux  is  due  to  the  current  and  varies  in 
strength  with  it.  Any  conductor  lying  in  this  region  of  varying  flux  density 
will  have  generated  in  it  an  e.  m.  f.  opposite  in  direction  to  the  generator  e.  m.  f. 
There  will  be  a  counter  e.  m.  f.  induced  in  the  current-carrying  wire  itself  which 
will  at  all  times  oppose  the  impressed  e.  m.  f.  This  action  which  is  called  self- 
induction  tends  to  retard  the  building  up  of  the  current,  and  to  prolong  the 
current  when  it  approaches  zero  value. 

Capacity  When  an  e.  m.  f.  is  impressed  on  a  conductor,  a  certain  current 
called  a  charging  current  will  be  required  to  fill  or  charge  the  con- 
ductor. These,  like  condensers,  will  absorb  and  retain  a  certain  amount  of 
electricity  until  the  impressed  e.  m.  f.  is  removed  or  reversed,  at  which  time 
they  will  discharge  back  through  the  generator.  The  strength  of  the  charging 
current  will  depend  upon  the  impressed  voltage,  the  frequency  and  the  capacity 
of  the  circuit.  When  capacity  is  in  series  with  induction  in  any  circuit  they 
tend  to  annul  each  other's  effects. 

In  any  alternating  circuit  then  there  are  four  quantities  which  have  to  be 
considered  in  determining  the  current  strength,  voltage,  resistance,  inductance 
and  capacity,  though  the  last  two  may  be  very  small  in  some  circuits.  There 
is  but  one  voltage  acting  in  any  portion  of  the  circuit,  and  this  will  always  be 
the  resultant  of  three  active  voltages,  the  impressed,  the  inductive,  which 
opposes  the  impressed,  and  the  capacity  voltage,  which  is  in  advance  of  the  im- 
pressed. This  resultant  voltage  may  equal,  be  smaller  than  or  at  times  may 
be  much  larger  than  the  generator  voltage  at  certain  points  in  the  circuit. 
Ohm's  law  holds  true  when  the  e.  m.  f.  (E)  is  the  resultant  e.  m.  f.,  or  when  the 
resistance  of  the  D.  C.  circuit  (R)  is  replaced  by  the  impedance  of  the  A.  C. 
circuit,  and  when  all  operations  are  figured  geometrically.  The  impedance 
is  a  complex  quantity  depending  upon  resistance,  inductance,  capacity  and 
frequency. 

Watts  Power  may  be  defined  as  the  rate  of  doing  work  or  of  expending 
energy.  The  unit  of  electric  power  is  the  watt.  It  equals  the  product 
of  three  factors,  amperes,  volts  and  power-factor,  the  latter  of  which  is  unity  in 
all  D.  C.  circuits.  In  A.  C.  circuits  the  power  factor  is  a  fraction  obtained  by 
dividing  the  true  watts  delivered  and  measured  by  a  wattmeter  by  the  apparent 
or  volt-ampere  watts.  Since  electric  energy  depends  upon  a  product,  either 


158  American    Steel    and    Wire    Company 

Notes    on    Electricity 

factor  may  be  small,  and  the  other  correspondingly  large  without  affecting  the 
product.  Thus,  1000  watts  will  equal  100  amperes  times  10  volts,  or  10 
amperes  times  100  volts.  While  we  are  dealing  with  the  same  amount  of 
energy  in  each  case,  the  100  amperes  in  the  first  case  will  require  a  conductor 
10  times  larger  than  the  10  amperes  in  the  second  case,  to  conduct  the  energy 
with  the  same  given  loss  in  the  conductor.  The  size  of  the  conductor  is  deter- 
mined by  the  current,  not  the  e.  m.  f.  One  thousand  watts  are  called  a  kilowatt 
(K.  W.),  and  746  watts  of  electric  energy  are  equivalent  to  one-horse  power  of 
mechanical  energy.  Joules  (\v)=work  done=watts  times  seconds. 

Transformers  Owing  to  its  property  of  induction,  alternating  currents  are 
used  almost  exclusively  for  transmitting  electric  energy  over 
long  distances.  In  these  circuits  the  current  must  be  small,  requiring  a  small 
conductor,  but  the  voltage  may  be  very  high,  as  high  as  110,000  has  been 
used  in  a  few  instances.  Suppose  three  separate  and  entirely  independent 
coils  of  uniform  size  of  insulated  wire  were  wrapped  closely  about  each  other  and 
about  a  piece  of  soft  iron.  Let  coil  A  have  1  complete  turn,  B  10  turns  and  C 
100  turns.  If  an  alternating  current  be  sent  through  coil  B,  the  following 
results  will  be  obtained,  neglecting  losses :  In  the  single  turn  A  (coil  C  open) 
there  will  be  induced  an  e.  m.  f.  equal  to  -^0-  that  at  the  terminals  of  coil  B,  and  a 
current  will  be  produced  10  times  as  large.  In  coil  C  (coil  A  open)  an  e.  m.  f. 
will  be  induced  10  times  as  great  as  in  coil  B  and  a  current  -J{}  as  great  will  result. 
The  same  amount  of  power  in  watts  will  be  involved  in  each  case,  but  the 
relative  amounts  of  current  and  voltage  will  have  been  transformed  or  changed. 
In  the  one  case  (A)  the  voltage  has  been  "  stepped  down,11  in  the  other  case 
(C)  it  has  been  "  stepped  up."  This  is  the  underlying  principle  of  the  commercial 
stationary  transformer ;  it  enables  the  generator  voltage  to  be  increased  at  will, 
with  a  corresponding  change  of  current  and  cost  of  transmission  conductors. 
At  the  receiving  end  of  the  line  the  voltage  is  stepped  down  sufficiently  to  be 
used  in  motors  or  lamps  and  the  current  is  increased  in  equal  ratio.  Alter- 
nating currents  can  be  converted  to  direct  currents  commercially  only  by  means 
of  a  converter,  which  is  a  dynamo-electric  machine  having  one  armature  and  one 
field  for  converting  alternating  currents  to  direct  currents,  or  direct  currents  to 
alternating  currents. 

Alternating  Current  Heating  Effects      If    an    alternating   current   be  trans- 
mitted through  a  conductor,  portions 

of  the  electrical  energy  supplied  may  be  transformed  into  heat  in  four  different 
ways,  each  resulting  in  an  energy  loss  and  in  a  corresponding  reduction  of  the 
current-carrying  capacity  of  the  conductor. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances  159 

Notes  on  Electricity 

1.  A  definite  amount  of  electrical  energy  will  be  required  to  overcome 
the  ohmic  resistance  of  the  conductor,  just  as  in  the  case   with  continuous 
currents.     This  is  commonly  known  as  the  I2R  loss,  where   I   is  the  effective 
current.      (  An  effective  current  is  one  which  will  produce  the  same  thermal 
effect  as  an  equivalent  direct  current.) 

2.  Under    certain    conditions  there  will    be  loss  of  energy  due  to  the 
skin  effect  of  alternating  currents.      A  current  induced  in  a  conductor  builds  up 
from  the  surface,  and  an  appreciable  period  of  time  is  required  for  the  current 
to  penetrate  to  the  interior  portions  of  the  conductor.      If  the  frequency  be 
high  the  central  portion  of  large  conductors  or  of  iron  conductors  may  contribute 
nothing  to  the  conducting  powers  of  the  conductor.       This  is  equivalent  to 
increasing  the    resistance  of    the  conductor,    or  in  effect  the  conductor  will 
have  a  spurious  resistance  which  will  be  greater  than  its  real  resistance.      On 
account  of  this  action  the  resistance  of  track   rails  may  be  increased  seven 
or  eight  times  when  alternating  currents  are  used. 

3.  Foucanlt  or  eddy  currents  may  be  induced  in  the  conductor  itself,  or 
in  the  lead  sheathing  or  in  the  steel  armor  wires  of  a  cable  by  the  rapidly  changing 
alternating  magnetic  flux.      Foucault  currents  are  produced  at  the  expense  of 
energy  supplied  the  conductor,  and  they  are  dissipated  in  the  form  of  heat. 
This  loss  would  be  much  greater  in  single  conductor  cables  carrying  alternating 
current  than  in  two-conductor  or  three-conductor  cables  in  which  the  outer 
resultant   magnetic  field   should   be  very  small.      Placing   a  single-conductor 
alternating  current  cable  in  an  iron  conduit  would  very  greatly  increase  the 
energy  loss,  and  for  that  reason  it  is  seldon  done.      This  loss  will  be  greater 
in  solid  conductors  than  in  stranded  conductors  of  equal  section,  and  it  will 
increase  with  thickness  of  lead  sheath  and  with  the  diameter  of  the  armor  wires. 

-4.  Dielectric  hysteresis  losses  in  the  insulating  material.  This  loss  is 
somewhat  similar  in  kind  to  the  magnetic  hysteresis  loss  in  iron.  A  dielectric 
is  a  poor  conducting  material  used  for  insulating  conductors  through  which  an 
electromotive  force  establishes  a  molecular  strain  or  an  electro-static  field  of 
flux.  The  total  dielectric  loss  is  due  to  the  sum  of  a  direct  I2R  leakage  of 
current  through  the  dielectric  and  to  the  dielectric  hysteresis  loss,  which  is 
thought  to  be  a  function  of  the  insulation  resistance,  varying  inversely.  The 
hysteresis  loss  in  the  dielectric  of  a  cable  is  constant  and  independent  of  load. 
It  increases  with  voltage,  with  the  length  of  cable  and  with  frequency.  It  may 
be  lessened  by  increasing  the  thickness  of  the  dielectric,  by  using  a  dielectric 
of  low  specific  inductive  capacity  and  by  working  at  low  voltage  and  low 
frequency.  The  loss  is  thought  to  be  negligible  in  direct  current  systems  and 
in  low  voltage  alternating  current  distribution  systems. 


160 


American    Steel    and  M^ire    Company 


— 

_£ 

S 

CO* 

o 
o 

OJ 

ro 

X 

2 

ffi 

CO 

TH 

s 

X 

^        ,2 

aJ             o 

X 

n 

£ 

qa 

0 
bJO 

.s 

cu          .^ 

CJ 

03 

PH 

B.s 

T-H  CO 

X 

<u 

<D 

A       .b 

i 

1 

~ 

i 

<?5  10  00 

1  1 

5  "^    r- 

J-, 

8 

SO 

PL,' 

ffi 

§0  0 
C5  GO 

TH    CO*  TjH 

'So 

i  1 

X        ._        '" 

fi 

.2 
0 

c 

8, 

CQ  -^  co  oo 

(W^  CO  00 

X 

rt 

CJ 

1     1  ~ 

.  s  y 

£ 

w 

I) 

a 

PH' 

PH 

CO  CO  O  CO 

i-H*  CC*  Tf"  10* 

ex 

3              °      WJ 
O               ^*    "*~* 

u      ^ 

"5    -^    ^ 

r*    c  10 

5 

be 

i 

^§§§sg 

0 

&    s  s 

-  1  ll 

C     cu 

0) 

o 

o 

TH  CO  10  J>  00 

OJ 

§       jg   g 

s|  § 

>.    - 

u 

_ 

t-  CO  O  t-  CO 
^^  TH  O-?  C^  CO 

0 

C              *-      X 

•N       •- 
g      o 

£ 

X 

TH  (?t  CO  ^  1O 

(U     O 

w  §  r 

MH 

rt 

c 

8, 

§§S§gici8 

5j 

CD                pt     ^ 

^    <3    £ 

15    £   * 

IQ 

TH  <?5  T^  10  CO  CO 

0     rt 

S  "  s 

,2      '3       So 

H      J     a 

^       o 

c 
O 

PH 

ffi 

TH  O5  CO  ^  -^ 

0 
0) 

O            .S     bJD 

X          *^      .^  —  ' 
C$      CD      ^ 

rt      w      ^ 
§       -2       rt 

2 

C/) 

CO  COO  t>  CO  0  00 
^^  i^  CQ  GQ  CO  "^  "^ 

H 

0              ^      ^ 

X       X 

O      o"    o 

0     g     £ 

o 

r* 

| 

i—  I  GQ  CO  ^  4C  CO  t- 

cu             -7^ 

1^     b     "^ 

1  B  * 

i 

PH 

ss§sis^ 

o 

0) 

x         o    5£ 

^      C      ;/. 

o    w 

K 

TH  TH  <N  CO  CO"* 

^       -2   o 

C              ci     *- 

§i  rt  i  -^ 

^fj        ^ 

fl 

~ 

8, 

g^cbli^ci^TH 

0) 

>          ^ 

•lit 

111 

03 

1 

O 

€ 

TH  (N  CO  "*  1C  CO  C- 

^°      J 

g     &  s 

u. 

6 

PH 

££§££0,^ 

^                CD 

S"^             1) 

tJ      ^  ° 

1 

c 

PS 

PH 

—  <  TH  (M  CQ  CO  CO  ^ 

> 

0            '^ 

'f  's  5 

f 

OJ 

is 

8, 

^^SoSSw^S^THao 

«*-                  CJ 

cj 

O             J2 

1  ll 

""    'rt     X 

X       <U     1O 

£ 

a 

= 

TH<N<NCOTt<T*lOCOi>t- 

•f      ^ 

J2  ^    T!  x 

0 

0 

PL,' 

^^^^T3g§^SS5^ 

OJ               O               )-! 

^  a   g 

co    c;          o3   o 

0              u    <^ 

a 

w 

THTH<M«0?COCO^^ 

r-      '-^        (^ 

i    s  ; 

aT    c     j_ 

8, 

Soi^cii^^SioS^o 

D           -        C!H 

8  §  ll 

^ 

T-,TH(N-?COCO^H^1010COCO 

n     S     a; 

CU       1-       > 

PH 

8^cI^8§^§38i££S 

•a  IS 

O     r      cu     x 

f  1  1 

K 

^^^.(NCi^COCOCO-* 

^J    ° 

cu     cu     ii 

8, 

^^g^^CO^OOCOTHg-CO 

o3 
-^     bJO 

S       cu     g    |    ^ 

7^  'T?    o 

i    s"B  x 

E 

^^H^-KMC^^COCOCO^-* 

0         '  0     (^   -^ 

r.        x     Ji     t 

PH 

^^^SSS^^§2c^§^ 

•s  ^ 

i   s  ^  1 

fU               CU       -=       OH 

ffi 

^1 

o     ^  ^  «2 

1       x      ?    | 

f 

£c§ 

1 

o-«-«»«-«.g-a 

C-1     ai         H 

pj 

xr 

II 

Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


161 


Notes  on  Electricity 

Wiring  Formulae  and  Tables      The  current  carrying  capacity  of  a  conductor 

is  not  only  limited  by  its  allowable  tempera- 

ture rise,  but  also  by  the  allowable  drop  of  potential.  The  potential  difference 
required  to  transmit  a  given  electric  current  through  a  conductor  will  vary 
directly  as  the  resistance  of  the  conductor  and  inversely  as  its  cross-sectional 
area.  The  diameter  of  conductors  used  for  long  distance  transmission  purposes 
is  usually  determined  by  the  drop  of  potential  allowable,  rather  than  from  other 
electrical  considerations. 

For  most  practical  purposes  the  following  formula;  can  be  used  to  deter- 
mine the  size  of  copper  conductors,  current  per  wire,  and  weight  of  copper  per 
circuit  for  any  system  of  electrical  distribution. 

Area  of   conductor  in  circular   mils  —  --  —  K  —  C.  M. 

L      /\     rL  ~ 

\y  I)  X  W 

Current  in  main  conductor  =  —  —  T.     From  which  P  = 


w  .  ,        c 

U  eight  of  copper  = 


X    W    X    K    X    A 


,  Pounds. 


x    E.    x   1>00(XQOO 

In  these  equations  the  symbols  used  denote  the  following  quantities  : 
W  =  total  watts  delivered. 

D  =  distance  of  transmission,  one  way  in  feet. 
E  =  voltage  between   main   conductors  at   the  receiving   or  consumers'  end    of 

circuit. 
P  =  loss  in  line  in  per  cent  of    power  delivered,  i.  e.,  of  W,  this  being  a  whole 

number.     K,  T  and  A  are  constants  given  in  the  following  table  : 

Wiring    Formulae    Constants 


System 

Values  of  A 

Va 

ues  of  K 

Values  of  T 

Per  Cent  Power  Factor 

Per  Cent  Power  Factor 

100 

95 

90 

85 

80 

100 

95 

90 

85 

80 

1-phase,  and  D.  C. 
2-phase-4  wire 
8-phase-3  wire 

6.04 
12.08 
9.06 

2160 
1080 
1080 

2400 
1200 
1200 

2660 
1330 
1330 

3000 
1500 
1500 

3380 
1690 
1690 

1.00 
.50 

.58 

1.05 
.53 
.61 

1.11 
.55 
.64 

1.17 
.59 
.68 

1.25 
.66 
.72 

These  constants  depend  upon  the  system  of  distribution  as  well  as  the 
conditions  of  the  circuit. 

For  continuous  current  K  =  2160,  T  =  1  and  A  =  0.04. 

For  any  particular  power  factor  the  value  of  K  is  obtained  by  dividing 
2160,  the  value  for  continuous  current,  by  the  square  of  the  power  factor  for 
single  phase,  and  by  twice  the  square  of  the  power  factor  for  three-wire  three- 
phase  or  four-wire  two-phase.  The  three  wires  of  a  three-phase  circuit  and 
the  four  wires  of  a  two-phase  circuit  should  all  be  of  the  same  size,  and  each 
conductor  should  be  of  the  cross-section,  as  obtained  by  the  proper  applica- 
tion of  the  first  formula. 

The  following  assumed  values  of  power  factors  for  circuits  may  be  used 
in  any  calculation  when  their  exact  values  are  not  known. 

Incandescent  lighting  and  synchronous  motors,  95  per  cent. 


162 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Notes  on  Electricity 

Lighting  and  induction  motors,  85  per  cent. 

Induction  motors  alone,  80  per  cent. 

For  continuous  currents  and  for  railway  feeder  circuits,  for  lamp  and  motor 
outlets,  the  following  formula  for  determining  area  of  conductor  is  found  more 
convenient  to  use. 

10.8  X  amperes   X   length  of  circuit  in  feet. 
Circular  mils  =  — 

\olts  permissible  drop  in  wire. 

For  example:  What  size  of  wire  would  be  required  for  an  800-foot  circuit 
carrying  current  to  a  500-volt,  20-kilowatt,  direct  current  motor,  allowing  2  per 
cent  drop  in  the  circuit  ? 

20  kilowatts  =  20, 000  watts. 

20,000-^-500  =  40  amperes  in  line. 

1  per  cent  loss  in  each  wire  or  branch  of  circuit  =  500  X  .01  =  5  volts. 

Length  of  each  wire  =  800  feet. 


Circular  mils  =: 


10.8  X  40  X  800 


=  69,120  or  No.  2  B.  &  S.  wire  say, 


for  each  branch  of  the  circuit. 


Watts 


Power 

unit  of  electric  power  =  h.  p.  X  746. 
current  X  volts  X  power  factor, 
foot-pounds  per  sec.  -j-  1.355. 

3412  B.  t.  u. 

2,654,156  foot-pounds. 
1  kw.  hour  =  -4   3.53  pounds  water  evaporated  at  212°  F. 

22.8  pounds  water  raised  from  62°  to  212°  F. 

0.235  pound  carbon  oxidized  at  100  per  cent.  eff. 

Three-phase  Formula — Unity  Power  Factor 

POWER — If  A  =  amperes  per  phase  and  V  =  delta  voltage  then  AV   V  3  =  total  watts. 
LINE  DROP — If  A  =  amperes  per  phase  and  R  =  resistance  of  one  conductor  then 
AR   V  3  =  drop  in  delta  voltage. 

Arcing   Distance    of    High    Voltage    Alternating   Current    Between    Sharp 

Needle    Points    in    Air 

(Adopted  by  A.  I.  E.  E.) 


Effective  Volts 

Inches 

Effective  Volts 

Inches 

Effective  Volts 

Inches 

5,000 
10,000 
15,000 

.225 

.47 
.725 

50,000 
60,000 
70,000 

3.55 
4.65 
5.85 

140,000 
150,000 
175,000 

13.95 
15.00 
17.80 

20,000 
25,000 
30,000 

1.000 
1.3 
1.625 

80,000                  7.10 
90,000                  8.35 
100,000                  9.60 

200,000 
250,000 
300,000 

20.50 
25.60 

31.00 

35,000 
40,000 
45,000 

2.00 
2.45 
2.95 

110,000 
120,000 
130,000 

10.75 
11.85 
12.95 

350,000 
400,000 

36.10 
41.20 

Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


163 


Electric  Railway  Material 
Trolley  Wire 

Dimensions  of  Hard  Drawn  Copper  Trolley  Wire 


Section  of 
Trolley 
Wire 

Sizes 
Am.  Stan. 
(B.&S.) 
Gauge 

Sectional 
Area  in 
Cir.  Mils. 

Approximate  Dimensions,  See  Cuts  Below 

A 

B 

C 

D 

E 

F 

G 

R 

Round 

0 
00 
000 
0000 

105,600 
133,200 
168,100 
211,600 

.325 
.365 
.410 
.460 

.1625 
.1825 
.2045 
.230 

•• 

•    • 

Grooved 
"American 

Standard" 

00 
000 
0000 

133,200 
168,100 
211,600 

.392 
.430 

.482 

.196 
.215 

.241 

.0313 
.0469 
.0625 

.20 
.22 
.25 

78° 
78" 
78° 

27° 
27° 
27° 

51° 
51° 
51° 

.015 
015 
015 

Figure  8 

00 
000 
0000 

133,200 
168,100 
211,600 

.480 
.540 
.600 

.352 
.400 
.450 

.108 
.130 
.150 

.196 
.222 
.250 

•   • 

Round,  Grooved  and  Figure  8  Copper  Trolley  Wire 


Size  B.  &  S. 

Approximate  Weight,  Pounds 

Electrical  Conductivity 
(Minimum) 

Per  Mile 

Per  1000  Feet 

0 
00 
000 
0000 

1685 
2132 
2690 
3386 

319 
404 
509 
641 

Mile—  ohm  @  68  degrees 
Fahr.  not  to  exceed  890.1 
equals    98$   Matthiesen's 
Standard 

Round 


Grooved 


Figure  8 


164 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Electric   Railway   Material 

Extra  Galvanized  W.  &  M.  Telephone  and  Telegraph  Wire 

There  are  three  standards  of 
extra  galvanized  telephone  and 
telegraph  wire  in  general  com- 
mercial use. 

"  EXTRA  BEST  BEST"(E.B.B.). 
Made  by  improved  continuous 
process  and  stands  highest  in  con- 
ductivity of  any  telegraph  wire 
with  a  weight  per  mile  ohm  of 
from  4700  to  5000  pounds.  Uni- 
form in  quality,  pure,  tough  and 
pliable.  It  is  largely  used  by 
'telegraph  companies  and  in  rail- 
way telegraph  service. 

"BEST  BEST"  (B.B.).  Supe- 
rior to  the  E.B.B.  in  mechanical  qualities  and  equal  in  galvanizing,  but  of 
somewhat  lower  electrical  value.  Weight  per  mile  ohm,  5600  to  6000  pounds. 
This  grade  is  used  very  largely  by  telephone  companies. 

"  STEEL"  (or  homogeneous  metal).  More  expressly  designed  for  short-line 
telephone  service,  where  a  measure  of  conductivity  can  be  exchanged  for  high 
tensile  strength  in  a  light  wire.  Weight  per  mile-ohm,  6500  to  7000  pounds. 


*-.   ^, 


Properties  of  Galvanized  Telephone  and  Telegraph  Wires 
Based  on  Standard  Specifications 


Diameter 

Area 

Approximate 
Weight  in  Pounds 

Approximate  Breaking 
Strain  in  Pounds 

Resistance  per  Mile  (  Interna- 
tional Ohms)  at  68°  F.  or20°C. 

Size 

B.  W.  G. 

M'l  —  d 

ivri      //  * 

Per  1000 

Per 

Feet 

Mile 

Ex.  B.  B. 

B.  B. 

Steel 

Ex.  B.  B. 

B.  B. 

Steel 

0 

340 

115,600 

313 

1,655 

4,1  as 

4,634 

4,965 

2.84 

3.38 

3.93 

1 

300 

90,000 

244 

1,289 

3,223 

3,609 

3,867 

3.65 

4.34 

5.04 

2 

284 

80,656 

218 

1,155 

2,888 

3,234 

3,465 

4.07 

4.85 

5.63 

3 

259 

67,081 

182 

960 

2,400 

2.688 

2,880 

4.90 

5.83 

6.77 

4 

238 

56,644 

153 

811 

2,028 

2,271 

2,433 

5.80 

6.91 

8.01 

5 

220 

48,400 

131 

693 

1,732 

1,940 

2,079 

6.78 

8.08 

9.38 

6 

203 

41,209 

112 

590 

1,475 

1,652 

1,770 

7.97 

9.49 

11.02 

7 

180 

32,400 

87 

463 

1,158 

1,296 

1,889 

10.15 

12.10 

14.04 

8 

165 

27,225 

74 

390 

975 

1,092 

1,170 

12.05 

14.86 

16.71 

9 

148 

21,904 

60 

314 

785 

879 

942 

14.97 

17.84 

20.70 

10 

134 

17,956 

49 

258 

645 

722 

774 

18.22 

21.71 

25.29 

11 

120 

14.400 

39 

206 

515 

577 

618 

22.82 

27.19 

31.55 

12 

109 

11,881 

32 

170 

425 

476 

510 

27.65 

32.94 

38.28 

13 

95 

9,025 

25 

129 

310 

347 

372 

37.90 

45.16 

52.41 

14 

83 

6.889 

19 

99 

247 

277 

297 

47.48 

56.56 

65.66 

15 

72 

5,184 

14 

74 

185 

207 

222 

68.52 

75.68 

87.84 

16 

65 

4,225 

11 

61 

152 

171 

183 

77.05 

91.80 

106.55 

Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


165 


Electric   Railway   Material 

W.  &   M.  Telephone  Wire 

Prices  quoted  on  application 


Sizes 
Birming- 
ham 

Diameter 
in 
Decimals 

Bdls. 
per  Mile 

Weight 
lOOoVeet 

Weight 
per  Mile 
in 

Sizes 
Birming- 
ham 

Diameter 
in 
Decimals 

Bdls. 
per  Mile 

Weight 
per 
1000  Feet 

Weight 
per  Mile 
in 

Wire  Gauge 

of  an  Inch 

in  Pounds 

Pounds 

Wire  Gauge 

of  an  Inch 

in  Pounds 

Pounds 

4 

0.238 

4 

153 

811 

10 

0.134 

2 

49 

258 

6 

0.203 

3 

112 

590 

11 

0.120 

2 

39 

206 

8 

0.165 

2 

74 

390 

12 

0.109 

2 

32 

170 

9 

0.148 

2 

60 

314 

14 

0.083 

2 

19 

99 

Extra   Galvanized   Bond 

Used  for  signal  bonding  on  steam  roads.  Extra  B.  B.  extra  galvanized 
telephone  wire  is  nearly  always  used  for  this  purpose.  Cut  and  straightened 
to  lengths  at  a  small  extra  charge.  Usually  o  to  5  feet  long,  and  of  any  gauge 
number  desired. 

Extra   Galvanized   Steel   Signal   Wire 

This  wire  is  used  as  a  connection  from  a  lever  or  other  pulling  device  to  a 
semaphore  signal  which  is  operated  mechanically.  The  two  sizes  of  Extra 
Galvanized  Signal  Wire  in  common  use  are: 

No.  8  B.  W.  gauge,  with  an  approximate  breaking  strength  of  2350  pounds. 

No.  9  B.  W.  gauge,  with  an  approximate  breaking  strength  of  1900  pounds. 

The  wire  is  made  especially  to  meet  the  important  requirements  of  this 
service.  It  is  extra  galvanized,  and  of  a  quality  that  possesses  high  strength 
and  as  low  elongation  as  is  practicable  without  sacrificing  toughness.  The 
coils  are  5  feet  in  diameter  and  approximately  one-half  mile  in  length  without 
welds  or  joints. 

Steel   Strand  ior  Guying  Poles  and  for  Span  Wire 

Galvanized    or  Extra    Galvanized 


Diameter 
in 
Inches 

Approximate 
Weight 
per  1000  Feet 
Pounds 

Approximate 
Strength 
in  Pounds 

Diameter 
in 
Inches 

Approximate 
Weight 
per  1000  Feet 
Pounds 

Approximate 
Strength 
in  Pounds 

i 

510 
415 
295 
210 
125 

8500. 
6500. 
5000. 
3800. 
2300. 

f 

95 
75 
55 
32 

20 

1800. 
1400. 
900. 
500. 
400. 

This  strand  is  used  chiefly  for  guying  poles  and  smoke  stacks,  for  support- 
ing trolley  wire,  and  for  operating  railroad  signals. 

For  overhead  catenary  construction  suspending  trolley  wire,  the  special 
grades  of  strand  are  considered  preferable  because  they  possess  greater  strength 
and  toughness. 


166 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Electric  Railway  Material 

Extra  Galvanized  Special  Strands 


We  manufacture  three  special  grades  of  Extra  Galvanized  Strand  which 
will  meet  all  requirements  for  durability,  strength,  toughness  and  light  weight. 

Extra  Galvanized  Siemens-Martin  Strand. 

Extra  Galvanized  High  Strength  (crucible  steel)  Strand. 

Extra  Galvanized  Extra  High  Strength  (plow  steel)  Strand. 

Strands  of  all  three  grades  are  composed  of  seven  wires  each,  and  they 
have  a  very  heavy  coating  of  galvanizing,  which  insures  long  life. 

Minimum  Values 


Extra  Galvanized  Siemens- 
Martin  Strand 

Extra  Galvanized  High  Strength 
Strand 

Extra  Galvanized  Extra  High 
Strength  Strand 

to 

M 

M 

SJ 

ll 

I 

Prices 
00  Feet 

Ii 

.8° 

.  c  8 

±J  O.C 

all 

SJ 

ll 

.a 

HI 

1 

li 

y° 

.fl£ 

c-2-g 

IS 

6  a 

IJS-B 
^1 

n 

'B*i 

j  S 
au 

III 

5.  a 

3    - 

31 

Sfe 

JS&H 

w 

la* 

5.3 

f-s 

%  I 

12 

w 

2|* 

.SM 
O.S 

—  '   *3^ 

r& 

3^ 

w 

sjai 

H 

19,000 

$4.35 

50 

10.0 

« 

25,000 

$6.25 

55 

6 

X 

42,500 

$8.75 

60 

4 

y% 

11,000 

2.80 

50 

10.0 

yz 

18,000 

8.95 

55 

6 

yz 

27,000 

5.50 

60 

4 

& 

9,000 

2.30 

50 

10.0 

I7B 

15,000 

3.45 

55 

6 

I78 

22,500 

4.60 

60 

4 

H 

6,800 

1.80 

50 

10.0 

a^ 

11,500 

2.70 

55 

6 

^ 

17,250 

3.55 

60 

4 

A 

4.860 

1.35 

50 

10.0 

16B 

8,100 

2.10 

55 

6 

I8B 

12,100 

2.70 

60 

4 

4,380 

1.10 

50 

10.0 

* 

7,300 

1.75 

55 

6 

9 

10,900 

2.10 

60 

4 

j^ 

3,060 

1.00 

50 

10.0 

5,100 

1.50 

55 

6 

/i 

7,600 

1.90 

60 

4 

T\ 

2,000 

.85 

50 

10.0 

3 

3,300 

1.30 

55 

6 

3 

4,900 

1.60 

60 

4 

H 

900 

.55 

50 

10.0 

1^ 

1,500 

.80 

55 

6 

H 

2,250 

1.05 

60 

4 

Special 

A 

6,000 

1.35 

Messenger  Strand     The  heavy  encased  telephone  cables  are  not  in  them- 
selves sufficiently  strong,  without  an  unusual  deflection, 

to  safely  withstand  the  strain  incident  to  stringing  these  cables  between  poles  at 
considerable  distances  apart.  It  is  common  practice  now  to  stretch  from  pole 
to  pole,  with  very  little  sag,  T5^-inch  diameter  Extra  Galvanized  Siemens-Martin 
Strand;  or  Extra  Galvanized  High  Strength  Strand  of  ^/8-inch  or  -^-inch 
diameter,  and  from  this  messenger  strand  the  heavy  telephone  cable  is  sus- 
pended by  means  of  clips,  wire,  cord,  or  marline  at  short  intervals.  The  mes- 
senger strand  thus  sustains  most  of  the  stress  due  to  weight  of  cable,  wind  or  ice 
load.  We  have  mentioned  the  sizes  and  qualities  now  generally  employed  by 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances  167 

Electric  Railway  Material 

the  largest  telephone  companies.  The  Extra  Galvanized  Extra  High  Strength 
Strand,  while  affording  the  greatest  strength  for  its  weight,  is  naturally  stiff  and 
springy  and  not  so  easy  to  fasten.  The  so-called  common  galvanized  strand 
should  never  be  used  for  messenger  lines,  as  it  does  not  possess  the  requisite 
strength  and  uniform  toughness  of  the  special  grades  of  steel. 

Catenary  Method  of  Sup-  In  the  ordinary  electric  railway  overhead  con- 
porting  Trolley  Wire  struction,  the  copper  trolley  wire  dips  and  sags 

between  the  supporting  points,  which  are  opposite 

poles,  and  from  100  to  125  feet  apart.  The  catenary  method  of  carrying  the 
trolley  wire  consists  of  one  or  more  messenger  strands  stretched  over  the 
center  of  the  tracks.  Every  few  feet  along  the  messenger  strand  are  pendant 
hangers  that  clamp  on  the  trolley  wire  and  retain  it  in  a  rigid,  straight  hori- 
zontal line,  an  especially  desirable  feature  for  the  operation  of  electric  cars  at 
high  speed.  The  catenary  construction  also  makes  it  possible  to  space  the 
poles  at  greater  distances  apart,  but  this  necessarily  causes  great  tension  on 
the  messenger  strand  and  poles.  The  common  galvanized  strand  is  not  suit- 
able for  this  work.  The  selection  of  the  best  size  and  quality  of  strand 
depends  upon  the  length  of  span,  the  deflection  of  the  messenger  strand,  and 
the  weight  of  the  trolley  wire.  In  general,  however,  for  a  single  messenger 
strand  carrying  a  4/0  copper  trolley  wire,  we  would  recommend  the  following : 

For  spans  125  to  150  feet,  3/8-mch  or  T7^-inch  diameter  Extra  Galvanized 
Siemens-Martin  Strand. 

For  longer  spans  up  to  225  feet,  ^3 -inch  or  T7g-inch  Extra  Galvanized 
High  Strength  Strand. 

These  two  grades  have  been  found  the  best  for  catenary  work. 

Our  i^ -inch  or  T\-inch  diameter  Extra  Galvanized  Siemens-Martin  Strand 
is  usually  employed  for  "pull-off  "  strands. 

Lightning  Protection  for  In  erecting  high-tension  current  transmission  lines 
Transmission  Lines  on  ta}}  stee}  towers,  it  is  customary  to  stretch 

between  the  highest  points  of  the  towers  a  ^-inch 

diameter  Extra  Galvanized  Siemens-Martin  Strand,  known  as  an  "overhead 
ground  wire." 

Long  Span  in  High-tension  Long  spans  cannot  always  be  made  with 
Current  Transmission  Line  copper  cables,  because  hard  drawn  copper  has 

a  strength  of  only  65,000  pounds  per  square 

inch.  Where  it  is  necessary  to  cross  over  rivers,  lakes  and  bays  with  power 
transmission  lines,  the  current  may  be  conducted  through  an  extra  galvanized 
strand  of  one  of  the  three  special  grades  of  steel  above  described,  of  such  size 
and  strength  as  will  show  a  safety  factor  of  at  least  five. 


168 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Electric   Railway   Material 


Properties  of  Special  Grades  of  Extra  Galvanized  Special  Strands 


Diameter  of 
Strand,  Inches 

Number  of 
Wires  in  Strand 

Strength 
S.  M.  Strand 
Tons 

Strength 
Crucible  Strand 
Tons 

Strength 
Plow  Strand 
Tons 

Approximate 
Weight  per  Foot 
Pounds 

i  y 

1H 

IK 

\* 

% 
X 

5A 

61 
61 
37 
37 
37 
19 
19 
1!) 

55 
45.5 
38 
32.5 
25.5 
19 
14.2 
10 

91.5 
76 
63.5 
54 
43.7 
32 
23.7 
16.5 

121 
100 
85 
72 
60 
45 
35 
23.5 

4.75 
3.95 
3.30 

2^25 

1.70 
1.25 
.81 

American   Railway   Fence 

We  make  a  specialty  of  fence  for  right-of-way  of  steam  and  electric  roads, 
furnishing  designs  for  this  particular  purpose.  Our  woven  wire  fence  has  been 
adopted  as  standard  by  practically  every  steam  and  electric  road  in  the  United 
States.  We  furnish  fence  particularly  adapted  to  locality  in  which  it  is  to  be 
used,  making  a  close  study  of  conditions  and  supplying  fence,  giving  the  greatest 
possible  efficiency  at  minimum  cost.  Write  for  descriptive  catalogue  and  prices. 


Pole   Steps 


Plain  and   Extra  Galvanized 


For  the  use  of  electric  light,  street  railway  and  telephone  companies 


Sizes 

Approximate  Weight  per  100  Pole  Steps 

Sizes 

Approximate  Weight  per  100  Pole  Steps 

Plain 

Galvanized 

Plain                      Galvanized 

8 
9 
10 

1<>!/ 

x  y%  inch 
x  %  inch 
x  ^  inch 
'  x  ft  inch 

73%  pounds 
78      pounds 
85      pounds 
89      pounds 

75  pounds 
81  pounds 
88  pounds 
93  pounds 

8%  x  t9s  inch 
9      x  T9e  inch 
10KxT96inch 
i  9     x  l/2  inch 

58  pounds 
62  pounds 
71  pounds 
51  pounds 

61  pounds 
65  pounds 
74  pounds 
54  pounds 

The  above  are  made  with  regular  spike  and  button  heads.  Lengths  given  are  measure- 
ments over  all.  Each  step  carefully  threaded  with  screw  thread.  Special  shapes  or  lengths  of 
heads  made  to  order.  A  keg  of  pole  steps  weighs  about  200  pounds.  Prices  on  application. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


169 


Electric   Railway  Material 

"Crosby"  Wire  Rope  Clip 

Light,  durable  and  convenient.      Easily  applied.     These  are  galvanized 
drop-forged  clips  that  securely  hold  wire  rope  or  strand. 

List  Prices 


Inch 

Price 

Inch 

Price 

Inch 

Price 

Inch 

Price 

Inch 

Price 

Inch 

Price 

I 

$  .35 
.35 

.40 

« 

$  .45 
.45 
.55 

I 

$  .65 
.75 

.85 

1/8 

1* 

1H 

$  .95 
1.10 
1.25 

15* 

IH 

V/4. 

$1.50 
3.50 
5.50 

2 
W 

V/2 

$  7.50 
9.50 
11.50 

"Crosby"  Wire  Rope  Clip 


Galvanized  Three-bolt  Strand  Clamped 

This  is  known  as  the  standard  A.  T.  &:  T.  Co.  hot  galvanized  rolled  steel 
strand  clamp  or  guy  clamp,  made  from  open  hearth  bar  steel.  Will  hold  any 
size  of  strand  from  J^-inch  to  ^-inch  diameter. 

Prices  on  application. 


170 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Electric  Railway  Material 

Round  Cotton-covered  Magnet  Wire 
Advances    on    Coarse    Sizes 


Single  Cotton-covered 

Double  Cotton-covered 

Triple  Cotton- 
covered 

Sizes 

Approxi- 

American 
Standard 
(B.&S.) 
Gauge 

List 
Number 

Advances 
Over 
Base  per 
100 

Approxi- 
mate 
Pounds 
per  1000 

List 
Number 

Advances 
Over 
Base  per 
100 

Approxi- 
mate 
Pounds 
per  1000 

List 
Number 

Advances 
Over 
Base  per 
100 

mate 
Quantity 
on 
Reels 
Pounds 

Number 
of 
Reel 

Pounds 

Feet 

Pounds 

Feet 

Pounds 

0 

5000 

Base 

321 

5100 

Base 

322 

6000 

Base 

150 

321 

1 

5001 

Base 

254 

5101 

Base 

256 

6001 

Base 

150 

313 

2 

5002 

Base 

202 

5102 

Base 

203 

6002 

Base 

150 

313 

3 

5003 

Base 

160 

5103 

Base 

161 

6003 

Base 

150 

813 

4 

5004 

Base 

127 

5104 

Base 

128 

6004 

Base 

150 

313 

5 

5005 

Base 

101 

5105 

Base 

101.5 

6005 

Base 

150 

313 

6 

5006 

Base 

80.1 

5106 

Base 

80.6 

6006 

Base 

150 

313 

7 

5007 

$0.25 

68.6 

5107 

$0.25 

64.1 

6007 

$0.25 

150 

313 

8 

5008 

.50 

50.4 

5108 

.75 

50.9 

6008 

.75 

150 

313 

9 

5009 

.75 

40.1 

5109 

1.25 

40.4 

6009 

1.25 

150 

313 

10 

5010 

1.00 

31.9 

5110 

1.75 

32.1 

6010 

2.00 

150 

313 

11 

5011 

1.50 

25.3 

5111 

2.25 

25.5 

6011 

2.75 

150 

313 

12 

5012 

2.00 

20.1 

5112 

2.75 

20.3 

6012 

3.50 

150 

313 

13 

5013 

2.50 

16 

5113 

3.50 

16.2 

6013 

4.75 

150 

313 

14 

5014 

3.00 

12.7 

5114 

4.25 

12.9 

6014 

6.00 

150 

313 

15 

5015 

3.50 

10.1 

5115 

5.00 

10.8 

6015 

7.25 

150 

318 

16 

5016 

4.00 

7.99 

5116 

5.75 

8.15 

6016 

8.60 

50 

338 

17 

5017 

4.50 

6.36 

5117 

6.75 

6.51 

6017 

10.00 

50 

838 

18 

5018 

5.25 

5.05 

5118 

7.75 

5.19 

6018 

11.50 

50 

338 

19 

5019 

6.00 

4.04 

5119 

8.75 

4.15 

6019 

13.00 

15 

343 

Properties  of  Coarse  Sizes 


Sizes 
American 
Standard 
(B.&S.) 
Gauge 

Diameter 
Inches 

Allowable 
Variation 
Either  Way 
in  Per  Cent. 

Rated  Area 
in  Cir. 

Mils. 

Single    Cotton-covered 
Approximate  Values 

Double  Cotton-covered 
Approximate  Values 

Outside 
Diameter 
Inches 

Feet 
per  Pound 

Outside 
Diameter 
Inches 

Feet 
per  Pound 

0 

0.3249 

Kofi 

105,625 

.338 

3.1 

.339 

3.1 

1 

.2893 

Kofi 

83,694 

.297 

3.9 

.308 

3.9 

2 

.2576 

Hot  1 

66,358                .266 

5.0                 .272 

4.9 

3 

.2294 

Kofi 

52,624                .237 

6.2                 .243 

6.2 

4 

.2043 

Kofi 

41,738 

.212 

7.8 

.218 

7.8 

5 

.1819 

^ofl 

33,088 

.190 

9.9 

.196 

9.9 

6 

.1620 

Kofi 

26,244 

.170 

12.5 

.176 

12.4 

7 

.1443 

Kof 

20,822 

.152 

15.7 

.158 

15.6 

8 

.1285 

16,512 

.186 

19.8 

.142 

19.6 

9 

.1144 

13,087 

.121 

24.9 

.125 

24.7 

10 

.1019 

10,384 

.108 

31.4 

.113 

31.1 

11 

.0907 

8,226 

.097 

39.5 

.102 

39.1 

12 

.0808 

IK 

6,528                .087 

49.6 

.092 

49.2 

13 

.0720 

1# 

5,184                .078 

62.5 

.083 

61.7 

14 

.0641 

IX 

4,108                .070 

78.6 

.075 

77.5 

15 

.0571 

IK 

3,260 

.063 

98.9 

.068 

97 

16 

.0508 

]!/ 

2,580 

.056 

125 

.060 

122 

17 

.0453 

IK 

2,052                .050 

157 

.054 

153 

18 

.0403 

IK 

1,624                .045 

198 

.050 

192 

19 

.0359 

IK 

1,288                .041 

248 

.045 

240 

Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


171 


Electric  Railway  Material 

Asbestos  and  Single  Cotton-covered 


Round  Asbestos  and  S.  C.  C.  Magnet  Wire 


Order  by  List  Numbers 


Round 

Round 

Asbestos  and 

Asbestos  and 

Sizes 
American 
Standard 
(B.&S.) 
Gauge 

List 
Number 
for  Asbestos 
and  Single 
Cotton  Cover 

Approximate  Approximate 
Pounds      ;     Diameter 
per  1000     i    T    °ver 
Feet            Insulation 
Inches 

Approximate 
Quantity 
on  Reels 
Pounds 

Single 
Cotton- 
covered 
Advances 
Over  Base 

Double 
Cotton- 
covered 
Advances 
Over  Base 
per 

Shipped 
on 
Reels 
Number 

100  Pounds 

100  Pounds 

Special 

0000 

5440 

.482 

150 

Base 

Base 

321 

000 

5430 

.   .                    .432 

150 

Base 

Base 

-    321 

00 

5420 

.387 

150 

Base 

Base 

321 

0 

5400 

325 

.347 

150 

Base 

Base 

321 

1 

5401 

258 

.311 

150 

Base 

Base 

313 

2 

5402 

205 

.280 

150 

Base 

Base 

313 

3 

5403 

163 

.251 

150 

Base 

Base 

313 

4 

5404 

130 

.226 

150 

Base 

Base 

313 

5 

5405 

103 

.204 

150 

Base 

Base 

313 

6 

5406 

82 

.184 

150 

Base 

Base 

313 

7 

5407 

66 

.166 

150 

|0.25 

$0.25 

313 

8 

5408 

52                   .150 

150 

.75 

.75 

313 

9 

5409 

42 

.136 

150 

1.25 

1.25 

313 

A  very  thin  asbestos  tape  is  first  applied  to  the  wire.  This  tape  is  strong 
and  flexible  and  uniform  in  texture.  It  serves  as  an  excellent  fire  protection. 
Over  this  asbestos  is  wound  one  or  sometimes  two  covers  of  cotton.  This 
magnet  wire  is  used  largely  for  railway  motor  purposes. 

Square  or  Rectangular  Magnet  Wire 
All  Size 


Double  Cotton-covered 


172 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


I 


I 


2     C 


PS 


ill 


=  S 


5  - 

^^ 

s~i    §~" 

gs^-^s 

l^°11 


o  o  c  o  o 
UOOUtJ 


!Sg^ 


<Da>a>a>a>a>o>a>a>a>i>_^__-_ 

U2t«aiCCCBU5U3U}l/2ai-J:=,j=3=:3=:S:=; 

cSrfcSaScSnJaJairtrtrt0  —  —  o  o  o 
K««ffl«pSPQr  - 


III 

" 


cc  co  07  53  ! 


!  O  O  O  O  C 

'OOOOO 


"« to  in 


g  g  g  S  g  g  g  g g gggggSSS 


>T-t(MCO"rt'iO--CaDC:O(M'^<«OC 
•  §  o*  c5  55  55  55  7?  f"1  f1  f>  T>  5"'  • 


"  " 


;8S< 


Rail    Bonds    aiid   Appliances 


173 


i  * 


2  ^ 

"5  ~- 

1  I 

3  o 


ill 


•3        a, 

P 


•si 


<!     P5 


to  o 
co  53 


it  i^t  '*  j 

-:»  7>  '» 


Sell 


i  ESS  o  ^-i.^—  ^  *-;     .^    •• 
'^ Q  Q  ^°' 0"°"^^ 

)  iO  O  O  O  iO  O  *O  O  ^ 


174 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Electric     Railway   Material 
Rubber-covered   Wires   and   Cables 

We  manufacture  rubber  insulated  electrical  wires  and  cables  of  all 
descriptions  and  for  all  purposes,  leaded  or  armored.  These  are  fully 
described  in  our  recent  "  Electrical  Wires  and  Cables  "  catalogue. 

Globe  rubber  insulation  wires  and  cables. 
Crown  rubber  insulation  wires  and  cables. 
High  grade,   30  per  cent  para    and  special 
insulated  wires  and  cables. 


Telephone  wires  and  cables. 
Signal  wires  and  cables. 
Car  cables. 


Mining  machine  cables. 
Packing  house  cord. 
Elevator  lighting  cables. 
Elevator  control  cables. 
Theatre  or  stage  cables. 
Border  light  cables. 
Deck  cables. 


Kinds  oi  Rubber  Insulation 

We  make  three  standard  grades  of  rubber  compound  for  rubber-covered 
conductors:  Globe,  or  ordinary  compound;  Crown,  or  intermediate  compound; 
and  a  High  Grade  Thirty  Per  Cent  Compound.  In  addition,  we  insulate  wire 
to  any  specifications  covering  particular  requirements  such  as  20  or  40  per 
cent  rubber  compounds. 

Globe  Rubber     This  is  regularly  furnished  on  wires   and  cables  for  600-volt 
National  Electrical  Code  requirements.     It  can  however  be 
used  for  potentials  as  high  as  2500  volts,  if  the  service  conditions  be  favorable 
to  rubber,  or  if  the  conductor  be  lead  encased. 

Crown  Rubber  This  rubber  has  better  physical  properties  than  the  Globe, 
is  more  durable,  stronger  and  has  a  higher  factor  of  safety. 
It  is  a  high  grade  compound  for  all  National  Electrical  Code  requirements  and 
can  be  recommended  for  service  conditions  in  which  the  working  pressure  is 
7000  volts  or  under. 


High    Grade   Thirty   Per 
Cent  Rubber   Compound 


Contains  only  the  best  grade  of  pure  para  rubber, 
and  is  used  for  high  voltage  circuits.  This  makes 
an  unsurpassed  dielectric  for  all  high  voltages  and 

for  exacting  service  conditions ;  it  has  great  strength  and  elasticity,  high  insu- 
lation qualities  and  long  life.  All  of  these  compounds  make  solid  black 
rubber. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


175 


Electric   Railway   Material 
Paper-insulated   Lead-sheathed   Cables 


For  many  years  past  we  have  manufactured  large  quantities  of  paper 
cables,  single  and  multiple  conductor.  Our  factory  equipment  is  unexcelled 
for  making  this  class  of  material  to  the  most  exacting  specifications. 

Prices  quoted  on  application. 

Varnished   Cambric   Cables 


We  also  manufacture  large  quantities  of  varnished  cambric  cable  and 
submarine  cable  of  every  class,  for  street  railways  and  electric  light  and  power 
plants.  Inquiries  solicited. 


176 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Engineering  Data 


T-rail  Section  and  Drilling 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


177 


Engineering  Data 
Properties  and  Dimensions  of  T-Rails 

As  made  by  the  Carnegie  Steel  Company  and  the  Illinois  Steel  Company 
A.  S.  C.  E.  Sections 


Drilling  of  Rails  in  Inches 

Ohmic 

Weight  of 
Rail  per 
Yard 
in  Pounds 

Dimensions  of  Rail  Sections  in  Inches 
STANDARD  T-RAILS 
(See  opposite  page) 

STANDARD  with 
Carnegie  Steel  Co. 
and  Illinois  Steel  Co. 
as  Shown  in  Their 
Rail  Catalogue 

Section 
of 
Rail  in 
Square 
Inches 

Resistance 
of  One  Rail 
per  1000  Feet 
Assuming  it 
to  Equal  12 
Times  that 

of  Copper 

No.  Joints 

A 

B 

C 

D 

E 

F 

a 

b 

C 

d 

68°  F. 

8 

1A 

il 

& 

H 

A 

IA 

2 

4 

% 

0.784 

.12454 

16 

all 

Hi 

X 

A 

2/8 

2 

4 

, 

ft 

1.57 

.06227 

20 

2ft 

^•li 

2ft 

2 

4 

ft 

1.96 

.049808 

30 

3/5 

iff 

ii 

Iff 

ft 

3/4 

2 

4 

. 

X 

2.94 

.033212 

40 
45 

3H 

2 

H 

iff 

If 
li 

3/2 

BH 

2/2 

5 
5 

• 

% 

3.92 
4.42 

.024908 
.022170 

50 

3^ 

l^s 

A 

m 

2% 

5 

_ 

1 

4.90 

.019925 

55 

2  i/ 

/T- 

V 

lift 

|f 

2^2 

5 

1 

5.39 

.018114 

60 

4X 

23/6 

^ 

nit 

4X 

2/"2 

5 

1 

5.88 

.016606 

65          4yV 

2jf 

y* 

4jV 

2/2 

5 

1           6.37 

.01538 

70 

4:ft 

2^r-x 

F 

2-V 

88 

4:ft 

2U 

5 

6 

1 

6.86 

.014233 

75 

4il 

I? 

X 

^rA 

M 

4rl      2>^ 

5 

6 

1 

7.35 

.01336 

80 

5 

it 

2T3g- 

If 

5         2ji 

5 

6 

1           7.84 

.012454 

85 

5  A 

2A 

Ol  7 

9 

5TV     2/2 

5 

6 

1 

8.33 

.01185 

90         5^1 

2ft 

il 

2y4¥5¥ 

TS 

53/6  !  2^ 

5 

6 

1           8.82 

.011070 

95         5^ 

2ri 

if 

2y5¥5¥ 

A 

5T»_      2% 

5 

6 

1 

9.31 

.01053 

100      534: 

23^ 

l 

2T6X- 

A1 

5%   '  2j4 

5         6 

1 

9.80 

.009963 

110 

Q/s 

1A 

21! 

li 

6^      2/2 

5 

6 

1          10.80 

.009057 

Series  Type  "A" 

60 

4, 

2^ 

^ 

2J3 

~5~% 

4 

2^ 

5 

1 

5.88 

.016606 

70 

4X 

23/8 

X 

2i« 

| 

4X 

2/-2 

5 

6 

1 

6.86 

.014233 

80 
90 

5/8          2/2 

J! 

5^ 

^ 

5 
5 

6 
6 

1/8 

7.84        .012454 
8.82        .011070 

100 

6 

2X 

8K 

T% 

2^ 

5 

6 

IX 

9.80 

.009963 

Series  Type  "  B  " 

60 

70 

4T3*  '.  2/s 
4|f     23/8 

tj 

«9, 

li 
If 

BU 

2/ 

5 
5 

6 

1 
1 

5.88        .016606 
6.86     1    .014233 

80 

4i|      2T\ 

y^, 

2H 

If 

4_7 

2%, 

5 

6 

1  /$ 

7.84 

.012454 

90 
100 

5f| 

2ff 

3  2 

IH 

9 

A 

sS 

1% 

5 
5 

6 
6 

IX 

IX 

8.02 
9.80 

.011070 
.009963 

NOTE — The  two  tables,  Series  Type  "A"  and  Series  Type  "  B  "  represent  T-rail  sections  proposed  by  the 
Committee  on  Standard  Rail  and  Wheel  Sections  for  adoption  as  "Recommended  Practice  of  the  American 
Railway  Association." 


178 


American  Steel    and    \V^ire    Company 


c" 


.-d 


,-d 


Girder  Rail  Section  and  Drilling 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


179 


Engineering    Data 

Properties  and  Dimensions  of  Girder  Rails  in  Most  Common  Use 

These  girder  rails  are  made  by  the  Lorain  Steel  Company  and  they  are 
shown  in  the  Lorain  Catalogue  No.  16. 


Section 
No.  and 
Size  of 
Rail  in 
Pounds 
per  Yards 

Dimensions  of  Girder  Rail 
Sections  in  Inches 
(See  opposite  page) 

Standard  Drilling  of  Rails  in  Inches 

Sectional 
Area  of 
Rail 
in  Inches 

Section  of  Rail 
in  Circular 
Mils.  Ratio 
Steel  to 
Copper  1:12 

Diam. 

(d)of 
Holes 

Upper  Row 
of  Holes 

Lower  Row 
of  Holes 

A 

7 

8ft 

7 
7 
9 

B 

c 

D 

D' 

3 

E 

F 

a 

b 

4 
5 
4 
4 
5 

c 

a'      b' 

3>2    5 

1 

c' 

73 
90 
95 
116 

129 

2X 
3 
3 

X. 

A 

tt 

A 

SB 

B 
H 
B 

6 
6 

IX 

IX 
IX 

IX 

2X 

4 
5 
4 
4 
5 

5 

7.16 
8.82 
9.31 
11.39 
12.66 

758,864 
935,825 
987,880 
1,206,000 
1,341,000 

3/^    5 

5 

Rail  Joints 

It  is  generally  concluded  by  railway  engineers  (a)  that  the  spacing  of 
rails  with  open  joints  is  unnecessary  in  paved  streets  ;  (b)  that  it  is  best  not  to 
stagger  rail  joints  subjected  to  heavy  traffic ;  and  (c)  that  in  making  a  joint, 
the  parts  of  rail  and  splice  bar  brought  into  contact  should  be  cleaned  of  scale 
and  rust,  that  the  bolts  should  not  be  overstrained  when  fully  drawn  up,  and 
sledging  should  be  reduced  to  a  minimum. 


MAX.4'51/Z"  MIN.4'5%" 


M.  C.  B.  Track  and  Wheel  Gauge 


180 


American    Steel  and    W^ire    Company 


Engineering   Data 

To  Find  the  Degree  or  Radius  of  Railway  Curve 

(From  the  Roadmasters'  Assistant) 

Stretch  taut  a  50-foot  tape  line  on  the  inner  side  of  the  rail  and  measure 
the  perpendicular  distance  (which  is  the  "middle  ordinate")  from  the  center  of 
the  tape  line  to  the  inner  edge  of  the  rail. 

The  radius  and  degree  of  the  curve  corresponding  to  this  middle  ordinate 
may  then  be  found  in  the  following  table : 


Degrees 

Radius 
in  Feet 

Middle 
Ordinate  in 
Inches 

Degrees         Radius 
in  1'eet 

Middle 
Ordinate  in 
Inches 

Degrees 

Radius 
in  Feet 

Middle 
Ordinate  in 
Inches 

30 
1° 

2° 
3° 
40 

5° 
6° 

11,490 
5,730 
2,865 
1,910 
1,433 
1,146 
955 

.22 
.66 
1.32 
1.97 
2.63 
3.28 
3.94 

7°                  819 
8°                 717 
9°                 637 
10°                 574 
11°                 522 
12°                 478 
13°                 442 

4.57 
5.24 
5.89 
6.54 

7.20 
7.87 
8.51 

14° 
15° 
16° 
17° 
18° 
19° 
20° 

410 
383 
359 
338 
320 
303 
288 

9.17 
9.80 
10.49 
11.11 
11.78 
12.41 
13.06 

To  Ascertain  the  Radius   Corresponding  to  any  Degree 

Divide  5780  (the  radius  of  a  1°  curve)  by  the  degree  of  the  curve  under  consideration. 

To  Determine  the  Elevation  of   the  Outer  Rail  on  Curves 

Stretch  a  line  between  two  points  54  feet  apart,  on  the  running  side  of  the  outer  rail, 
and  the  distance  from  the  center  of  this  line  to  the  rail  will  give  the  elevation  required. 

Table  of  Middle  Ordinates  for  Bending  Rails  to  be  Laid  on  Curves 


Deflec- 


Length  of  Rails  in  Feet 


tion 
Angle 

Radius 
Feet 

30 

28 

26 

24 

22 

20 

18 

16 

14 

Degrees 

Inches 

Inches 

Inches 

Inches 

Inches 

Inches 

Inches 

Inches 

Inches 

.5 

11,460 

.120 

.096 

.072 

.060 

.048 

.048 

.036 

.024 

.024 

1. 

5,730 

.240 

.192 

.156 

.132 

.108 

.096 

.072 

.060 

.048 

1.5 

3,820 

.348 

.312 

.252 

.216 

.192 

.156 

.120 

.096 

.072 

2. 

2,865 

.456 

.408 

.348 

.300 

.252 

.204 

.168 

.132 

.096 

2.5 

2,292 

.588 

.516 

.444 

.372 

.324 

.264 

.216 

.168 

.120 

3. 

,910 

.696 

.612 

.528 

.444 

.372 

.312 

.264 

.204 

.144 

3.5 

,637 

.840 

.732 

.624 

.516 

.444 

.372 

.300 

.240 

.180 

4. 

,433 

.948 

.828 

.720 

.600 

.504 

.420 

.348 

.276 

.216 

4.5 

,274 

1.056 

.924 

.804 

.672 

.564 

.468 

.384 

.312 

.240 

5. 

,146 

1.188 

1.032 

.888 

.756 

.636 

.528 

.420 

.348 

.264 

5.5 

,042 

1.296 

1.128 

.984 

.840 

.708 

.576 

.468 

.384 

.288 

6. 

955.4 

1.404 

1.224 

1.056 

.912 

.768 

.624 

.504 

.408 

.312 

6.5 

882 

1.536 

1.344 

1.164 

.984 

.828 

.684 

.552 

.444 

.336 

7. 

819 

1.644 

1.440 

1.248 

1.056 

.888 

.732 

.588 

.468 

.360 

7.5 

764.5 

1.752 

1.524 

1.332 

1.128 

.948 

.780 

.636 

.504 

.384 

8. 

716.8 

1.896 

1.644 

1.428 

1.200 

.020 

.840 

.672 

.540 

.408 

8.5 

674.6 

1.992 

1.740 

1.512 

1.272 

1.080 

.888 

.720 

.576 

.432 

9. 

637.3 

2.100 

1.836 

1.596 

1.344 

.140 

.936 

.756 

.600 

.456 

9.5 

603.8 

2.244 

1.956 

1.692 

1.428 

.212 

.996 

.804 

.648 

.504 

10. 

573.7 

2.352 

2.052 

1.776 

1.500 

.272 

.044 

.852 

.684 

.540 

11. 

521.7 

2.592 

2.256 

1.956 

1.668 

.404 

.152 

.936 

.756 

.568 

12. 

478.3 

2.832 

2.472 

2.148 

1.812 

1.536 

.260 

1.020 

.828 

.636 

13. 

441.7 

3.048 

2.664 

2.304 

1.956 

1.656 

.356 

1.104 

.900 

.684 

14. 

410.3 

3.300 

2.868 

2.484 

2.100 

1.776 

.464 

1.188 

.960 

.782 

15. 

383.1 

3.540 

3.084 

2.676 

2.256 

1.908 

.572 

1.272 

1.020 

.780 

16. 

359.3 

3.756 

3.276 

2.832 

2.400 

2.040 

.668 

1.356 

1.092 

.840 

17. 

338.3 

3.996 

3.480 

3.024 

2.556 

2.160 

.776 

1.440 

1.152 

.888 

18. 

319.6 

4.212 

3.672 

3.180 

2.700 

2.280 

.872 

1.524 

1.224 

.936 

19. 

302.9 

4.452 

3.888 

3.360 

2.856 

2.412 

.980 

1.608 

1.296 

.984 

20. 

287.9 

4.704 

4.092 

3.552 

3.000 

2.544 

2.088 

1.692 

1.368 

1.044 

Note — This  table  is  slightly  modified  in  form  from  that  prepared  by  Mr.  John  C.  Trautwine  for  his 
Engineers'  Pocket  Book." 


Civil 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


181 


Engineering    Data 

Table  for  the  Elevation  of  the  Outer  Rail  on  Curves 

Rate  of  vSpeed  in  Miles  per  Hour 

Degree 
of 

15 

20 

25 

30 

35 

40 

45 

50 

60 

Curvature 

Elevation  of  Outer  Rail  in  Inches 

30' 

A 

/8 

136 

X 

/8 

% 

,1 

H 

1/8 

1°00' 

Ys 

i^ 

7 
16 

^/8 

}l 

IT'S 

IISB 

1^8 

2% 

1°30' 

13G 

^s 

% 

1& 

1  jag 

2 

gl^ 

3/ 

2°  00' 

.B( 

1£ 

ii 

1/8 

2/8 

2!  i 

8/^ 

4^ 

2°  30' 

% 

11 

i 

2/8 

2i^ 

3i6(i 

4^5 

5^| 

3°  00' 

7 

13 

J3/ 

2r7s 

3/8 

4 

4lfi 

7 

3°  30' 

V-2. 

IB 

li'e 

2tle 

2r« 

If 

4:>g 

5K 

4°  00' 

9 

J  1 

2% 

3/ 

5  Aj 

G/i 

4°  30' 

5°  00' 

i 

i& 

2^ 

4  8 

5j| 

6 

7.% 

~/B 

6°  00' 

Ii9e 

2  /a 

3/ 

4J1 

6i5e 

8  8 

9% 

14  1*6 

7°  00' 

i 

1% 

2% 

Al/t 

7% 

9  ^/A. 

ll/ 

16^4 

8°  00' 
9°  00' 
10°  00' 

If 

23/1 

3^ 
4^1 

5% 

7§ 

8% 

nil 

18K 

13/8 

143^ 
16^8 

18% 
23^ 

12°  00' 

i-K 

zys 

41! 

15°  00' 

3ft 

6/8 

QI'B 

18°  00' 

2  IB 

4lB 

7% 

10l96 

20°  00' 

2JI 

51^ 

8j3g 

\\y\ 

25°  00' 

313 

6f  | 

lO^g 

15i5s 

30°  00' 

4/8 

'  16 

12A 

17^ 

"V 


DOUBLE  TRACK 


Typical   Track    Sections 


182 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Engineering   Data 

Power  to  Propel  Cars 

Data  Based  on  Paper  Read  by  A.  H.  Armstrong  at  Annual  Meeting  of.  A.  I.  E.  E., 

June  30,  1903 


Stops  per 
Mile 

Schedule 
Speed 

W.  H.  per 
Ton  M. 

Schedule 
Speed 

W.  H.  per 
Ton  M. 

Schedule 
Speed 

W.  H.per 
Ton  M. 

Schedule 
Speed 

W.  H.per 
Ton  M. 

.0 

30. 

40 

45 

63 

60 

97 

75 

140 

.2 

27.5 

44 

40 

72 

50 

110 

55 

155 

.4 

25. 

48 

35 

80 

42 

122 

45 

170 

.6 

23.5 

51 

32 

87 

36 

133 

38 

183 

.8 

22.5 

54 

29 

94 

32             143 

33 

196 

1.0 

21.5 

57 

27 

100 

29             153 

30 

208 

1.2 

20.5 

61 

25 

106 

27 

162 

27.5 

217 

1.4 

19.5 

64 

23 

111 

25 

170 

1.6 

18.5 

67 

22 

116 

23 

177 

1.8 

18.8 

69 

21 

121 

22 

184 

2.0 

17. 

71 

20 

126 

21 

190 

2.2 

16.5 

73 

19 

130 

20 

196 

2.4 

16. 

76 

18 

135 

2.6 

15.5 

78 

17 

140 

2.8 

15.0 

80 

16 

144 

3.0 

14.5 

82 

Physical  Properties  of  Metals 


Metals 

Ultimate 
TeTisile 
Strength 
Pounds  per 
Square 
Inch 

Melting 
Point  in 
Cent. 
Degrees 

Specific 
Heat 

Coefficient 
of  Linear 
Expansion 
Below  100 
Degrees 
Cent. 

OhmsRes. 
per  Mil 
Foot,  20 
Degrees 
Cent. 

Temp. 
Coefficient 
K.  Cent. 
Degrees 

Antimony 

440 
625 
266 
1020 
1054  to 
1200 
1093 
1046 
1220 
1620 
325 
1260 
—39.4 
1620 
1800 

0.0508 
.2185 
.0298 
.0939 
.0951 
.0951 

0.00001129 
.00002310 
.00001755 
.00001720 
.00001596 

230.2 
18.21 
845.20 
45.00 
10.35 
10.7 
126.6 
13.28 
380. 
63.21 
126.10 
245. 
577.6 
74.73 
56.69 
39.6 
12.9 
10.48 
118. 
111. 
84.57 
36.60 

0.00389 
.00390 
.00354 

.'  00388 
.00388 
.000443 
.00365 
.00453 
.0054 
.00387 
.00122 
.0007485 
.0041 
.0039 

.'00377 
.0050 

!  00365 
.00365 

Aluminum,  annealed     .     .     . 
Bismuth 

15,000 

6,400 

18,000 
30,000 
60,000 
87,000 

16,500 
52,000 
3,300 

Brass,  cast   
Copper,  annealed      .... 
Copper,  hard  drawn  .... 
German  silver  wire    .... 
Gold,  annealed      
Iron,  cast     
Iron,  wrought  
Lead  
Manganese  steel  

.0324 
.1298 
.1138 
.0314 

.00001415 
.00001001 
.000011660 

.00002828 

Mercury  
Nickel      
Platinum       
Phosphor  bronze  
Silicon  bronze  
Silver  
Steel,  high  carbon     .... 
Solder,  tin  1,  lead  1  .... 
Tin            .... 

64,700 
75,000 

100,000 
7,500 
4,500 
7,500 

.0333 
.1150 
.0324 

.00006 
.00001251 
.00000863 

950 
1410 
187 
230 
416 

.0570 
.1175 

.00001943 
.00001240 

.0562 
.0956 

.00002094 
.00002532 

Zinc     

Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


183 


Engineering   Data 

Weight  and  Specific  Gravity  of  Various  Materials 


Weight  in  Pounds 

Weight  in  Pounds 

Name 

Specific 
Gravity 

Name 

Specific 
Gravity 

Per 

Cubic 

Per 

Cubic 

Per 

Cubic 

Per 
Cubic 

Foot 

Inch 

Foot 

Inch 

Water,  pure,  60°  F 

62.3 

.036 

1.00 

Glass,  crown 

156 

.090 

2.52 

Water,  sea 

64.3 

.037 

1.03 

Glass,  plate  . 

172 

.099 

2.76 

Glass,  flint    .     . 

192 

.111 

3.07 

METALS 

Granite    . 

164 

.095 

2.63 

Iron,  cast  . 

450 

.260 

7.22 

Gypsum  . 

143 

.082 

2.28 

Iron,  wrought 

480 

.278 

7.70 

Lime,  quick  . 

53 

.030 

0.84 

Iron,  steel 

490 

.283 

7.85 

Limestone     .     . 

168 

.100 

2.80 

Aluminum 

166.5 

.096 

2.67 

Marl    .... 

119 

.069 

1.90 

Brass    .... 

524 

.302 

8.40 

Masonry,  from  . 

120 

.068 

1.90 

Bronze 

552 

.320 

8.85 

Masonry,  to 

144          .083 

2.30 

Copper 

554 

.32 

8.89 

Mortar,   average 

109          .063 

1.75 

Gold     .... 

1208 

.697 

19.36 

Mud    .... 

102 

.059 

1.63 

Lead     .... 

710 

.410 

11.40 

Petroleum     . 

55 

.032 

0.88 

Platinum  . 

1344 

.775 

21.53 

Plumbago 

140 

.081 

2.27 

Silver   .... 

655 

.377 

10.50 

Sand,  average    . 

100 

.058 

1.61 

Tin        .... 

458 

.265 

7.35 

Sandstone     . 

144 

.083 

2.30 

Zinc       .... 

437 

.253 

7.00 

Shale  .... 

162 

.094 

2.60 

Slate    .... 

175 

.101 

0     Of) 

MINERALS 

&  ,  OU 

Asphalt 

87 

.050 

1.39 

Trap    .... 

170 

.098 

2.72 

Brick,  soft      .      . 

100 

.058 

1.60 

WOODS 

Brick,  hard     . 

125 

.071 

2.00 

Brick,  pressed     . 

135 

.077 

2.16 

Apple 

47 

.028 

0.76 

Brickwork,  or- 

112 

.064 

1.80 

Ash     .... 

45 

.026 

0.72 

dinary    . 

Cedar       .     .     . 

39 

.022 

0.62 

Brickwork,  fine   . 

120 

.068 

2.10 

Cherry      .     .      . 

42 

.024 

0.67 

Clay      .... 

119 

.068 

1.92 

Chestnut 

35 

.020 

0.56 

Coal,  anthracite  . 

96 

.056 

1.57 

Hemlock 

24 

.015 

0.38 

Coal,  bituminous 

84 

.048 

1.35 

Maple       .     .     . 

42 

.026 

0.68 

Coke     .... 

63 

.036 

1.01 

Oak,  white    . 

48 

.030 

0.77 

Concrete  cement 

130 

.075 

2.20 

Oak,  red  .     .     . 

45 

.026 

0.74 

Earth,  from   . 

90 

.052 

1.63 

Pine,  white   . 

28 

.017 

0.45 

Earth,  to  ... 

135 

.068 

1.92 

Pine,  yellow 

38 

.020 

0.61 

Felspar 

162 

.094 

2.60 

Walnut    .     .      . 

36 

.020 

0.58 

Flint     .... 

164 

.095 

2.63 

184  American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Engineering    Data 


Linear 

1  meter  —  39.3704  inches  =  3.281  feet  =  1.094  yards. 

Centimeter  (1-100  meter)  —  0.3937  inch. 

1  millimeter  (mm.)  =  .03937  inch  =  39.37  mils. 

1  inch  =  25.3997  millimeters  =  .083  foot  =  2.54  centimeters. 

1  kilometer  —  1,000  meters,  or  3,281  feet  =  .6213  mile. 

For  the  purpose  of  memory,  a  meter  may  be  considered  as  3  feet  3^"  inches. 

Surface    Measures 

Centare  (1  square  meter)  =  1,550  square  inches  =  10.764  square  feet. 

Are  (100  square  meters)  =  119.6  square  yards. 

1  square  centimeter  —  0.155  square  inch  =  197,300  circular  mils. 

1  square  millimeter  =  .00155  square  inch  =  1973  circular  mils. 

1  square  inch  =  6.451  square  centimeters  =  .0069  square  foot. 

1  square  foot  =  929.03  square  centimeters  =  .0929  square  meter. 

Weights 

Milligram  (1-1,000  gram)  =  0.0154  grain. 

Centigram  (1-100  gram)  =  0.1543  grain. 

Decigram  (1-10  gram)  =  1.5432  grains. 

Gram  =  15.432  grains. 

Decagram  (10  grams)  =  0.3527  ounce. 

Hectogram    (100  grams)  =  3.5274  ounces. 

Kilogram  (1,000  grams)  =  2.2046  pounds. 

Myriagram  (10,000  grams)  =  22.046  pounds. 

Quintal  (100,000  grams)  =  220.46  pounds. 

Millier  or  tonne — ton  (1,000,000  grams)  =  2,204.6  pounds. 

Volumes 

Milliliter  (1-1,000  liter)  =  0.061  cubic  inch. 
Centiliter  (1-100  liter)  =  0.6102  cubic  inch. 
Deciliter  (1-10  liter)  =  6.1023  cubic  inches. 
Liter  =1,000  cu.  cm.  =  61.023  cubic  inches. 
Hectoliter  (100  liters)  =  2.838  bushels. 
Kiloliter  (1,000  liters)  =  1,308  cubic  yards. 

Liquid    Measures 

Milliliter  (1-1,000  liter)  =  0.0338  fluid  ounce. 
Centiliter  (1-100  liter)  =  0.338  fluid  ounce. 
Deciliter  (1-10  liter)  =  0.845  gill. 
Liter  =  0.908  quart  =  0.2642  gallon. 
Decaliter  (10  liters)  =  2.6418  gallons. 
Hectoliter  (100  liters)  =  26.418  gallons. 
Kiloliter  (1,000  liters)  =  264.18  gallons. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances  185 

Engineering    Data 

The  C.  G.  S.  electrical  units  are  derived  from  the  following  fundamental  units  : 

The  centimeter,  the  union  of  length. 

The  gramme,  the  unit  of  mass. 

The  second,  the  unit  of  time. 

The  centimeter  equals  .3937  of  an  inch,  or  one  thousand-millionth  part  of  a  quadrant  of 
the  earth. 

The  gramme  is  equal  to  15.432  grains,  the  mass  of  a  cubic  centimeter  of  water  at  4°  C. 

The  second  is  the  time  of  one  swing  of  the  pendulum,  making  86,464.09  swings  per 
day,  or  the  1-86400  part  of  a  mean  solar  day. 


Mensuration 

Circumference  of  circle  whose  diameter  is  1  =  ~  =  3.14159265. 

Circumference  of  any  circle  —  diameter  X  TT- 

Area  of  any  circle  =  (radius)2  X  ~,  or  (diameter)2  X  0.7854. 


Surface  of  sphere  =  (diameter)2  X  ~,  or  =  circumference  X  diameter. 
Volume  of  sphere  z=  (diameter)3  X  0.5236,  or  =  surface  X  |  diameter. 


Area  of  an  ellipse  =  long  diameter  X  short  diameter  X  0.7854. 

TT*  =  9.8696;  TT-I  =  1.772454;  ~/4  =  0.7854. 

V-  =  0.31831 ;  log  TT  —  0.4971499. 

Basis  of  natural  log ;  f  =  2.7183  ;  log  <-r  =  0.43429. 

Modulus  of  natural  logarithm  M  =  — —  =  2.3026. 

f  144  Ib.  per  sq.  foot. 

51.7116  mm.  of  mercury. 
1  Ib.  per  sq.  inch  =  ^        2.30665  feet  of  water. 

0.072  ton  (short)  per  sq.  foot. 

0.0680415  atmosphere. 

One  mile  =  320  rods  =  1760  yards  =  5280  feet  =  63,360  inches. 
One  fathom  =  6  feet;  I  knot  =  6080  feet  =  1.15  miles. 
1  cubic  foot  =  1728  cubic  inches. 

1  liquid  gallon  =  231  cubic  inches  =r  0.134  cubic  foot 
1  pound  avoirdupois  —  7000  grains  =  453.6  grammes. 
The  angle  of  which  the  arc  is  equal  to  the  radius,  a  Radian  =  57.2958°. 


Physical    Data 

The  equivalent  of  one  B.  t.  u.  of  heat  =  778  foot-pounds. 

The  equivalent  of  one  calorie  of  heat  =  426  kg-m.,  =  3.968  B.  t.  u. 

One  cubic  foot  of  water  weighs  62.355  pounds  at  62°  F. 

One  cubic  foot  of  air  weighs  0.0807  pound  at  32°  F.  and  one  atmosphere. 

One  cubic  foot  of  hydrogen  weighs  0.00557  pound. 

One  foot-pound  =  1.3562  X  107  ergs. 

One  horse-power  hour  —  33,000  X  60  foot-pounds. 


186 


American    Steel    and    Wire    Company 


Engineering    Data 

One  horse-power  =  33,000  foot-pounds  per  min.  =  550  foot-pounds  per  second  —  746 
watts  =  2545  B.  t.  u.  per  hour 

Acceleration  of  gravity  (g)  =  32.2  feet  per  second. 
=  980  c.  m.  per  second. 

One  atmosphere  =  14.7  pounds  per  square  inch. 
=.  2116  pounds  per  square  foot 
—  760  mm.  of  mercury. 
Velocity  of  sound  at  0°  cent,  in  dry  air  =  332.4  meters  per  second 

~=.  1091  feet  per  second. 

Velocity  of  light  in  vacuum  =  299,853  km.  per  second. 
=  186,325  miles  per  second. 

Specific  heat  of  air  at  constant  pressure  =  0.237. 

A  column  of  water  2.3  feet  high  corresponds  to  a  pressure  of  1  pound  per  square  inch. 
Coefficient  of  expansion  of  gases  =z  ^i?  rrr  0.00367. 
Latent  heat  of  water  =  79.24  cal. 
Latent  heat  of  steam  =  535.9  cal 

CENTIGRADE  DEGREES.  To  convert  into  the  corresponding  one  in  Fahrenheit  degrees 
multiply  by  9/5  and  add  32.  To  convert  it  into  the  one  in  Reaumur  degrees  multiply  by 
4/5.  To  convert  it  into  the  one  on  the  Absolute  scale,  add  273. 

FAHRENHEIT  DEGREES.  To  convert  into  Centigrade  degrees,  subtract  32  and  then 
multiply  by  5/9,  being  careful  about  the  signs  when  the  reading  is  below  the  melting  point 
of  ice  To  convert  it  into  Reaumur  degrees,  subtract  32  and  multiply  by  4/9  To  convert 
it  into  the  Absolute  scale,  subtract  32,  multiply  by  5,  add  2297,  and  divide  by  9 


Decimals  of  an  Inch  and  Millimeters  for  each  1-64  Inch 


c 
-S 

e 

"V 

£-c 
p~ 

1 

Fraction 

a 

«s 

C 

"S 

Decimal 
Inch 

E 
E 

Fraction 

e 

«g 

d 
rtw 

Decimal 
Inch 

mm. 

Fraction 

- 
----- 

c 

-5 
41) 

Decimal 
Inch 

E 
E 

1 

.015625 

.3968 

17 

.265625 

6.7467 

33 

.515625 

13.0966 

.765625 

19.4465 

1 

2 

.03125 

.7937 

9 

18 

.28125 

7.1436 

17 

34 

.53125 

13.4934 

25 

50 

.78125 

19.8433 

3 

.046875 

1.1906 

19 

.296875 

7.5404 

35 

.546875 

13.8903 

51 

.796875 

20.2402 

2 

4 

.0625 

1.5874 

h 

10 

20 

.3125 

7.9373 

A 

18 

86 

.5625 

14.2872 

& 

26 

5-2 

.8125 

20.6371 

5 

.078125 

1.9843 

21 

.328125 

8.3342 

37 

.578125 

14.6841 

53 

.828125 

21.0339 

a 

6 

.09375 

2.3812 

11 

22 

.34375 

8.7310 

19 

88 

.59375 

15.0809 

27 

54 

.84375 

21.4308 

7 

.109375 

2.7780 

23 

.359375 

9.1279 

39 

.609375 

15.4778 

55 

.859375 

21.8277 

4 

8 

.125 

3.1749 

l/s 

12 

24 

.375 

9.5248 

H 

20 

40 

.625 

15.8747 

-H 

28 

51  1 

.875 

22.2245 

9 

.140625 

3.5718 

25 

.390625 

9.9216 

41 

.640625 

16.2715 

57 

.890625 

22.6214 

5 

10 

.  15625 

3.9686 

18 

26 

.40625 

10.3185 

21 

42 

.65625 

16.6684 

29 

5S 

.90625 

23.0183 

11 

.171875 

4.3655 

27 

.421875 

10.7154 

43 

.671875 

17.0653 

59 

.921875 

23.4151 

6 

12 

.1875 

4.7624 

i3,., 

14 

28 

.4375 

11.1122 

1?B 

22 

44 

.6875 

17.4621 

U 

30 

60 

.9375 

23.8120 

13 

.203125 

5.1592 

29 

.453125 

11.5091 

45 

.703125 

17  8590 

61 

.953125 

24.20S9 

7 

14 

.21875 

5.5561 

15 

30 

.46875 

11.9060 

23 

46 

.71875 

18.2559 

81 

62 

.96875 

24.6057 

15 

.234375 

5.9530 

31 

.484375 

12.3029 

47 

.734375 

18.6527 

63 

.984375 

25.0026 

8 

u; 

.2500 

6.3498 

% 

16 

32 

.500 

12.6997 

% 

24 

48 

.75 

19.0496 

•X 

82 

(54 

1.0000 

25.3995 

Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


187 


Engineering   Data 

Areas    and    Circumferences    of    Circles 


Diam- 
eter 

Circum- 
ference 

Area 

Diam- 
eter 

Circum- 
ference 

Area 

Diam- 
eter 

Circum- 
ference 

Area 

~7~ 

.049087             .00019 

2. 

6.28319 

3.1416 

5. 

15.7080 

19.635 

312 

.098175 

.00077 

IS 

6.47953 

3.3410 

i^ 

15.9043 

20.129 

B34 

.147262 

.00173 

y& 

6.67588 

3.5466 

Ji 

16.1007 

20.629 

A 

.196350 

.00307 

TB 

6.87223 

3.7583 

13B 

16.2970 

21.135 

335 

.294524 

.00690 

% 

7.06858 

3.9761 

y. 

16.4934 

21.648 

H 

.392699 

.01227 

I5B 

7.26493 

4.2000 

156 

16.6897 

22.166 

352 

.490874 

.01917 

3/Z 

7.46128 

4.4301 

H 

16.8861 

22.691 

I3B 

.589049 

.02761 

IB 

7.65763 

4.6664 

IB 

17.0824 

23.221 

373 

.687223 

.03758 

y2 

7.85398 

4.9087 

yz 

17.2788 

23.758 

% 

.785398 

.04909 

IB 

8.05033 

5.1572 

T% 

17.4751 

24.301 

3% 

.883573 

.06213 

H 

8.24668 

5.4119 

% 

17.6715 

24.850 

ise 

.981748 

.07670 

\l 

8.44303 

5.6727 

\l 

17.8678 

25.406 

35 

1.07992 

.09281 

3A 

8.63938 

5.9396 

y\ 

18.0642 

25.967 

3/S 

1.17810 

.11045 

51 

8.83573 

6.2126 

H 

18.2605 

26.535 

&f 

1.27627 

.12962 

% 

9.03208 

6.4918 

% 

18.4569 

27.109 

1.37445 

.15033 

if 

9.22843 

6.7771 

11 

18.6532 

27.688 

32^ 
IB 

1.47263 
1.57080 
1.66897 
1.76715 
1.86532 

.17257 
.19635 
.22166 
.24850 
.27688 

3. 

9.42478 
9.62113 
9.81748 
10.0138 

7.0686 
7.3662 
7.6699 
7.9798 

6. 

18.8496 
19.2423 
19.6350 
20.0277 

28.274 
29.465 
30.680 
31.919 

32 
H 

H 

if 

1.96350 

2.06167 
2.15984 
2.25802 

.30680 
.33824 
.37122 
.40574 

-/* 

10.2102 
10.4065 
10.6029 
10.7992 

8.2958 
8.6179 
8.9462 
9.2806 

% 

20.4204 
20.8131 
21.2058 
21.5984 

33.183 
34.472 
35.785 
37.122 

2.35619 

.44179 

1A 

10.9956 

9.6211 

7.                  21.9911 

38.485 

if 

2.45437               .47937 

is 

11.1919 

9.9678 

22.3838 

39.871 

ii 

2.55254               .51849 

5/8 

11.3883 

10.321 

y 

22.7765 

41.282 

§1 

2.65072 

.55914 

u 

11.5846 

10.680 

23.1692 

42.718 

2.74889 

.60132 

K 

11.7810 

11.045 

y 

23.5619 

44.179 

11 

2.84707 

.64504 

ii 

11.9773 

11.416 

y 

23.9546 

45.664 

51 

2.94524 

.69029 

% 

12.1737 

11.793 

y 

24.3473 

47.173 

y 

3.04342 

.73708 

it 

12.3700 

12.177 

% 

24.7400 

48.707 

i. 

3.14159 

.78540 

4. 

12.5664 

12.566 

8. 

25.1327 

50.265 

I3B 

3.33794 

.88664 

is 

12.7627 

12.962 

25.5254 

51.849 

y& 

3.53429 

.99402 

y& 

12.9591 

13.364 

y 

25.9181 

53.456 

A 

3.73064 

1.1075 

h 

13.1554 

13.772 

3/8 

26.3108 

55.088 

/< 

3.92699 

1.2272 

y* 

13.3518 

14.186 

26.7035 

56.745 

15B 

4.12334             1.3530 

iss 

13.5481 

14.607 

5/8 

27.0962 

58.426 

y& 

4.31969             1.4849 

H 

13.7445 

15.033 

27.4889 

60.132 

IB 

4.51601 

1.6230 

/5 

13.9408 

15.466 

% 

27.8816 

61.862 

y2 

4.71239 

1.7671 

y2 

14.1372 

15.904 

16 

4.90874 

1.9175 

IS 

14.3335 

16.349 

9. 

28.2743 

63.617 

f? 

5.10509 

2.0739 

ys 

14.5299 

16.800 

y& 

28.6670 

65.397 

11 

5.30144 

2.2365 

15 

14.7262 

17.257 

y* 

29.0597 

67.201 

K 

5.49779 

2.4053 

3/4 

14.9226 

17.721 

H 

29.4524 

69.029 

13 

5.69414 

2.5802 

1| 

15.1189 

18.190 

K 

29.8451 

70.882 

^8 

5.89049 

2.7612 

% 

15.3153 

18.665- 

H 

30.2378 

72.760 

ii 

6.08684 

2.9483 

il 

15.5116 

19.147 

3/4 

30.6305 

74.662 

Products  of  the 

American  Steel  &  Wire  Co. 


American  Wire  Rope 

Aeroplane  Wire  and  Strand 

Piano  Wire 

Mattress  Wire 

Weaving  Wire 

Broom  Wire 

Fence  Wire 

Flat  Wire— Flat  Cold  Rolled  Steel 

Wire  Hoops 

Electrical  Wires  and  Cables 

Rail  Bonds 

Bale  Ties 

Tacks 

Nails,  Staples,  Spikes 

Barbed  Wire 

Woven  Wire  Fencing 

Fence  Gates 

Steel  Fence  Posts 

Concrete  Reinforcement 

Springs 

Sulphate  of  Iron 

Poultry  Netting 

Wire  Rods 

Juniata   Horse  Shoes  and  Calks 

Shafting,  Cold  Drawn  Steel 

Wire  of  Every  Description 

We  issue  separate  catalogues  for  each 
of  these  products.  Gladly  furnished  upon 
request. 

SALES  OFFICES 

BOSTON 120  Franklin  Street  SALT  LAKE  CITY,  UTAH 

CINCINNATI       .     Union  Trust  Building  736  South  3rd  West  Street 

CLEVELAND,  Western  Reserve  Building  SEATTLE,  WASH. 

DETROIT Ford  Building  4th  Avenue  South  and  Connecticut  Street 

LOS  ANGELES  ST.  PAUL-MINNEAPOLIS 

Jackson  and  Central  Avenues  Pioneer  Press  Building,  St.  Paul 

P.TTSBURG    .    Bank  °'  °E£  B±i:;        ST.  LOU.S,  Thir<J  H-taU  Bank  BuiUtag 
PORTLAND,  ORE.  LONDON,  ENG. 

Ninth  and  Irving  Streets  36  New  Broad  Street,  E.  C. 


EXPORT    REPRESENTATIVES 
United  States  Steel  Products  Co.,  30  Church  Street,  New  York,  N.  Y. 


Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


189 


A 

Alternating  Currents 
Alternating  Current  Heating  Effec 
Amalgamation  of  Contact  Surfaces 
Ampere        
Arcing  Distance  in  Air 
Area  of  Contact  Surfaces 
A.  S.  &  W.  Bond  Tester      . 

B 

Blunting  Punch  No.  11  . 
Board  of  Trade  Regulations,  Britis 
Bond  Tester,  Crown 
Bond  Tester,  A.  S.  &  W.       . 
Bond  Wire,  Galvanized 
Bonded  Joints,  Resistance  of 
Bonding  Appliances 
Bonding,  Graduated 
Bonding  Tools  
Bonds,  Crown            .                             ] 

In<3 

PAGE 
156,  159 
ts       158 
24 
.       146 
.       162 
.  20-22 
41,  136 

.       143 
,h  43-47 
41,  138 
41,  136 
.       165 
34 
93 
36 
93 
.3,  60,  86 
75 

lex 

PAGE 
Conductors,  Parallel        ....        156 
Conductors,  Property  of        ...        151 
Conductors,  Rail  Bond  .        .        .        .  26,  29 
Conductors,  Series            ....        156 
Concealed  Rail  Bonds    ....          30 
Contact  of  Stud  Terminals    .       .       .  22-25 
Contact  Surfaces,  Amalgamation  of  .          24 
Contact  Surfaces,  Area  of     ...   20-22 
Contacts,  Photo-micrograph  of    .                 25 
Contacts,  Temperature  Effects  on      .         26 
Contents,  Table  of  .        .                                   ft 

Conversion  Tables   .... 
Copper 

186,  187 
13 

Crosby  Wire  Clips  .... 
Cross  Bond        
Crown  Bond  Tester 
Crown  Bonds,  Dimensions  of 
Crown  Rail  Bonds    .... 
Crown  Rail  Bonds,  Type  C.  P.  01 
Type  C    P    02 

.       169 
55 
41,  138 
74 
13,  60,  86 
.  61,  62 
64  73 

Bonds  for  T-Rail 

Bonds,  Soldered  Rail 
Bonds,  Soldered  Stud     . 
Bonds,  Styles  of       .... 
Bonds,  Twin  Terminal   . 
Bonds,  United  States 
British  Board  of  Trade  Regulations 

C 

Cables,  Paper  Insulated 
Cambric  Cables,  Varnished  . 
Capacity,  Electrostatic    . 
Cars,  Power  to  Propel    . 
Carrying  Capacity  of  Rail  Bonds 
Charging  Current 

.  14,  58 
.  14,  56 
.  13,  51 
.  14,  52 
.  14,76 
.  43-47 

.       175 

.       175 
.       157 
160,  182 
.  32-37 
157 

Type  C.  P.  03     .       .       .       . 
Type  C.  P.  04     . 
Type  C.  P   06     . 

63 
65 
66 

Type  C.  P.  1 
Type  C.  P    2 

67 
69 

Type  C.  P.  3       .       .       .       . 
Type  C    P   4 

68 
70 

Type  C.  S.  01     .       .       .        . 
Type  C.  S    02     . 

62 
64 

Type  C    S    03 

63 

Type  C.  S.  04     .        .       .       . 
Type  C.  S    06     . 

65 
66 

Type  C.  S.  1 

67 

Chicago  Bond    
Circles,  Functions  of       ... 
Circuits        
Circular  Mils      
Clamp  No.  84    
Clamp  No.  85    
Clamp,  Three-bolt  Stranded 
Compressors,  Screw 
Compressors,  Screw  Hydraulic    . 
Compressors,  Nos.  40  to  48 
No    61 

88 
.       187 
.       147 
.       148 
.       131 
.       131 
.       169 
.       120 
122-127 
.       120 
122 

Tyoe  C.  S.  2 

69 

Type  C    S    3 

68 

Type  C    S    4 

70 

Tvpe  C.  P.  C 

72 

Type  C    P    F 

.  73  87 

Type  C.  P.  G. 

89 

Type  C.  P.  M     . 

90 

Type  C.  P.  N  
Type  C.  P.  N.  D      . 
Type  C.  P.  0  
Type  C    P    OF  . 

90 
90 
90 
71 

No.  63-064  
No.  68   
Conductivity      
Conductors,  Electric 

.       124 
.       126 
.       148 
147,  148 

Type  C.  P.  OG  . 
Type  C.  P.  S  
Type  C    P    T.            ... 

88 
86 
72 

Type  C.  P.  X  

89 

190 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Bonds 
&  W. 


Crown  Rail  Bonds,  Type  C.  S.  F. 

Type  C.  S.  G  ..... 

Type  C.  S.  M  ..... 

Type  C.  S.  N  ..... 

Type  C.  S.  O  ..... 

Type  C.  S.  OF  .        .        . 

Type  C.  S.  OG  . 

Type  C.  S.  S  ..... 

Type  C.  S.  X  ..... 
Current,  Electric       .... 
Cutter,  Groove  No.  14  . 
Cutter,  Groove  No.  16   .. 

D 

Degree  of  Railway  Curves    . 
Dimensions  of  Crown  Bonds 
Dimensions  of  United  States 
Directions  for  Operating  A.  S. 

Bond  Tester        ..... 

Crown  Bond  Tester  . 

Type  20  Drill      ..... 

Type    20-  M  Drill       .        .        .        . 

Type  021        Drill  .        . 

Type    21        Drill      .       .        .        . 

Type    21-  M  Drill      .        .       .     •  . 
.     Type    22        Drill      . 

Type    22-  M  Drill      . 

Type  61    Screw   Hydraulic   Com- 
pressor   ...... 

Type  66  Hydraulic  Punch      . 

Type   68   Screw   Hydraulic   Com- 
pressor   . 

Type  83  Brazier  . 
Drift  Pins    .... 
Drill  Grinder  No.  16 
Drilling  Machines     . 
Drilling  Machine  No.  19 

No.  20  .       .       .       . 

No.  20-M      .       .       . 

No.  021        ... 

No.  21    . 

No.  21  -M      .       .       . 

No.  22  .       .       .       . 

No.  22-  M      . 

No.  24-  M     .       . 
Drills,  Twist 
Driver  or  Set,  Tool  No.  17 


Electric  Current 
Electric  Grinder  No.  81 


PAGE 

87 

89 

90 

90 

90 

71 

88 

86 

89 

146 

142 

142 


180 
74 

85 

136 

138 

107 

107 

116 

114 

119 

95 

98 

122 
129 


PAGE 

Electrical  Contacts 22-25 

Electricity,  Notes  on  ...  146-162 
Electromotive  Force  ....  147 
Elevation  of  Outer  Rail  on  Curve  .  181 

Energy  Loss 35 

Expanding  Hammer  No.  10  .  .  143 
Exposed  Rail  Bonds  ....  30 


Frequency 156 


Galvanized  Bond  Wire   .        .       .        .  165 

Galvanized  Steel  Signal  Wire      .       .  165 
Galvanized  Steel  Strand        .        .       165-167 

Galvanized  Wire,  Telegraph        .        .  164 

Galvanized  Wire,  Telephone        .        .  164 

Gauges,  Wire 149 

General  Consideration,  Bonding .        .  12 

Graduated  Bonding         ....  36 

Grinder  No.  81,  Electric        .        .       .  132 

Grinder,  No.  80,  Hand  Power      .       .  132 

Grinder,  Drill  No.  16       .        .        .        .  140 

Groove  Cutter  No.  14    ....  142 

Groove  Cutter  No.  16    ....  142 

Grounded  Conductors    ....  148 

H 

Hammer,  Expanding  No.  10        .        .  143 

Hand  Power  Grinder,  No.  80      .        .  132 

Heating  Effects,  Alternating  Current  158 


.       126 

Hydraulic  Punch  No.  66 

.       128 

.       135 

17 

I 

140 

Induction     

.       157 

94-119 

Impedance  

.       157 

116 

Installation  of  Rail  Bonds     . 

.  37,38 

106-109 

106-111 

L 

116 

Length  of  Rail  Bonds     . 

31 

112-115 

List  of  Products        .... 

.       188 

.       118 

.  94-97 

M 

98-101 

Magnet  Wire     

170,  171 

102-105 

Material  for  Soldering    . 

.       131 

.       140 

Materials,  Specific  Gravity  of 

.       183 

.       144 

Materials,  Weight  of       ... 

.       183 

Mensuration       

.       185 

Metric  Weights  and  Measures     . 

.       184 

.       146 

Mile-ohm,  Weight  per    . 

.       154 

132 

Mils 

148 

Rail    Bonds    and    Appliances 


191 


N 

PAGE 

Resistance     

PAGE 

150 

Notes  on  Electricity 
O 

.       146-162 

Resistance  of  Bonded  Joints 
Resistance  of  Rail  Joints 
Resistivity  . 

34 
33 
150 

Ohms    
Ohm's  Law        .... 

.       .       150 
.       .       156 

Resistivity,Temperature  Coefficient  of 
Rubber-covered  Wires    .... 

154 
174 

Ohms  per  mil-foot 151 

Oil  on  Drills 24 

Operating  Directions  for  (see  Direc- 
tions for  Operating) 
Orders,  Regarding 10 


Paper  Insulated  Cables  ....  175 
Parallel  Conductors         ....  156 
Photo-micrograph  of  Contacts    .        .  25 
Photo-micrograph    of    Terminal-con- 
ductor Weld 29 

Physical  Data 185 

Pins,  Drift 17 

Pole  Steps 168 

Power-factor 157 

Power  Required  by  Cars        .        .        .  160 

Power  to  Propel  Cars      ....  182 

Preface                7 

Properties  of  Conductors       .       .        .  151 

Punch,  Blunting  No.  11  ...  143 
Punch,  Hydraulic  No.  66  .  .  128,  130 
Punches,  Taper  .  .  .  .  17,  144 


R 

Radius  of  Railway  Curve 
Rail  Bond  Conductors    . 
Rail  Bond  Specifications 
Rail  Bonds,  Carrying  Capacity 
Rail  Bonds,  Concealed   . 
Rail  Bonds,  Crown  . 
Rail  Bonds,  Exposed 
Rail  Bonds,  Installation  of    . 
Rail  Bonds,  Length  of    . 
Rail  Bonds  for  Rail  Flanges 
Rail  Bonds  for  Rail  Heads    . 
Rail  Bonds  for  Rail  Webs     . 
Rail  Bonds,  Selection  of 
Rail  Bonds,  Testing  of    . 
Rail,  Data  Steel 
Rail  Flange,  Rail  Bonds  for  . 
Rail  Heads,  Rail  Bonds  for  . 
Rail  Joint  Resistances    . 
Rail  WTebs,  Rail  Bonds  for    . 
Regarding  Orders 


of 


180 
26,29 
47 

32-37 
.  .  30 
.  13,  60,  86 
.  .  30 
.  .  37,  38 
.  .  31 
.  .  91,  92 
.  .  51-59 
.  .  60-89 
.  .  30 
.  .  39-41 
33,  177,  179 
.  .  91,  92 
.  .  51-59 
.  .  33 
.  .  60-89 
10 


Sales  Offices 

Screw  Compressors 

Screw  Hydraulic  Compressors    . 

Selection  of  Rail  Bonds 

Self-induction 

Series  Conductors  .... 
Signal  Wire,  Galvanized  Steel  . 
Socket  Terminals,  Type  C.  P.  M. 

Type  C.  S.  M 

Type  C.  P.  N 

Type  C.  S.  N 

Type  C.  P.  N.  D.      . 

Type  C    P.  O 

Type  C.  S.  O 

Soldered  Rail  Bonds 
Soldered  Rail  Bond,  Form  1 

Form  IB 

Form  2 

Form  Cl 

Form  C2 

Form  C3 

Form  C4 

Form  CF 

Form  Ul 

Form  U2 

Form  U3 

Form  U4 

Soldered  Stud  Rail  Bonds     . 
Soldered  Stud  Rail  Bond,  Form  A 

Form  B 

Form  Cl 

Form  C2 

Form  C3 

Form  C4 

Form  CF 

Form  Ul 

Form  U2 

Form  U3 

Form  U4 

Soldered  Stud  Terminals 
Soldered  Terminals 
Soldering  Clamp,  No.  84 


4 

.   120 

122-127 

.    30 

157 

156 

.   165 


90 
90 
90 
90 
90 
90 

14,58 
58 
59 
91 
67 
69 
68 
70 
71 
81 
83 
82 
84 

14,56 
56 
57 
67 
69 
68 
70 
71 
81 
83 
82 
84 
20 
19 
131 


192 


American    Steel    and  Wire    Company 


Soldering  Clamp,  No.  85 
Soldering  Material    . 
Solid  Stud  Terminals 
Specific  Gravity  of  Materials 
Specific  Resistance  . 
Specifications  for  Rail  Bonds 


PAGE 
131 
131 

15 
183 
150 

47 


Steel  Rail  Data  .  .  33,  75,  177,  179 
Strand,  Galvanized  Steel  .  .  165-167 
Stud  Terminals,  Contact  of  .  .  22-25 
Styles  of  Bonds 13,  51 


T- Rails,  Bonds  for 75 

Taper  Punches 17,  144 

Telegraph  Wire,  Galvanized        .        .  164 

Telephone  Wire,  Galvanized       .        .  164 

Temperature  Coefficient  of  Resistivity  154 

Temperature  Effects  on  Contacts       .  26 

Terminals,  Bond 14-20 

Terminals,  Socket 90 

Terminals,  Soldered        ....  19 

Terminals,  Soldered  Stud      ...  20 

Terminals,  Solid  Stud    ....  15 

Terminals,  Tubular 15 

Terminals,  Twin 18 

Testers,  Bond 41,  138 

Testing  of  Rail  Bonds    ....  39-41 

Tests,  Vibration 27 

Three-bolted  Stranded  Clamp     .        .  169 

Tools  and  Appliances     ....  93 

Torch  or  Brazier  No.  83        ...  134 

Transformers 158 

Trolley  \Vire 163 

Tubular  Terminals 15 

Twist  Drills,  6-inch  Blacksmith's        .  140 

Twin  Terminals 18 

Twin  Terminal  Rail  Bonds    .       .        .14,  54 

Twin  Terminal  Rail  Bonds,  Form  A  54 

Form  B 54 

Form  C 55 

Type    B.   S.   B.   Bond  (see    Soldered 

Stud  Rail  Bonds) 

Type  C.  S.  Bonds  (see  Crown  Bonds) 
Type  C.  P.  Bond  (see  Crown  Bonds) 
Type  S.  B.  Bond  (see  Soldered  Bonds) 


PAGE 
Type  U.  P.  Bonds  (see  United  States 

Bonds) 
Type  U.  S.  Bonds  (see  United  States 

Bonds) 

U 

Union   Between    Terminal  and  Con- 
ductor      29 

United  States  Bonds       .        .        .        .  14,  76 

United  States  Bonds,  Dimensions  of  85 

United   States    Bond,  Type  U.  P.  01  76 

Type  U.  S.  01 76 

Type  U.  P.  02 78 

Type  U.  S.  02 78 

Type  U.  P.  03 77 

Type  U.  S.  03 77 

Type  U.  P.  04 79 

Type  U.  S.  04    .        .        .        .        .  79 

Type  U.  S.  05 80 

Type  U.  P.  06 80 

Type  U.  P.  1 81 

Type  U.  S.  1 81 

Type  U.  P.  2 83 

Type  U.  S.  2 83 

Type  U.  P.  3 82 

Type  U.  S.  3 82 

Type  U.  P.  4 84 

Type  U.  S.  4 84 

Type  U.  S.  B 92 

V 

Varnished  Cambric  Cables    .        .        .  175 

Vibration  Tests 27 

Voltage 147 

W 

Watts 157 

Weatherproof  W7ire  .  .  .  172,  173 
Weight  of  Materials  ....  183 
Weight  per  Mile-ohm  ....  154 
Weights  and  Measures,  Metric  .  .  184 
Weld,  Terminal-conductor  Photo- 
micrograph    29 

\Veld  between  Terminal  and  Conduc- 
tor    29 

Wire  Gauges 149 

Wiring  Formulae 161 

Wiring  Tables    ....      152-153, 155 


American   Steel   &  Wire 
Company 


II  BARS     55  INCH 


DISTANCE  BETWEEN 

BARS-INCHES 


American  Railway  Fence 

We  manufacture  and  build  railway  fences 
of  varying  styles  and  weights.  These  fences 
meet  all  requirements  and  conditions  in  a  sat- 
isfactory manner.  We  guarantee  quality,  effi- 
ciency and  durability,  and  agree  to  furnish 
better  right-of-way  protection  for  less  money 
than  can  be  secured  by  the  use  of  any  other 
material  or  form  of  fencing. 

Prices  for  fencing  or  estimates  of  cost  of 
building  along  right-of-way  promptly  furnished. 


Carnegie    Steel    Company 

General    Offices      -      Pittsburg,    Pennsylvania 

Duquesne    Rail   Joints 


Properly  maintained  rail  bonds  are 
possible  with  a  rail  joint  as  efficient  as 
the  Duquesne. 

Used  by  the  most  important  trunk 
lines. 


Carnegie    Steel    Company 

General    Offices      •      Pittsburg,     Pennsylvania 


Steel  Cross  Ties 


M  26  STEEL  Citos.s  7/E. 


Eight  sections  of  Steel  Cross  Ties 
which  we  are  now  making  are  used  for  all 
classes  of  track,  from  the  standard  rail- 
road down  to  the  light  portable  track 
for  construction  and  mine  purposes. 


Carnegie    Steel    Company 

General    Offices      -      Pittsburg,    Pennsylvania 

are  now  furnishing  large  quantities  of 
Steel  Cross  Ties  for  city  work  as 
shown  below. 


These  ties  are  spaced  four  foot  centers 
in  concrete.  Results  obtained  from  this 
type  of  construction  are  highly  satis- 
factory. 


The 
Use  of  Concrete 

for  power  plants,  dams   and 
foundations    is    established,    and 
the  superior  advantages  of  concrete 
in   the   design  of   hydraulic   structures 
are    recognized    by    all    engineers.      The 
Use  of  Universal  Portland  Cement 
in  concrete  work  insures  the  highest  grade 
of  Portland  cement  possible  to  make.     It 
is  absolutely  uniform  in  soundness,  fine- 
ness, strength  and  setting  properties. 


Universal 

Portland  Cement  Co. 
Chicago  -  Pittsburg 


Annual  Outpu 
10,000,000  Barrel 


Lorain  Girder  Rails 
Tee   Rails 


Special  Track  Work 

Electrically  Welded   Joints 


The  Lorain  Steel  Company 

Johnstown,  Pa. 


Sales    Offices 

Atlanta  Chicago  Cleveland  New  York 

Philadelphia  Pittsburgh  Portland,  Ore. 

St.   Louis  San  Francisco 


Export    Representatives 

United  States  Steel  Products  Co. 

3O   Church   Street,  New   York 


American  Bridge  Company 

of  New  York 

General  Offices :     Hudson  Terminal  Building 

3O  Chvirch  Street 

New  York  City 

Branch  Offices  in  all  Principal  Cities 

• 

Structural  Steel  Work  for  Street  Railways 

Bridges      Viaducts       Car  Barns       Turntables 

Power  Houses       Transformer  Stations 

Transmission  Towers 


Structural  Steel  Work  for  Every  Purpose 


Shelby  Seamless  Cold-drawn 
Steel  Trolley  Poles 


Standard  "A"  Pole  (note  reinforcement  in  section) 


Standard  "B"  Pole  (note  reinforcement  in  section) 
Standard  "A"  Pole  Standard  "B"   Pole,   Reinforced 


For  ordinary  street  service 


To  withstand  severe  service 


Tubular 

Plain 

Various  Shapes 
Practically  Indestructible 

National 

General     Sales    Office 
Frick  Building 

Pittsburgh,  Pa. 


Steel  Poles 


Ornamental 


All  Sizes 


Full  Details  on   Request 


Tube  Company 

District  Sales    Offices 

Atlanta,     Chicago,      Denver,      New 
Orleans,      New     York,      Philadelphia, 
Pittsburgh,    Portland,    St.    Louis,    Salt 
Lake  City,  San  Francisco,  Seattle 
Export   Representatives 
U.  S.  Steel  Products  Co.,  New  York  City 


Always  Buy  Tested  Material 

Shelby  Seamless  Cold-Drawn  Steel 

Trolley  Poles 


are  tested  in  a  specially 
designed  machine,  one 
view  of  which  is  here 
illustrated. 

The  machine  is  so 
designed  that  deflection 
and  elastic  limit  are  defi- 
nitely measured  by  a 
micrometer  with  an  accu- 
racy which  allows  only  a 
small  per  cent  for  error. 


Shelby  Seamless  Cold-Drawn  Steel 
Trolley  Poles 

are  furnished  in  two  types:  Standard  "A"  Poles,  for  ordinary 
street  service ;  Standard  "  B  "  Poles  (  Reinforced ),  for  extra 
severe  service. 

National  Tube  Company 

General   Sales    Offices,  Frick  Building,  Pittsburgh,   Pa. 

District  Sales  Offices 

Atlanta  Chicago  Denver  New  Orleans  New  York 

Philadelphia  Pittsburgh  Portland  St.  Louis 

Salt  Lake  City  San  Francisco  Seattle 


Export  Representatives  :     U.  S.  Steel  Products  Co.,  New  York  City 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 


19 


30m-l,'15 


7 


270319 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY